人教版英语八年级下册全册精美导学案，精品2套+测试题

人教版英语八年级下册全册精美导学案，精品2套+测试题

人教版英语八年级 下册全册精美导学案，精品 2 套+测试题 人教版新目标（新）八年级下册电子教案 Unit 1 What's the matter? 第一课时 Section A (1a2d) 1.重点单词：matter，back，sore，throat，stomachache，foot，neck，stomach，fever， lie，rest，cough，Xray，toothache，headache 2．重点短语：have a sore throat，have a stomachache，have a cold，lie down，take one's temperature，have a fever，go to a doctor 3．重点句式： —What's the matter? —She talked too much yesterday and didn't drink enough water.She has a very sore throat now. You should drink some hot tea with honey. It doesn't sound like you have a fever. You need to take breaks away from the computer. I think I sat in the same way for too long without moving. If your head and neck still hurt tomorrow，then go to a doctor. 1．重点短语和句型 2．询问对方身体状况的句型及答语 询问对方身体状况的句型及答语 一、 预习课本 P12 新单词并背诵，完成下面的汉译英。 1．问题____________ 2.背部____________ 3．疼痛的____________ 4.嗓子____________ 5．胃痛____________ 6.脚____________ 7．脖子____________ 8.胃____________ 9．发烧____________ 10.平躺____________ 11．休息____________ 12.咳嗽____________ 13．X 光____________ 14.牙疼____________ 15．头疼____________ 二、 认真预习 1a2d 找出下列短语和句型。 1．你应该喝一些加蜂蜜的热茶。 ________________________________________________________________________ 2．听起来你不像是发烧了。 ________________________________________________________________________ 3. 你需要休息远离电脑。 ________________________________________________________________________ 4．我想我以同样的方式坐得太久没有动了。 ________________________________________________________________________ 5．如果你的头和脖子明天仍然疼，就去看医生。 ________________________________________________________________________ Step 1 情景导入 (Show some pictures about people's illness to the students) Teacher: What's the matter with them？Then help the students answer the question in English. 环节说明：由图片入手图文并茂，引起学生的学习兴趣。 Step 2 完成教材 1a1c 的任务 1．学生朗读 1a 中的单词，教师纠正错误读音，然后学生识记单词并将单词和身体部位 匹配。(3 分钟)。 2．让学生仔细观察 1a 图片中的人物，然后认真听录音，按听到的顺序为 1b 中的人物 标号，完成课本上 1b 的听力任务。(3 分钟) 3．再听一遍录音，并跟读对话。(2 分钟) 4．结对练习 1c 中的对话，并请一些学生展示他们的对话。(3 分钟) 5．让学生模仿 1c 中的对话，结合 1b 的答案材料与同伴编练新对话，并邀请几组学生 表演对话。(5 分钟) 参考案例 A：What's the matter? B：She talked too much yesterday and didn't drink enough water.She has a very sore throat now. 6．小结训练。(3 分钟) (B)1.—What's ________？ —I have a sore back. A．matter B．the matter C．the question D．the wrong (B)2.Watching TV ________ is bad for your eyes. A．too many B．too much C．much too D．very much (B)3.The girl is ________ a ticket. A．enough tall buying B．tall enough to buy C．tall enough buying D．enough tall to buy (A)4.—What's the matter ________ the little girl? —She has a cold. A．with B．of C．at D．about 环节说明：听说结合，第一时间向学生传达语言目标，通过结对对话练习和小结训练， 使语言目标得以强化。 Step 3 完成教材 2a2c 的任务 1.认真观察 2a 图片，按听到的对话顺序给图片标号，集体核对答案。(3 分钟) 2．认真阅读 2b 中的单词和短语，再听一遍录音，将问题和建议匹配，完成后集体核对 答案。(3 分钟) 3．听第三遍录音，让学生跟读。(3 分钟) 4．让学生利用 2a，2b 中的信息仿照 2c 的形式练习对话，并要求几组同学表演对话。 (5 分钟) 参考案例 A：What's the matter? B：My head feels very hot. A：Maybe you have a fever... B：... 5．小结训练。(3 分钟) (D)1.—I have a cold and a headache. —________ A．What's the matter with you? B．What's wrong with you? C．You are ill. D．You should drink a lot of water and go to see the doctor. (C)2.I don't like coffee，I like milk ________ sugar. A．for B．in C．with D．at (D)3.When I was walking through the park.I saw a dog ________ on the road. A．lie B．liing C．lieing D．lying (C)4.Tom felt very hot，the doctor let him ________ first. A．lie down and rest B．drink some hot tea with honey C．take his temperature D．get an Xray (D)5.The boy had a ________，so he had to see a dentist. A．temperature B．fever C．cold D．toothache 环节说明：通过读、写、听、说学习训练让学生掌握询问对方身体状况的句型及答语， 并且使学生的口语表达能力在这一环节得到提升。 Step 4 完成教材 2d 的任务 1．学生自读对话，回答下面的问题。(5 分钟) ①What's the matter with Lisa? ②Why does Lisa's head and neck hurt? ③What should we do if we play computer games for a long time? 2．大声朗读 2d 中的对话，读熟后与同伴结对练习，分角色表演对话。(3 分钟) 3．邀请三组来表演对话。(5 分钟) 4．小结训练。(3 分钟) 1．听起来你不像是发烧了。 It doesn't sound like you have a fever． 2．你需要休息远离电脑。 You should take breaks away from the computer. 3．我想我以同样的方式坐得太久没有动了。 I think I sat in the same way for long without moving． 环节说明：将对话问题化，既能锻炼学生的思维能力又能加深对课文的理解。小结训练 又对对话中的重要句型进行了巩固加深。 Step 5 问题探究 1．你怎么了？What's_the_matter? 这句话通常用于询问别人身体有什么不舒服，或有何麻烦，后跟 with 构成：What's the matter with...？类似的句子还有：What's_wrong_with...? 和 What_happened_to...？他们的答语 往往是表示得了什么病，或什么地方不舒服，常用句型“I_have_a_...”。如：have a headache， have_a_toothache( 牙 疼 ) ， have a sore throat ， have a cold ， have_a_sore_back( 背 疼 ), have_a_fever(发烧)等。 2．should 的运用 他应该吃更多的水果。He_should_eat_more_fruit. should 是情态动词，本单元表示“应该，应当”， 后加动词原形，可用于各种人称。 它比 must 的语气要委婉，用来表示向对方提出建议或忠告，或者表示某种义务或责任。其 否定形式为 shouldn't，意思是“不应该，不应当”。 3．Do you like milk ________ sugar? A．with B．for C．in D．to 答案选择 A，with 介词，“带有……”的意思。 4．We are all tired，let's ________． A．take a walk B．have a fever C．take our temperature D．take a break 答案选择 D，根据句意可知为“我们累了，让我们休息一会吧”，take a break 意为“休 息”。 请学生们做前面课时训练部分。 第二课时 Section A (3a3c) 1.重点单词：passenger，trouble 2．重点短语：get off，to one's surprise，agree to do sth.，thanks to，in time，right away， get into trouble 3．重点句式： At 9：00 a．m.yesterday，bus No.26 was going along Zhonghua Road when the driver saw an old man lying on the side of the road. The bus driver，24yearold Wang Ping，stopped the bus without thinking twice. He expected most or all of the passengers to get off and wait for the next bus. To his surprise，they all agreed to go with him. The driver didn't think about himself.He only thought about saving a life. They don't want to get into trouble. 重点短语及句型 重点短语及句型 一、 预习课本 P3 新单词并背诵，完成下面的汉译英。 1．乘客____________ 2．问题____________ 二、 认真预习 3a3c 找出下列短语和句型。 1．昨天早上九点，26 路公交车正沿着中华路行驶，这时司机看见一位老人正躺在路边。 ________________________________________________________________________ 2．24 岁的公交车司机王平毫不犹豫地就停车了。 ________________________________________________________________________ 3．他希望大多数的或是全部的乘客下车等待下一辆汽车。 ________________________________________________________________________ 4．使他惊讶的是，他们都同意和他一起去。 ________________________________________________________________________ 5．这位司机没有考虑他自己，他只考虑要挽救生命。 ________________________________________________________________________ 6．他们不想找麻烦。 ________________________________________________________________________ Step 1 情景导入 Teacher：When you are walking along the road，you see a person lying on the road because of the illness.What should you do？Will you leave or send the person to the hospital？The bus driver Wang Ping and the passengers on his bus give us an good example.Let's read the story together to find the answers. 环节说明：由现实生活中常常发生但又敏感的话题入手，引起学生的思索，同时又引出 要学的内容。 Step 2 完成教材 3a3b 的任务 1.阅读 3a 短文，根据短文内容，回答问题“Do you think it comes from a newspaper or a book？How do you know？”(3 分钟) 2．认真阅读短文，标注出故事中所发生的事情，完成后让学生展示自己的答案，教师 点拨。(5 分钟) 3．再次细心阅读短文，理解每一句话的意思，小组合作解决遇到的疑难问题。(5 分钟) 4．教师点拨短文中出现的重点和难点。(5 分钟) 5．熟读短文，识记背诵知识要点。(5 分钟) 6．小结训练。(3 分钟) (A)1.Walk ________ the street，you can see a bank on the right. A．along B．long C．on D．at (D)2.The students ________ when the teacher came in. A．read B．readed C．are reading D．were reading (C)3.When I looked out of the window，I saw a girl ________ in the park. A．dance B．danced C．dancing D．dances (B)4.You mustn't________ the bus until it stops. A．get up B．get off C．get down D．get over (C)5.We all expect the students ________ the singing competition. A．win B．beat C．to win D．to beat (A)6.To ________ surprise，________ parents bought a new computer for ________ A．her；her；her B．her；her；hers C．she；hers；her D．hers；her；her (A)7.They have talked about the plan for two hours，at last they all agreed ________ what Jim's said. A．to B．on C．with D．for (B)8.________ the kind man，the girl was saved. A．Thank for B．Thanks to C．Because D．Thanks a lot 环节说明：通读阅读分析文章，学生的阅读分析能力在这一环节得到提升；小结训练又 及时的巩固强化了重要的知识点。 Step 3 完成教材 3c 的任务 1．认真阅读 3a 短文，思考 3c 提出的问题。(3 分钟) 2．小组讨论发表自己对三个问题的观点。(5 分钟) 3．在班级内分小组发表对三个问题的观点，由教师引导点拨。 环节说明：通过这一环节的学习不仅使学生的口语表达能力和思维能力得到了锻炼，同 时又帮助学生树立了正确的是非观。 Step 4 问题探究 1．The boy with his parents ________when the earthquake rocked their city. A．were sleeping B．is asleep C．was sleeping D．are asleep 答案选择 C, A with B 的谓语动词应与 A 一致，为单数形式； “when”引导的时间状语 从句的主句用过去进行时从句用一般过去时。因此正确答案为 C。 ①昨天早上当他的母亲到家时男孩仍然在睡觉。 When_his_mother_got_home_yesterday_morning，the_boy_was_still_sleeping. 2．except 的用法 ① 我预计会有一场暴风雪。 I_expect_that_there_will_be_a_snowstorm. ② 我期待着收到一件来自父亲的礼物。 I_expect_to_receive_a_gift_from_my_father. ③ 你希望他教你英语吗？ Do_you_expect_him_to_teach_you_English? ④ 我预计我爸爸会给我买一本英语字典。 I_expect_my_father_will_buy_an_English_dictionary_for_me. expect 是及物动词，意为“预料，盼望”，它有以下常见用法： ①expect＋动名词或不定式 预计，可能发生；期待某人或某物 ② 料想做某事 expect_to_do_sth.； ③期望某人做某事 expect_sb.to_do_sth.； ④ expect＋从句 预计料想 3．________ the teacher，or we can't finish the work. A．Thanks for B．Thanks to C．Because D．So 答案选择 B，thanks to 是“多亏了，由于”的意思。该句的意思为“多亏了我们的老师， 否则我们不能完成作业”。 thanks for 是“因……而感谢某人”的意思，因此答案选择 B。 请学生们做前面课时训练部分。 第三课时 Section A (Grammar Focus4c) 1.重点单词：herself 2．重点短语：fall down 3．重点句式： Do you have a fever? You shouldn't eat so much next time. He should lie down and rest. He should see a dentist and get an Xray. —Should I put some medicine on it? —Yes，you should./No，you shouldn't. She should take her temperature. Did you hurt yourself playing soccer? 1.询问他人身体状况的句型及答语 2．情态动词 should 的用法 1．询问他人身体状况的句型及答语 2．情态动词 should 的用法 一、 预习课本 P4 新单词并背诵，完成下面的汉译英。 1．她自己 ________________ 二、 认真预习 Grammar Focus4c 找出下列短语和句型。 3．下次你不应该吃如此多。 ________________________________________________________________________ 4．你应该躺下休息。 ________________________________________________________________________ 5．他应该看牙医并且拍个 X 光片。 ________________________________________________________________________ 6．—我应该在上面敷一些药吗？—是的，应该。 ________________________________________________________________________ 7．她应该测量她的体温。 ________________________________________________________________________ 8．你在踢足球的时候受伤了吗？ ________________________________________________________________________ Step 1 情景导入 Teacher：Hello，everyone.We are all here today except Jim.Do you know what's the matter with him? Student 1：I think he has a cold. Student 2：I think he has a fever. ... 环节说明：本环节对前两节课所学的重要句型和短语进行了复习。 Step 2 完成教材 Grammar Focus 的任务 1．学生大声朗读 Grammar Focus 的句子。(2 分钟) 2．小结训练。(2 分钟) What's_the_matter？ 你怎么了？ You_shouldn't_eat_so_much_next_time. 你下次不应该吃如此多。 I have_a_stomachache. 胃疼 What's_the_matter_with_Ben？ Ben 怎么了？ He_should_lie_down_and_rest. 他应该躺下休息 He hurt_himself. 伤到自己了 He has_a_sore_back. 背疼 Do_you_have_a_fever？ 你发烧了吗？ Yes，I_do. 我是 Does_he_have_a_toothache？ 他牙疼吗？ He_should_see_a_dentist_and_get_an_X ray. 他应该看牙医并且拍个 X 光片 Yes，he_has_a_toothache. 是的，他牙疼。 What_should_she_do？ 她应该怎么办呢？ Should_I_put_some_medicine_on_it？ 我应该在上面敷一些药吗？ She_should_take_her_temperature. 她应该测量她的体温。 环节说明：通过对 Grammar Focus 句型的填空练习能够使学生更好地来理解掌握本单 元的重点语法和句型。 Step 3 完成教材 4a4c 的任务 1．认真阅读 4a 中的对话，然后根据所学内容将对话补充完整，完成后集体核对答案， 然后两人一组练习对话，并让几组学生表演对话。(5 分钟) 2．根据 4b 左栏中给出的健康问题，在右栏中圈出解决这个问题的最好建议，然后再给 出你自己的建议，并添加到横线上。完成后小组内核对答案并讨论谁给出的建议最好，完成 4b。(5 分钟) 3．小组中一个学生扮演病人，其他学生猜测病人的疾病并且给出好的建议，完成后邀 请几组学生展示，完成 4c。 参考案例 A：What's the matter？Did you hurt yourself playing soccer? B：No，I didn't. C：Did you fall down? B：Yes，I did. D：You should go home and get some rest. 4．小结训练。(4 分钟) (C)1.—I have a stomachache. —You should________． A．see a dentist B．exercise C．lie down and rest D．eat an apple (A)2.Do you have________ have________？ A．a sore back or；a stomachache B．sore back or；stomachache B．a sore back or；stomachache D．sore back or；a stomachache (D)3.—________？ —I have a bad cold. A．What are you doing B．How are you C．What's it D．What's the matter (C)4.—Do you have a sore throat? —________． A．Yes，I have B．No，I haven't C．Yes，I do D．No，I'm not (B)5.You ________ eat too much junk food.It's bad for your health. A．must B．shouldn't C．haven't to D．should 环节说明：通过本环节的学习，让学生掌握了询问他人身体状况的句型及答语和情态动 词 should 的用法，同时小结训练更是加深了对重要知识点的巩固强化。 Step 4 问题探究 1．—What's ________ John? —He has a sore throat. A．matter with B．the matter to C．the matter with D．the wrong 答案选择 C, What's the matter with...？是固定句式，意为“……怎么了？”，因此答案选 择 C。 2．Judy ________ a stomachache，so she ________ eat anything for twentyfour hours. A．has；should B．have；should C．has；shouldn't D．haven't；shouldn't 答案选择 C，从题干可知 Judy 是第三人称单数，第一个空应该填 has；另外由题意可知 她胃痛，所以 24 小时不能进食，故选 C。 3．—________？ —Nothing serious，but a bit tired. A．Is that all B．Is there anything else C．What's this D．What's the matter with you 答案选择 D，由答语“没有什么严重的，只是有点累。”可知，问句是问“你怎么了”。 请学生们做前面课时训练部分。 第四课时 Section B ( 1a1d) 1.重点单词：bandage，knee，nosebleed，hurt，hit，sick 2．重点句式： Put a bandage on it. Run it under water. Rest for a few days. Put your head back. Someone felt sick. Someone got hit on the head. 对遇到的问题提出建议 对遇到的问题提出建议 Step 1 情景导入 Teacher：There are many accidents happening every day.But do you know how to deal with these problems ？What should you do when you have a nosebleed？And what should you do when you cut yourself？If you don't know the answers to the questions，please don't worry.Today we will learn how to deal with the problems. 环节说明：由生活中经常出现的意外为话题引出本节课所要学的内容，贴近生活，引起 学生的学习兴趣。 Step 2 完成教材 1a 的任务 1.让学生仔细观察 1a 中的三幅图片，然后根据图片信息回答问题：What happened to them? 2．小组讨论出现 1a 中的意外情况时，我们应该怎么办？然后将 1a 中所给出的句子按 正确的顺序排序，集体核对答案。(2 分钟) 3．两人一组利用 1a 中的信息编练对话，并邀请几组学生表演对话。(5 分钟) 参考案例 A：What' s the matter with you? B：I fell down and hurt my back. A：You should go to the hospital to get an Xray and rest for a few days. 4．小结训练。(2 分钟) 1．在上面扎上绷带。Put_a_bandage_on_it. 2．在自来水下冲洗。Run_it_under_water. 3．把你的头仰起来。Put_your_head_back. 环节说明：通过本环节的学习让学生知道出现这些意外后的应急措施，同时，对话练习 又提高了学生的口语表达能力。 Step 3 完成教材 1b1d 的任务 1.学生齐读 1b 中的句子，为听力做好准备。 2．认真听录音，将对话中护士所提到的问题标注出来，集体核对答案。(3 分钟) 3．再认真听一遍录音，将相应问题治疗方案的字母写在问题后面，完成 1b，集体核对 答案。(3 分钟) 4．听第三遍录音，并跟读，整体感知对话。(3 分钟) 5．利用 1b，1c 中的信息，仿照 1d 的形式两人一组来练习对话，并邀请几组学生表演 对话。(5 分钟) 参考案例 A：Who came to your office today? B：First，a boy came in.He hurt himself in P．E.class. A：What happened? B：... 6．小结训练。(3 分钟) (C)1.The teacher tells the students________ in the hallway. A．not run B．don't run C．not to run D．doesn't to run (B)2.We often go to the old people's home ________ the old people. A．help B．to help C．helping D．helped (B)3.—What happened ________ the girl yesterday? —She had a nosebleed. A．for B．to C．with D．at Step 4 问题探究 1．happen 的用法 ① 这个故事发生在 2003 年。 This_story_happened_in_2003. ② 今天上午她发生了交通事故。 An_accident_happened_to_her_this_morning. ③ 昨天我碰巧在街上遇到了我的一个朋友。 I_happened_to_meet_a_friend_of_mine_in_the_street_yesterday. happen 是不及物动词，它的用法常见的有如下几种情况： ① 表示“某地(某时)发生了什么事”，常用“sth.＋ happened＋(介词)＋地点/时间”这 一结构来表达，此时主语应是物。 ②表示“某人出了某事(常指不好的事)”，要用“sth.＋ happened＋to(填介词)＋sb.”这 一结构来表达。 ③ 表示“某人碰巧做某事”，要用“sb.＋ happen(s)(ed)＋to_do＋sth.”这一结构来表 达。还可用“It happens / happened that...”这一结构来表达。 请学生们做前面课时训练部分。 第五课时 Section B (2a2e) 1．重点单词：breathing，sunburned，ourselves，risk，almost，situation，kilo，rock， knife，off，blood，mean，importance，decision，control，spirit，death 2．重点短语：be used to，take risks，lose one's life，by oneself，run out (of)，cut off， so that，get out of，the importance of，be in control of，keep on，make a decision 3．重点句式： Aron Ralston is an American man who is interested in mountain climbing. This is one of the exciting things about doing dangerous sports. When his water ran out，he knew that he would have to do something to save his own life. He was not ready to die that day. He bandaged himself so that he would not lose too much blood. Aron tells of the importance of making good decisions，and of being in control of one's life. His love for mountain climbing is so great that he kept on climbing mountains even after this experience. 1.重点短语和句型 2．掌握描述事件的顺序(阅读技巧) 1．重点短语和句型 2．掌握描述事件的顺序(阅读技巧) 一、 预习课本 P67 新单词并背诵，完成下面的汉译英。 1．呼吸____________ 2.晒伤的____________ 3．我们自己__________ 4.危险____________ 5．几乎____________ 6.情况____________ 7．公斤____________ 8.岩石____________ 9．刀____________ 10.离开____________ 11．血____________ 12.意思____________ 13．重要性____________ 14.决定____________ 15．约束____________ 16.勇气____________ 17．死亡____________ 二、 认真预习 2a2e 内容找出下列短语和句型。 12．Aron Ralston 是一个对登山感兴趣的美国人。 ________________________________________________________________________ 13．这是危险运动中令人兴奋的事情之一。 ________________________________________________________________________ 14．当他的水用完的时候，他知道他将不得不采取行动来挽救自己的生命。 ________________________________________________________________________ 15．那天他还没做好死亡的准备。 ________________________________________________________________________ 16．他给自己包扎以便他不会失去太多的鲜血。 ________________________________________________________________________ 17．他讲述了做出正确决定和把握自身生命的重要性。 ________________________________________________________________________ 18．他对登山运动的爱是如此的强烈以至于他即使在这次经历之后还继续登山。 ________________________________________________________________________ Step 1 情景导入 Teacher：Hello，everyone! Have you ever heard of Aron Ralston？He is an American man who is interested in mountain climbing.He climbed many famous mountains ， He has many experiences in climbing mountains.But unluckily，he lost his arm when he climbed the Utah.Do you want to know what happened to him？Do you want to know more about him？Let's read the story together. 环节说明：以 Aron Ralston 的故事为话题，设置悬念，引起学生的好奇心，引出本节课 的学习内容。 Step 2 完成教材 2a2b 的任务 1．学生朗读 2a 中的短语，教师纠错，两人一组互相提问背诵。(3 分钟) 2．在运动的时候可能出现一些意外或是问题，看看 A，B 和 C 所代表的三项运动中经 常出现的意外或问题分别是什么，然后将代表三项运动的字母 A，B 和 C 分别写在可能出 现的意外或问题前面的横线上。完成后小组内互相交流答案。(3 分钟) 3．认真阅读短文，在你不理解的单词下面画横线，然后在字典里查询并且写下它们的 汉意。(4 分钟) 4．小组内互相交流自己写下的单词，并讨论它们的用法。然后小组合作翻译分析短文 内容，理解每一句话的意思。(5 分钟) 5．教师点拨短文中出现的重点和难点。(10 分钟) 6．熟读短文，识记背诵知识要点。(5 分钟) 7．小结训练。(3 分钟) (C)1.The boy ________，but now he ________． A．is used to get up late；used to get up early B．used to getting up late；is used to getting up early C．used to get up late；is used to getting up early D．is used to getting up late；used to getting up early (D)2.The thief ________ the lift and ran away. A．got off B．got on C．got into D．got out of (B)3.The boy has ________ the money that his mother gives him. A．run out B．run out of C．ran out D．ran out of (C)4.His arm has been badly ill，the doctor has to ________. A．cut off B．cut off it C．cut it off D．cut them off (B)5.He sits in the front of the classroom ________ he can hear the teacher clearly. A．so on B．so that C．in order to D．so…that (C)6.Jim is a helpful boy，He is always ready ______others. A．helping B．help C．to help D．helps (C)7.After a short rest，they keep on ________． A．to work B．work C．working D．works 环节说明：通过本环节的学习使学生对 Aron Ralston 的事迹有了进一步的了解，同时 Aron Ralston 的优秀品质也使学生受到了教育；而且通过小结训练让学生对重要知识点进行 了巩固练习。 Step 3 完成教材 2c2e 的任务 1．认真阅读短文，根据短文内容完成 2c 中句子的判断正误，正确的圈 True，错误的圈 False，不知道的圈 Don't Know，完成后集体核对答案。(5 分钟) 2．再次认真阅读短文，在短文中找出 2d 中五个问题的答案，完成后请几名学生展示答 案，教师点拨。(5 分钟) 3．根据短文内容将 2e 中的句子排列顺序，集体核对答案。(2 分钟) 4．将排好顺序的句子熟读，然后两人一组根据这些句子提示向各自的搭档讲述 Aron 的故事，可以根据短文内容添加细节。(5 分钟) 环节说明：这一环节的训练，有助于学生的阅读水平和口语能力的提高，同时又巩固加 深了学生对文章的理解。 Step 4 问题探究 1．so that 的用法 ① 他昨天起得如此早以便能赶上早班车。 He_got_up_so_early_that_he_could_catch_up_with_the_early_bus_yesterday. ② 他努力学习，结果考试获得了好成绩。 He_worked_so_hard_that_he_got_good_grades_in_the_exam. so that“以便，为了”，引导一个表示目的状语从句，此时可与 in_order_that 换用；从 句谓语中常用情态动词 may/might，can/could，should，would 等；主从句间连接紧凑，没 有逗号相隔。 so that 引导结果状语从句时，从句中一般不用 can 和 may 等词，并且从句与主句之间往 往有逗号相隔开 (即略作停顿)，意思是“因此，所以”。 2．run out (of)的用法 他的钱用完了。He_ran_out_of_his_money. run out 和 run out of 这两个短语都有“用完”的意思，但用法不同。run out 作不及物短 语，表示“被用完，被耗尽，(人)把东西用完(或花光)”，其主语通常是金钱、时间、食物 等无生命名词。run out of 意为“用完”， 是及物短语表示主动，主语只能是人。 3．be sued to 的用法 ① 他习惯于自己照顾自己。 He_is_used_to_looking_after_himself. be used to 意为“习惯于”，其中的 to 是介词，所以其后要接名词或动名词(不能接动 词原形)；若要强调从不习惯到习惯的过程，可用 get，become 等代替动词 be。注意：be used to 有时可能是动词 use 的被动语态结构 (此时意为“被用来”，其中的 to 为不定式符号， 其后要接动词原形)。如：A hammer is used to drive in nails.锤子是用来钉钉子的。 4．It's very ________ to know the ________ of learning English. A．important；important B．importance；importance C．importance；important D．important；importance 答案选择 D，第一个空考查句型：it's ＋adj.＋ to do sth.(做某事是……)；第二个空考查 词组：the importance of...(……的重要性) 请学生们做前面课时训练部分。 第六课时 Section B (3aSelf Check) 1．重点单词：nurse 2．掌握询问对方身体状况及答语的句型 3．能够用情态动词 should 针对出现的意外或健康问题提出建议 1．掌握询问对方身体状况及答语的句型 2．能够用情态动词 should 针对出现的意外或健康问题提出建议 能够用情态动词 should 针对出现的意外或健康问题提出建议 一、 预习课本 P8 新单词并背诵，完成下面的汉译英。 1．护士______________ Step 1 情景导入 Teacher：We have learnt some phrases and sentences about asking health problems and giving advice.Now let's have a dictation to review them. Phrases：① 发烧 ② 量体温 ③ 流鼻血 …… Sentences：① 你怎么了？ ② 你应该躺下休息。 ③在水下冲洗…… 环节说明：通过这个听写环节既复习了本单元的重要短语和句型，同时又为本节课的学 习做好了铺垫。 Step 2 完成教材 3a3b 的任务 1．小组内通过对话的形式来完成 3a，一人扮演护士，其他学生扮演前来就诊的病人， 护士就病人的情况给出建议，然后邀请几组学生来表演对话。(3 分钟) 参考案例一 A：What's the matter? B：I have a sore throat. A：You should drink some water with honey，and you should't speak loudly. A：What happened to you? C：... 2．认真阅读 3b 中给出的句型及短语，然后用这些句型及短语和你的搭档编练对话，完 成后邀请几组学生表演对话。(5 分钟) 参考案例二 A：What's wrong with you? B：I don't feel well.I feel very hot. A：Did you take your temperature? B：No，I didn't. A：OK，Please take your temperature first. A：Oh，you have a fever. B：Oh，what should I do? A: It's nothing serious.Let me give you some medicine.Please take the medicine three times a day.And take them after meals.You also should have a good rest. B：Thank you. A：I hope you feel better tomorrow. 环节说明：通过这个教学环节让学生熟练掌握询问对方身体状况及答语的句型并且能够 用情态动词 should 针对出现的意外或健康问题提出建议。 Step 3 完成教材 Self Check 的任务 1．在 1 中表示身体部位的单词后面的横线上写出与之相对应的健康问题，然后写出你 知道的其他的健康问题，完成后小组内互相交流。(5 分钟) 2．认真阅读 2 中的句子，然后将它们按正确的顺序排列，完成后集体核对答案，然后 两人一组练习对话，并邀请几组学生表演对话。(5 分钟) 3．根据 3 中的问题给出自己的建议，完成后小组内互相交流答案。(3 分钟) 环节说明：这一环节通过训练，让学生提出自己的见解，使本单元的语言目标得以灵活 运用。 Step 4 问题探究 1．—What's the matter with you? —I don't feel very________．I have a fever. A．well B．good C．better D．bad 答案选择 A，well 指“身体健康”，是形容词。 请学生们做前面课时训练部分。Unit 2 I'll help to clean up the city parks. 第一课时 Section A (1a2d) 1.重点单词：city，cheer，volunteer，notice，lonely 2．重点短语：clean up，give out，cheer up，make a plan，make some notices，come up with， help out，care for，used to 3．重点句式： I hope to work outside. You could help to clean up the city parks. The girl could visit the sick kids in the hospital to cheer them up. The boy could give out food at the food bank. We need to come up with a plan for the City Park Clean Up Day. I'm making some plans to work in an old people's home this summer. What did they ask you to help out with? A lot of old people are lonely.We should listen to them and care for them. 1．重点短语和句型 2．动词短语和不同的介词、副词搭配的意义 动词短语和不同的介词、副词搭配的意义 一、 预习课本 P910 新单词并背诵，完成下面的汉译英。 1．城市____________ 2.欢呼____________ 3．义务做__________ 4.制订计划__________ 5．寂寞的____________ 二、 认真预习 1a2d 找出下列短语和句型。 10．你可以帮着清扫城市公园。 ________________________________________________________________________ 11．这个女孩可以去看望医院里生病的孩子使他们高兴起来。 ________________________________________________________________________ 12．这个男孩可以在食物银行分发食物。 ________________________________________________________________________ 13．我们需要为城市公园清洁日想出一个计划。 ________________________________________________________________________ 14．我正在制定一些今年夏天去老年公寓工作的计划。 ________________________________________________________________________ 15．他们让你帮着做什么呀？ ________________________________________________________________________ 16．许多老人是孤单的。我们应该倾听他们(的心事)并且照顾他们。 ________________________________________________________________________ Step 1 情景导入 Teacher：Do you know a volunteer？Do you know what the volunteers do? Student 1：They help the old people. Student 2：They help do some cleaning. ... ... Teacher：What can you do to help the people who need your help？Now please talk about the questions in groups. 环节说明：由志愿者的志愿活动过渡到学生讨论的话题，衔接自然，学生易于接受，能 勾起学生的学习欲望。 Step 2 完成教材 1a1c 的任务 1．认真观察 1a 中的图片，根据图片所提供的信息写出图片中帮助他人的方法，然后写 出其他帮助他人的方式。完成后小组内交流看谁写得多。(3 分钟)。 2．认真阅读 1b 中的句子，理解句子意思，为听力做好准备。(2 分钟) 3．认真听录音，然后按听到的顺序为男孩和女孩帮助他人的方式标上序号，集体核对 答案，完成课本上 1b 的听力任务。(3 分钟) 4．再听一遍录音，并跟读对话。(2 分钟) 5．结对练习 1a 图片中的对话，并请一些学生表演出他们的对话。(3 分钟) 6．模仿 1a 图片中的对话，让学生利用 1b 中的材料与同伴编练新对话，并邀请几组学 生表演对话。(5 分钟) 参考案例 A：I hope to work outside. B：You could help to clean up the city parks. 7．小结训练。(3 分钟) (A)1.She helps________the house. A．clean up B．cleans up C．cleaning up D．cleaned up (B)2.I took my sister to the concert to ________． A．cheer up her B．cheer her up C．cheer she up D．cheer up she (C)3.We're thirsty.We hope ________ some water. A．drink B．drinking C．to drink D．drinks (C)4.Did John________ the books to the students this morning? A．gave out B．give up C．give out D．give over 环节说明：听说结合，第一时间向学生传达语言目标，通过结对对话练习和小结训练， 使语言目标得以强化。 Step 3 完成教材 2a2c 的任务 1.认真观察 2a 中的图片，然后听录音圈出他们打算要做的事情集体核对答案。(3 分钟) 2．再听一遍录音，根据录音内容完成 2b 中的填空，完成后集体核对答案，然后大声地 朗读五个句子。(3 分钟) 3．听第三遍录音，学生跟读。(3 分钟) 4．让学生利用 2a，2b 中的信息仿照 2c 的形式编练新对话，并邀请多组同学表演对话。 (5 分钟) 参考案例 A：We need to come up with a plan for the City Park CleanUp Day. B：Let's have lunch first. A：No，we need to start now.City Park CleanUp Day is only two weeks from now. 5．小结训练。(3 分钟) (D)1.He couldn't ________ an answer when I asked him why he was late. A．come over B．catch up with C．come out D．come up with (C)2.My mother always tells me ________ out alone at night. A．go B．not go C．not to go D．don't go (C)3.Playing on the road is very dangerous，so my mother always asks me ________on it. A．don't play B．not play C．not to play D．to play (D)4.He plans________ his summer holidays with his cousin in Qingdao. A．spend B．spends C．spending D．to spend 环节说明：通过读、写、听、说学习训练让学生掌握了帮助他人的方法及常用的动词短 语，并且使学生的口语表达能力在这一环节得到提升。 Step 4 完成教材 2d 的任务 1．学生自读对话，回答下面的问题。(5 分钟) ①What is Helen doing? ②What did Tom do last year? ③How do a lot of people feel in the old people's home？What should we do? 2．大声朗读 2d 中的对话，读熟后与同伴结对练习，分角色表演对话。(3 分钟) 3．邀请三组同学来表演对话。(5 分钟) 4．小结训练。(3 分钟) (C)1.—Did you ________ in the morning? —No，but now I ________it. A．used to read；am used to doing B．use to reading；used to do C．use to read；am used to doing D．use to reading；used to do read (C)2.The old man stays at home ________，but he never feels ________． A．lonely；alone B．alone；lonely C．alone；lonely D．lonely；lonely (C)3.Jim gets into trouble these days，can you help him ________. A．with B．to C．out D．for (A)4.Tom often helps his teachers________exercisebooks. A．give out B．give up C．give in D．give to 环节说明：将对话问题化，既能锻炼学生的思维能力又能加深对课文的理解。小结训练 又对对话中的重要知识点进行了巩固加深。 Step 5 问题探究 1．使孩子们高兴起来 cheer_the_children_up ＝cheer_up_the_children 动词＋副词构成的动词短语：如果宾语为名词时，位置是：“动词＋名词＋副词”或“动 词＋副词＋名词”。 如果宾语为代词，只能放在动词与副词之间，即“动词＋代词＋副词”。本节课中学到 的动词＋副词构成的动词短语有： ①打扫干净 clean_up ②分发 give_out ③振奋起来 cheer_up ④帮忙 help_out 2．lonely，alone 的用法 ① 他独自居住。He_lives_alone. ② 他感到很孤独。He_feels_lonely. ③ 一个荒无人烟的地方 one_lonely_one_lonely_place alone 可以作形容词，但是只做表语，不用作定语。也可以作副词。是“独自”的意思， 不含感情色彩； lonely 既可以作表语，是“寂寞，孤独”的意思，一般指人孤独寂寞；也可以作定语， 指地方荒无人烟，有浓厚的感情色彩。 3．used to 的用法 ① 他过去一直住在巴黎。He_used_to_live_in_Paris. ② 他过去不常来。He_didn't_use_to_come_here. ＝He_usen't_to_come_here. used to 意为“过去经常”，其中的 to 是不定式符号，而不是介词，所以其后只接动 词原形(不能接动名词)。used to 构成否定式和疑问式时通常有两种方式：即借助助动词 do 或直接将 used 用作助动词。 请学生们做前面课时训练部分。 第二课时 Section A (3a3c) 1.重点单词：several，feeling，satisfaction，joy，owner，journey 2．重点短语：give up，several hours，at the age of，at the same time 3．重点句式： It's hard work. I want to learn more about how to care for animals. I get such a strong feeling of satisfaction when I see the animals get better and the look of joy on their owners' faces. She decided to try out for a volunteer afterschool reading program. Volunteering here is a dream come true for me. I can do what I love to do and help others at the same time. 1.重点的短语及句型 2．动词不定式 动词不定式 一、 预习课本 P11 新单词并背诵，完成下面的汉译英。 1．几个____________ 2.感觉____________ 3．满足____________ 4.高兴____________ 5．主人____________ 6.旅行____________ 二、 认真预习 3a3c 找出下列短语和句型。 6．我想多学一些关于怎样关爱动物的知识。 ________________________________________________________________________ 7．当我看到这些动物好起来，看到他们主人脸上高兴的神情时，我会得到很强烈的满 足感。 ________________________________________________________________________ 8．她决定在校外阅读项目中尝试一项志愿工作。 ________________________________________________________________________ 9．对于我来说在这里做志愿工作是一个实现了的梦想。 ________________________________________________________________________ 10．我能做我喜欢的事，而且同时能够帮助他人。 ________________________________________________________________________ Step 1 情景导入 Teacher：Do you want to volunteer to do something? Students：Yes，we do. Teacher：What kind of work do you want to do? Student 1：I will help clean up the parks. Student 2：I want to visit the old people's home to help them and cheer them up. ... ... Teacher：Today we will learn an article.It's about the students who volunteer.Let's read it to find out what they volunteer to do. 环节说明：通过师生对话复习了学过的句型，由学生的志愿活动引出文章主人公的志愿 活动，过渡自然。 Step 2 完成教材 3a3b 的任务 1.阅读 3a 中的短文，根据短文内容，回答问题：What do Mario and Mary volunteer to do？ (3 分钟) 2．认真阅读短文，回答 3b 中的两个问题，完成后让学生展示自己的答案，教师点拨。 (3 分钟) 3．再次细心阅读短文，理解每一句话的意思，小组合作解决遇到的疑难问题。(5 分钟) 4．教师点拨短文中出现的重点和难点。(5 分钟) 5．熟读短文，识记背诵知识要点。(5 分钟) 6．小结训练。(3 分钟) (B)1.________ hard work! A．What a B．What C．How D．How a (B)2.We will have a trip tomorrow，but I don't know ________. A．when to go B．how to go C．what to do it D．where to do it (C)3.It is ________ interesting book that I want to read it again. A．so an B．such a C．such an D．so a (C)4.He is a creative boy，he always _______ his new ideas. A．try to B．try on C．try out D．put out (C)5.He is learning English，he is learning French ________. A．look the same B．all the same C．at the same time D．be the same 环节说明：通读阅读分析文章，学生的阅读分析能力在这一环节得到提升；小结训练又 及时的巩固强化了重要的知识点。 Step 3 完成教材 3c 的任务 1．认真阅读 3a 中的短文，完成 3c 的句子填空，完成后小组内互相核对答案。(3 分钟) 2．结合 3c 句型，小组讨论动词不定式的用法，教师点拨重难点。(5 分钟) 3．小结训练。(3 分钟) (B)1.—I didn't hear you come in just now. — That's good.We tried ________ any noise，for you were sleeping. A．not make B．not to make C．to make D．making (C)2.Our teacher often tells us ________ in the river.It's dangerous. A．don't swim B．not swim C．not to swim D．not swimming (B)3.— What are you going to do when you grow up? — A singer，but my parents wish me ________ a teacher. A．am B．to be C．will be D．be (D)4.Paul made a nice cage________ the little sick bird till it could fly. A．keep B．kept C．keeping D．to keep (A)5.All the Chinese people must work hard ________ China Dream. A．to realize B．realize C．realizing D．to realizing 环节说明：通过这一环节的学习使学生对动词不定式的用法有了全面的理解，小结训练 巩固加深了学生对知识的理解与运用。 Step 4 问题探究 1．give up 的用法 ① 他们决定放弃计划了。 They_decided_to_give_up_the_plan. ② 英语非常有用，你不能放弃它。 English_is_very_useful，you_can't_give_it_up. ③ 他决定放弃学英语。 He_decided_to_give_up_learning_English. give up 意为“放弃”，是由动词＋副词构成的动词短语，其宾语可以为名词或代词。 当宾语为代词时必须放到动词和副词之间；give up 后面还可以跟动名词，它的意思为“放 弃做某事”。 2．动词不定式的用法 ① 戒烟是很正确的。It's_right_to_give_up_smoking. ② 他想走。He_wants_to_go. ③ 她不让我走。She_doesn't_allow_me_to_go. ④ 我有许多作业要做。I_have_much_homework_to_do. ⑤ 我来这看你。I_come_here_to_see_you. ⑥ 我的工作是照顾好你。My_job_is_to_look_after_you_well. 不定式由“to ＋ 动词原形”构成，其否定形式是“not_to＋ 动词原形”。不定式可以 带宾语或状语构成不定式短语，没有人称和数的变化，但有时态和语态的变化。不定式可作 主语、宾语、宾语补足语、表语、状语和定语，但不能单独作谓语。 不定式短语作主语时，往往放在谓语之后，用 it 作形式宾语； 不定式短语作宾语时，如果还带有宾语补足语，往往把不定式宾语放在宾语补足语之后， 而用 it 作形式宾语。有些动词后只能用动词不定式作宾语，如：decide，plan，expect，hope， wish，pretend，promise，refuse，afford，agree，ask 等。 3．Why not ________ a new hairstyle？Maybe you like it. A．try on B．try out C．try to D．have a try 答案选择 B，根据句意“为什么不尝试一个新发型呢？也许你会喜欢它”，可知答案选 择 B，try out 意为“尝试，试验”。try on 意为“试穿”。 请学生们做前面课时训练部分。 第三课时 Section A (Grammar Focus4c) 1.重点单词：sign，sick，raise，alone 2．重点短语：homeless people，put up，hand out，call up，put off 3．重点句式： You could ask hospitals to let you visit the kids and cheer them up. She volunteers there once a week to help kids learn to read. I'm making some signs to put up around the school. I'm too busy with my studies this year. However，few people think about what they can do to help others. For example，we can make plans to visit sick children in the hospital or raise money for homeless people. 1.动词＋副词结构的动词短语 2．动词不定式 1．动词＋副词结构的动词短语 2．动词不定式 一、 预习课本 P12 新单词并背诵，完成下面的汉译英。 1．标志____________ 2.有病的____________ 3．募集____________ 4.独自____________ 二、 认真预习 Grammar Focus3c 找出下列短语和句型。 6．你可以请求医院让你去看望生病的孩子们使他们高兴起来。 ________________________________________________________________________ 7．她一周在那里志愿工作一次帮助孩子们学读书。 ________________________________________________________________________ 8．我正在做一些标志把它们张贴到学校周围。 ________________________________________________________________________ 9．今年我忙于我的学习。 ________________________________________________________________________ 10．然而，几乎没有人考虑他们能帮助其他人做些什么。 ________________________________________________________________________ 11．例如，我们可以定计划去看望在医院里生病的孩子或者是为无家可归的人筹钱。 ________________________________________________________________________ Step 1 情景导入 Teacher：We have learnt many important phrases，such as clean up，give out，cheer up， give up and so on.Do you know the meanings of these phrases？Can you make sentences with the phrases by yourselves ？ Now please write some sentences with the phrases.I will ask some students to come to the blackboard to write your sentences. ... 环节说明：这个环节不仅复习了前两节课学到的动词词组，同时还能让学生灵活运用真 正掌握这些词组。 Step 2 完成教材 Grammar Focus 的任务 1．学生大声朗读 Grammar Focus 的句子。(2 分钟) 2．小结训练。(3 分钟) 1．我想帮助无家可归的人。 I'd_like_to_help_homeless_people. 2．她决定在校外阅读活动中尝试志愿活动。 She_decided_to_try_out_for_a_volunteer_afterschool_reading_program. 3．你可以请求医院让你去看望生病的孩子们使他们高兴起来。 You_could_ask_hospitals_to_let_you_visit_the_sick_children_and_cheer_them_up. 4．马里奥认为它能够帮助他得到将来梦想的工作。 Mario_believes_it_can_help_him_to_get_his_future_dream_job. 5．她一周在那里志愿工作一次帮助孩子们学读书。 She_volunteers_there_once_a_week_to_help_kids_learn_to_read. 6．我正在做一些标志把他们张贴到学校周围。 I'm_making_some_signs_to_put_up_around_the_school. 环节说明：通过对 Grammar Focus 中句型的练习能够使学生更好的理解掌握本单元的重 点语法和句型。 Step 3 完成教材 4a4c 的任务 1．两人一组互相提问方框中的句子，为填空做好准备。 2．认真阅读 4a 中的句子，选用方框中的短语来补全句子，小组内核对答案，然后大声 地朗读句子。(2 分钟) 3．认真读 4b 中的短文，用所给词的正确形式填空，完成后请几个学生展示答案，教师 点拨。然后学生大声朗读短文，体会动词不定式的用法。(5 分钟) 4．教师提问点拨动词不定式的用法，然后用动词不定式完成 4c 补全句子，请几位学生 到黑板上写出答案，完成后教师点拨学生所写句子。(5 分钟) 5．小结训练。(5 分钟) (A)1.—What is she doing? —She is ________ Jim. A．calling up B．call C．callings D．call up (A)2.Don't ________ the meeting.Because it's important. A．put off B．put away C．put on D．put up (D)3.If you still have any other questions，please ________ your hand. A．put off B．put down C．put on D．put up (C)4.The little girl is so poor，I'll visit her and ________. A．cheer up her B．laugh at her C．look after her D．take her after (B)5.He hurried back home ________ his schoolbag. A．fetched B．to fetch C．fetching D．fetches (C)6.Even Tony's granddaughter，a fiveyearold girl，asked him ________smoking. A．give up B．gave up C．to give up D．giving up 环节说明：通过本环节的学习，让学生掌握了动词短语及动词不定式的用法，同时小结 训练更是加深了对重要知识点的巩固深化。 Step 4 问题探究 1．Everyone may feel time ________ very quickly when they do something interesting. A．go by B．to go by C．went by D．goes by 答案选择 A，考查宾语补足语。动词 feel 表示“感觉”，后跟动词不定式作宾语补足语 时动词不定式符号 to 要省略。故选 A。句意为“每个人都能感到时间的快速流逝”。 2．At times，parents find it difficult ________ with their teenage children. A．talk B．talked C．talking D．to talk 答案选择 D，句意“有时，父母们发现与青少年交谈是有困难的”， find＋it＋adj.＋for sb.＋to do sth.发现做某事是……的，因此用动词不定式。 3．The ________ man is badly ________． A．ill；sick B．ill；illness C．sick；ill D．illness；sick 答案选择 C，sick 和 ill 都是形容词，意为“生病的”。不同在于 sick 可作表语也可作 定语，而 ill 只能作表语。illness 为名词。 请学生们做前面课时训练部分。 第四课时 Section B (1a1e) 1.重点单词：repair，fix，wheel 2．重点短语：take after，fix up，give away 3．重点句式： I take after my mother. I give it away. Jimmy fixes up broken bicycle parts，like wheels. Jimmy has run out of money. 准确理解一个动词和不同的副词搭配的意义 准确理解一个动词和不同的副词搭配的意义 一、 预习课本 P13 新单词并背诵，完成下面的汉译英。 1．修理____________ 2.安装____________ 3．轮子____________ 二、 认真预习 1a1d 找出下列短语和句型。 4．我和我妈妈很像。 ________________________________________________________________________ 5．我把它捐赠了。 ________________________________________________________________________ 6．Jimmy 修理坏了的自行车零件，如车轮。 ________________________________________________________________________ 7．Jimmy 用完了他的钱。 ________________________________________________________________________ Step 1 情景导入 Teacher：( Show a picture of twins to the students.) Now please look at the picture，they are twins，they are Lucy and Lily.Lucy is similar to Lily.We can also say Lucy takes after Lily.Do you know the meaning of “take after”？Yes，it means the same as. Teacher：(Then show another picture to the students.There is a man fixing up a bike in the picture.) What's the man doing？The teacher helps the students to answer the question with the phrase “fix up”． ... 环节说明：通过这个环节的师生互动问答，引出了本节课要学的短语。 Step 2 完成教材 1a1b 的任务 1．学生齐读 1a 中的单词和短语，教师纠正读音，然后两人一组互相提问单词和短语。 (5 分钟) 2．将两部分意思相同的句子匹配，完成后集体核对答案，然后大声背诵句子。(3 分钟) 3．将方框中的动词短语和名词匹配，集体核对答案。(2 分钟) 4．利用匹配好的短语来造句，请几位学生到黑板上写出自己的答案，完成后教师点拨 讲评学生所写句子。(5 分钟) 5．小结训练(3 分钟) (D)1.His money ________ this morning. A．run out of B．ran out of C．run out D．ran out (C)2.Look ! The girl ________． A．take after him B．take him after C．takes after him D．takes him after (A)3.Can you ________ for me? A．pick it up B．pick up it C．picks up it D．pick it on (C)4.I fix bikes and ________. A．give away them B．give them off C．give them away D．give off them (C)5.—My computer is broken. —Why not ask Mr Smith ________ for you? A．to fix up it B．fix up it C．to fix it up D．fix it up 环节说明：将背诵造句与习题精练相结合，使学生熟练掌握了本环节的知识点。 Step 3 完成教材 1c1e 的任务 1．认真观察 1c 中的四幅图片，在听完第一遍录音后将四幅图片按听到的顺序标出序号。 (3 分钟) 2．认真阅读 1d 中的 4 个句子，然后听录音，根据录音内容判断四个句子的正误，请学 生展示答案，教师点拨，完成 1d。(3 分钟) 3．再听一遍录音，并跟读，整体感知对话。(3 分钟) 4．利用 1a 和 1c 听力材料中的信息，仿照 1e 中的对话形式，两人一组编练新的对话， 邀请几组学生表演对话。(5 分钟) 参考案例 A：What do you do，Jimmy? B：I fix up bikes and give them away. 5．小结训练。(1 分钟) 1．I ran out of my paper.(写出同义句) I_didn't_have_any_more_paper. 2．He looks like his brother.(写出同义句) He_takes_after_his_brother. 3．Jim's father is repairing_his_bike. (对画线部分提问) What_is_Jim's_father_doing? Step 4 问题探究 1．我长得像我妈妈。 I_take_after_my_mother. take after 意为“(在外貌、性格等方面)与(父母等)相像”，指由于血缘关系而相似。同 义短语为 look_like，多指外貌方面相似。 2．My watch doesn't work.I'll ask Uncle Wang ________. A．fix it up B．fix up it C．to fix it up D．to fix up it 答案选择 C，本题考查句型 ask sb.to do sth.而且 fix up 的宾语为代词时应放到中间，因 此正确答案为 C。 请学生们做前面课时训练部分。 第五课时 Section B (2a2e) 1．重点单词：letter，miss，blind，deaf，imagine，difficulty，open，door，carry，train， excited，training，kindness，clever，understand，change，disabled 2．重点短语：a photo of Lucky，set up，make a big difference to，a friend of mine，a special trained dog，be excited about，at once 3．重点句式： I'd like to thank you for sending money to Animal Helpers. You helped to make it possible for me to have Lucky. Most people would never think about this. I was excited about the idea of having a dog. After six months of training with a dog at Animal Helpers，I was able to bring him home. I'm only able to have a “doghelper” because of your kindness! 1.重点短语和句型 2．学习在一定的语境中通过判断单词的词性来猜词义的阅读技巧 1．重点短语和句型 2．学习在一定的语境中通过判断单词的词性来猜词义的阅读技巧 一、 预习课本 P1415 新单词并背诵，完成下面的汉译英。 1．信件____________ 2.女士____________ 3．瞎的____________ 4.聋的____________ 5．想象____________ 6.困难____________ 7．打开____________ 8.门____________ 9．拿____________ 10.训练____________ 11．仁慈____________ 12.聪明的__________ 13．理解____________ 14.变化____________ 15．有残疾的____________ 二、 认真预习 2a2e 内容找出下列短语和句型。 8．我想谢谢你寄钱给“动物救助者”。 ________________________________________________________________________ 9．你已经帮助我让拥有 Lucky 成为可能。 ________________________________________________________________________ 10．大多数的人将不能想象到这些。 ________________________________________________________________________ 11．我对有一条狗的想法很兴奋。 ________________________________________________________________________ 12．在“动物救助者”经过六个月的训练之后，我能把它带回家了。 ________________________________________________________________________ 13．因为你的善良，我能拥有一只导盲犬了！ ________________________________________________________________________ Step 1 情景导入 Teacher：We live in the world ，we should help each other.We often get some help from others in our daily life.How do you usually thank the people who help you？Now please discuss this with your partners in a group. 环节说明：由得到别人的帮助我们该如何做为话题引出本节课的学习内容，过渡自然， 同时也完成了 2a 的教学内容。 Step 2 完成教材 2a2c 的任务 1.快速阅读信件回答 2b 中的两个问题，完成后请学生说出答案，教师点拨。(3 分钟) 2．认真阅读 2b 中的文章，在课本中圈出 2c 中的单词，并且根据单词在句子中的意思 标出单词的词性。完成后小组内核对答案，教师点拨答案。(5 分钟) 3．认真阅读信件中含有 2c 单词的句子，然后用这些单词造句，请几名学生在黑板上写 出句子，完成后教师点拨学生所写的句子。(5 分钟) 4．再次细心阅读短文，理解每一句话的意思，小组合作解决遇到的疑难问题。(5 分钟) 5．教师点拨短文中出现的重点和难点。(5 分钟) 6．熟读短文，识记背诵知识要点。(5 分钟) 7．小结训练。(3 分钟) (C)1.They are going to _______ a new bridge over the river. A．give up B．hand up C．set up D．cheer up (C)2.Yesterday，my friend Mary met a friend of ________ in the library. A．she B．her C．hers D．me (A)3.Can you help me send the letter ________ Mary? A．to B．for C．with D．of (B)4.I find ________ not easy for us to train a dog. A．that B．it C．this D．one (C)5.If I have a good sleep，I _______ work out the problem. A．can B．am able to C．will be able to D．will can 环节说明：通过本环节的学习不仅锻炼了学生的阅读能力，而且通过小结训练让学生对 重要知识点进行了巩固练习。 Step 3 完成教材 2d2e 的任务 1．再次认真阅读短文，根据信件内容将三组信息匹配，完成后小组内核对答案，教师 点拨答案。(5 分钟) 2．以小组为单位讨论 2c 中的两个问题，然后请几位学生代表小组发言，比一比哪个小 组说的好。(5 分钟) 环节说明：这一环节的 2d 环节的学习，让学生对文章有了更深刻的理解；通过 2e 环节 的讨论及发言，提高了学生的语言组织能力和表达能力。 Step 4 问题探究 1．They improved the software to make ________ easier for people to use computers. A．that B．this C．these D．it 答案选择 D，make it＋adj.＋to do sth.意为“使做某事成为……”，it 在此结构中作形式 宾语，真正的宾语是其后的动词不定式。 2．我的一个朋友 a_friend_fo_mine “我的一个朋友”，是一个双重所有格，相当于 one_of_my_friends。 我的一本书 a_book_of_mine＝one_of_my_books 3．我马上到那里去。I_will_go_there_at_once. at once“立刻，马上”，与 right 同义，常用于一般将来时或祈使句中，作时间状语。 4．Teacher's Day is coming，I will send some cards ________my teachers. A．to B．at C．for D．with 答案选择 A，send 意为“寄送”，send sth.to sb.意为“把某物寄给某人”，其同义句为： send sb.sth. 5．The news is exciting，we are all excited ________ it. A．about B．with C．at D．for 答案选择 A，be excited about sth.意为“对……很兴奋”。 6．I________speak English in another few months. A．can B．will can C．be able to D．will be able to 答案选择 D，由 in another few months 可知要用一般将来时态，又因为 can 没有将来时 态，所以答案选择 D。 请学生们做前面课时训练部分。 第六课时 Section B (3aSelf Check) 1．重点单词：strong，sir，madam 2．重点短语：work out，a callin center 3．重点句式： I want to help out as a volunteer in your old people's home. Why do you want to do the volunteer job? He even handed out notices at the supermarket. The ideas that he came up with worked out fine. 1．动词＋副词结构的动词短语 2．动词不定式 1．动词＋副词结构的动词短语 2．动词不定式 一、预习课本 P16 新单词并背诵，完成下面的汉译英。 1．强壮的____________ 2.先生____________ 3．女士____________ 二、 认真预习 3aSelf Check 找出下列短语和句型。 2. 一个热线中心 ________________________________________________________________________ 3．我想在你们的老年公寓做志愿者帮忙。 ________________________________________________________________________ 4．你为什么想做这份志愿工作？ ________________________________________________________________________ 5．他甚至在超市里分发通知。 ________________________________________________________________________ 6．他想出来的主意产生的效果很好。 ________________________________________________________________________ Step 1 情景导入 Teacher：We each meet many problems in our daily life，some of them are easy for us to solve.But the others are difficult.We need to get others' help.At the same time ，we also should do something for others.What volunteer job do you want to do？Why do you want to do the job？ And when are you free to do the job，now please say something about your volunteer job to your partners. 环节说明：以帮助为话题引出了本节课要学习的内容，过渡自然，导入与课文内容衔接 紧密。 Step 2 完成教材 3a3b 的任务 1．阅读 3a 中的志愿工作，然后添加你自己想做的志愿工作，完成后小组内互相交流， 比一比谁写得更多。(5 分钟) 2．两人一组互相交流自己喜欢的志愿工作及其原因，完成 3a。(3 分钟) 3．认真阅读 3b 中的问题，然后根据问题提示给你想做志愿工作的部门写一封信，可以 参考下面所给出的词组和句型，写完后小组内互相交流纠错，教师抽查点评，完成 3b。(10 分钟) 参考案例 Dear Sir or Madam， My name is Sally Brown.I am a student who wants to be a professional singer.I would like to work as a volunteer in your hospital.As a volunteer I like singing songs for the sick kids and cheer them up.I am also good at telling stories，and I can tell them many interesting stories.I am sure I can be good with them.I can go to your hospital every Sunday.I really want to help the kids out.I hope you can let me do the job.Thank you. 环节说明：通过这个教学环节让学生对志愿者工作有了更深刻的理解，同时也锻炼了学 生的写作能力。 Step 3 完成教材 Self Check 的任务 1．在横线上填上适当的动词来构成短语，完成后小组内核对答案。(2 分钟) 2．然后用所写出的短语来造句，写完后小组内互相交流纠错，并请几位学生读出自己 写的句子。(5 分钟) 2．认真阅读 2 中的短文，然后用动词短语或动词不定式来完成填空，完成后核对答案， 学生大声的朗读短文。(5 分钟) 环节说明：这一环节让学生对本单元的动词短语和动词不定式的用法有了更深刻的理 解。 Step 4 问题探究 1．The idea that he came up with worked out fine. 这个句子中有一个定语从句，即：that he came up with，其中连接词(关系词)为 that，在 从句中作 come up with 的宾语。 work out 表示“结局，结果为，至最后”。 2．I wonder how their ideas ________ in practice. A．work on B．work at C．work out D．work for 答案选择 C，根据句意“我想知道他们的主意实际效果怎么样”。可以判断要用词组 work out 意为“产生结果”。 请学生们做前面课时训练部分。Unit 3 Could you please clean your room? 第一课时 Section A (1a2d) 1.重点单词：rubbish，fold，sweep，floor，mess 2．重点短语：take out the rubbish，fold your clothes，sweep the floor，make your bed， go out for dinner，get a ride 3．重点句式： —Could you please sweep the floor? —Yes，sure. —Can I use you computer? —Sorry.I'm going to work on it now. Could you please help out with a few things? Could I at least finish watching this show? I think two hours of TV is enough for you! She won't be happy if she sees this mess. 1．重点短语和句型 2．熟练运用 Could……？提出请求及其回答 熟练运用 Could……？提出请求及其回答 一、预习课本 P1718 新单词并背诵，完成下面的汉译英。 1．垃圾____________ 2.折叠____________ 3．打扫____________ 4.地板____________ 5．杂物____________ 二、 认真预习 1a2d 找出下列短语和句型。 7．—你能扫地吗？ —好的，当然可以。 ________________________________________________________________________ 8．—我可以用你的电脑吗？ ________________________________________________________________________ —对不起，我想用它工作。 ________________________________________________________________________ 9．你能帮着做一些事情吗？ ________________________________________________________________________ 10．我至少能看完这个节目吗？ ________________________________________________________________________ 11．我认为对于你来说两个小时看电视就足够了。 ________________________________________________________________________ 12．如果她看到这些杂物会不高兴的。 ________________________________________________________________________ Step 1 情景导入 Teacher：Hi，boys and girls，glad to see you again.Now let me ask you a question. What housework do you help with your mother do? Student 1：I clean the dishes. Student 2：I do the dishes. Student 3：I help my mother wash clothes. ... ... Teacher：Very good.We are old enough to help our parents do some housework.In fact，we can do much housework，but we can't express them in English.Don't worry，today we will learn more phrases about housework.Now please look at the pictures，we will learn how to express them in English. Then teach the students new words and new phrases. 环节说明：通过教师问，学生答这个过程，学生复习了学过的表示家务劳动的短语，同 时加入图片导学新内容，图文并茂，引起学生的学习兴趣。 Step 2 完成教材 1a1c 的任务 1．学生朗读 1a 中的短语，教师纠正错误读音，然后学生识记单词并且两人一组互相提 问。(3 分钟)。 2．仿照参考案例的形式两人一组互相询问对方是否做这些家务。(3 分钟) 参考案例 A：Do you do the dishes? B：Yes，I often do the dishes，what about you? A：I do it two days a week. ... 3．学生齐读 1b 中的短语，为听力做好准备。(2 分钟) 4．听录音，标注出 Peter 和他妈妈做的家务，并集体核对答案。(3 分钟) 5．再听一遍录音，并跟读对话。(2 分钟) 6．分组练习 1c 中的对话，并请一些学生表演出他们的对话。(3 分钟) 7．模仿 1c 中的对话，用 1a 中的短语与同伴编练新对话，并邀请几组学生表演对话。 (5 分钟) 参考案例 A：Could you please sweep the floor? B：Yes，sure.Can you do the dishes? A：Well，could you please do them？I'm going to clean the living room. B：No problem. 8．小结训练。(3 分钟) (A)1.—Could you please do the dishes，Lana？I'm cleaning the room. —________． A．Yes，sure B．Yes，you can C．No，thanks D．No，you can't (C)2.—Could you please________ the trash when you go out? A．take in B．put out C．take out D．look out (A)3.—Could you please ________ your clothes? —Certainly，Mum. A．fold B．make C．sweep D．do (D)4.I don't like doing the dishes because it's ________. A．interesting B．bored C．interested D．boring (A)5.—My car has broken down.Could you please give me a ride tomorrow? —I'm sorry.I ________.I'm leaving for London tonight. A．can't B．mustn't C．couldn't D．shouldn't 环节说明：听说结合，第一时间向学生传达语言目标，通过分组对话练习和小结训练， 使语言目标得以强化。 Step 3 完成教材 2a2c 的任务 1.大声朗读 2a 中的短语和句子，然后听录音，判断 Peter 能否做这些事情，分别在 Yes 和 No 后面标出来，集体核对答案。(3 分钟) 2．再听一遍录音，将 Peter 不能做的事情的原因用横线标出来，完成后集体核对答案。 (3 分钟) 3．听第三遍录音，学生跟读。(3 分钟) 4．让学生利用 2a 中的信息仿照 2c 的形式练习对话，并要求多组同学表演对话。(5 分 钟) 参考案例 A：Could I use your computer? B：Sorry.I'm going to work on it now. A：Well，could I watch TV? B：Yes，you can，but first you have to clean your room. 5．小结训练。(3 分钟) (B)1.Could you get me a ________？I want to go to the supermarket. A．rides B．ride C．riding D．rode (B)2.—Manuel，have you finished your work? —Sorry，I'm going to ________ it now. A．work in B．work on C．work at D．work over 根据句意用所给词的适当形式填空： 3．Could you please open (open) the door，Nick? 4．Can you get (get) to the station early? 5．Mary's mother often cleans the living (live) room in the morning. 6．It's too late.I have to go (go) to work by taxi. 7．My sister often does the dishes (dish) after meals. 环节说明：通过读、写、听、说学习训练让学生掌握了 could 的基本用法，会用它来表 达请求及其应答语；并且使学生的口语表达能力在这一环节得到提升。 Step 4 完成教材 2d 的任务 1．学生自读对话，回答下面的问题。(5 分钟) ①What is the boy doing? ②What is the boy's mother doing? ③What does the sister want the boy to do? 2．让学生大声朗读 2d 中的对话，读熟后与同伴结对练习，分角色表演对话。(3 分钟) 3．邀请三组学生来表演对话。(5 分钟) 4．小结训练。(3 分钟) 连词成句 1．things，Tony，few，could，you，a，with，please，out，help Could_you_please_help_Tony_out_with_a_few_things? 2．if，she，mess，won't，this，be，sees，happy，she She_won't_be_happy_if_she_sees_this_mess. 3．least，show，could，at，watching，I，finish，this Could_I_at_least_finish_watching_this_show? 环节说明：将对话问题化，既能锻炼学生的思维能力又能加深学生对课文的理解。小结 训练又对对话中的重要句型进行了巩固加深。 Step 5 问题探究 1．你能帮我整理床铺吗？ Could_you_please_help_me_make_the_bed? 表示请求对方做某事可以用 Could_you_please...，其肯定回答为 Yes，sure./Of_course. 或 Yes，my_pleasure.等；否定回答可用 sorry，I_can't.或 sorry，I'm afraid not.I have to ...等， 这种句型的否定结构是在 please 后加 not。 如：Could you please not stand here? 2．我能看一个小时的电视吗？ Could_I_watch_TV_for_an_hour? Could I/we ...？表示请求得到对方的允许，意思是“我/我们可以……吗？”这种问句无 论是肯定回答还是否定回答都避免用 could，肯定回答常用 Yes，you can...，否定回答常用 Sorry/No，you can't。 请学生们做前面课时训练部分。 第二课时 Section A (3a3c) 1.重点单词：throw，neither，shirt 2．重点短语：be angry with，come home from school，come over，throw down，all the time， all day，in surprise，as soon as 3．重点句式： The minute I sat down in front of the TV，my mom came over. Could you please take the dog for a walk? You watch TV all the time and never help out around the house. She did not do any housework and neither did I. I finally understand that we need to share the housework to have a clean and comfortable home. Neither of us did any housework for a week. My mom came over as soon as I sat down in front of the TV. 1.重点短语及句型 2．不同词性的同一单词的不同用法 1．重点短语及句型 2．不同词性的同一单词的不同用法 一、 预习课本 P19 新单词并背诵，完成下面的汉译英。 1．扔____________ 2.也不____________ 3．衬衫____________ 二、 认真预习 3a3c 找出下列短语和句型。 9．我一坐到电视机前面我妈妈就过来了。(两个句子) ________________________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________________________ 10．你能带着狗去散步吗？ ________________________________________________________________________ 11．你总是看电视，从来不帮忙做家务。 ________________________________________________________________________ 12．她没有做家务，我也没有做。 ________________________________________________________________________ 13．我最后知道了我们需要共同承担家务才能拥有一个干净舒适的家。 ________________________________________________________________________ 14．我们两个谁也不做家务。 ________________________________________________________________________ Step 1 情景导入 Teacher：Do you often help your parents do the housework？Was your parents angry if you don't do the housework ？ If everyone in your family doesn't do the housework ， what will happen？Today we will read a story about Nancy and her mother.Let's read the story and see what happened to Nancy and her mother. 环节说明：由家务问题入手引出本节课要学的内容，过渡自然，引起学生的兴趣。 Step 2 完成教材 3a3b 的任务 1.阅读 3a 短文，根据短文内容，回答问题：1.Why was Nancy's mother angry with Nancy? 2.Did they solve the problem？How？(3 分钟) 2．朗读 3b 中的句子，然后认真阅读短文，标注出 3b 中句子的同义句，完成后让学生 展示自己的答案，教师点拨。(5 分钟) 3．再次细心阅读短文，理解每一句话的意思，小组合作解决遇到的疑难问题。(5 分钟) 4．教师点拨短文中出现的重点和难点。(5 分钟) 5．熟读短文，识记背诵知识要点。(5 分钟) 6．小结训练。(3 分钟) (D)1.The boy was late again，his teacher was very angry ________ him. A．to B．for C．at D．with (D)2.If you don't fold your clothes，________．You should do it by yourself. A．so do I B．so I do C．neither do I D．neither will I (D)3.I have two brothers，but neither of ________going shopping. A．them like B．him likes C．they likes D．them likes (C)4.Jack went to Beijing just now.He will call you up as soon as he ________ there. A．will arrive B．arrives in C．arrives D．arrive (C)5.John turned around and looked at me ________． A．in surprised B．in surprisely C．in surprise D．to my surprise (D)6.I left my English book at home，could you please share yours ________ me? A．to B．for C．at D．with 环节说明：通读阅读分析文章，学生的阅读分析能力在这一环节得到提升；小结训练又 及时的巩固强化了重要的知识点。 Step 3 完成教材 3c 的任务 1．认真阅读 3c 中的句子，判断画线单词在句子中的词性是动词还是名词，完成后集体 核对答案。(3 分钟) 2．然后用单词的另外一个词性来造句，让几个学生到黑板上写下句子，教师点评所写 句子。(5 分钟) 3．小组内互相交流所写的句子。(3 分钟) 环节说明：通过这个环节的学习让学生对同一单词不同词性的用法有了更深刻的了解， 同时也为以后学习英语积累了更多的知识。 Step 4 问题探究 1．neither 的用法 ① 这两本书都不好。Neither_of_the_two_books_is_good. ② 他们两个都不擅长唱歌。Neither_of_they_two_is_good_at_singing. ③ 你和我都不对。Neither_you_nor_me_am_a_student. ④ 他不是一个学生，我也不是。He_isn't_a_student，neither_am_I. neither 用作形容词时只能与单数名词连用，谓语动词也用单数形式，意为“没有一 个……”。 neither 用作代词时，意为“两者都不”，其用作主语时，谓语动词用单数形式。 neither ...nor ...连接主语时，谓语动词必须与 nor 后面的名词或代词在人称及数上保持一 致，即所谓的就近原则。意为“既不……，也不……”，与 both...and...所表达的含义相对。 neither 用作副词，作“也不”解释，放在句首，表示前面否定的内容也适用于另一个人 或物，句子须采用部分倒装，即“Neither ＋助动词＋ 主语”这个结构，此时也可用 nor 替 换 neither 使用。使用时，时态与上句要保持一致，助动词的数应与其后面的主语保持一致。 2．as soon as 的用法 ① 他 一 回 来 我 就 告 诉 他 这 个 消 息 。 I_will_tell_him_this_message_as_soon_as_he_comes_back. ② 他一坐下就拿出了英语书。He_took_out_an_English_book_as_soon_as_he_sat_down. as soon as 连接的时间状语从句中，指未发生的动作，规律是：主句用一般将来时态， 从句用一般现在时态代替一般将来时；指紧接着发生的两个短动作主从句都用一般过去时 态。 3．他吃惊地看着我。He_looked_at_me_in_surprise. in surprise 意为“惊奇地”常位于动词之后作状语，表示方式。 4．It's ________．He ________． A．a hard work；hard work B．hard work；works hardly C．hard work；works hard D．a hard work；works hard 答案选择 C, hard work 意为“艰苦的工作”其中 hard 是形容词，work 是名词并且是不 可数名词；work hard 意为“努力工作”其中 work 为动词，hard 为副词。因为主语为 he 是 第三人称单数，所以答案选择 C。 请学生们做前面课时训练部分。 第三课时 Section A (Grammar Focus4c) 1.重点单词：pass，borrow，lend，finger，hate，while 2．重点短语：hang out，do chores 3．重点句式： Could we get something to drink after the movie? Could I hang out with my friends after the movie? Could you please pass me the salt? Could I borrow that book? Could you lend me some money? I cut my finger and I'm trying not to get it wet. 1.重点单词和短语 2．会用 could 有礼貌地来表达请求做某事及其应答语 1．重点单词和短语 2．会用 could 有礼貌地来表达请求做某事及其应答语 一、 预习课本 P20 新单词并背诵，完成下面的汉译英。 1．走过，递________ 2.借用__________ 3．借出__________ 4.手指__________ 5．讨厌__________ 6.当……的时候________ 二、 认真预习 Grammar Focus4c 找出下列短语和句型。 1．做家务 ________________________________________________________________________ 2．看完电影后我们能买点喝的东西吗？ ________________________________________________________________________ 3.看完电影后我能和我的朋友逛街吗？ ________________________________________________________________________ 4．你能把盐递给我吗？ ________________________________________________________________________ 5．我能借那本书吗？ ________________________________________________________________________ 6．你能借给我一些钱吗？ ________________________________________________________________________ 7．我割伤了我的手指，我尽量不把它弄湿。 ________________________________________________________________________ Step 1 情景导入 Teacher：Could you please take out the rubbish? Student 1：No problem. Teacher：Could you please go to the movie with me? Student 2：Sorry，I can't.I have to do my homework. Now please ask and answer like this in pairs with the phrases in this unit to review what we have learnt. 环节说明：本环节对前两节课所学的重要句型和短语进行了复习，同时又锻炼了学生的 口语。 Step 2 完成教材 Grammar Focus 中的任务 1．学生大声朗读 Grammar Focus 的句子。(2 分钟) 2．小结训练。(2 分钟) ①我能和我的朋友出去吃饭吗？ Could_I_go_out_for_dinner_with_my_friends? ②当然可以了，那是很好的呀。 Sure，that_should_be_OK. ③看完电影后我们能买点喝的东西吗？ Could_we_get_something_to_drink_after_the_movie? ④不，你不能。你明天有一场篮球比赛。 No，you_can't.You_have_a_basketball_match_tomorrow. ⑤你能带着狗去散步吗？ Could_you_please_take_the_dog_for_a_walk? ⑥可以，但是我想先看一个节目。 OK，but_I_want_to_watch_one_show_first. ⑦你能倒掉垃圾吗？ Could_you_please_take_out_the_rubbish? ⑧好的，当然可以。 Yes，sure. 环节说明：通过对 Grammar Focus 句型的练习能够使学生更好地理解掌握本单元的重 点语法和句型。 Step 3 完成教材 4a4c 的任务 1．认真阅读 4a 中的句子，在表示请求的句子前写 R，在表示许可的句子前写 P，然后 将两组句子匹配，完成后集体核对答案，然后两人一组大声朗读对话。(5 分钟) 2．结合例句，小组内由学生总结单词 pass，borrow 和 lend 的用法，教师点拨解析。(5 分钟) 3．阅读 4b 中的对话，根据所学的知识完成填空，集体核对答案。然后两人一组大声朗 读对话。(5 分钟) 4．小组内列一个野营需要的物品清单，然后以 4c 对话形式讨论谁将准备这些东西，并 且完成 4c 的表格。 参考案例 A：Could you please bring a tent，Liu Chang? B：Sure.And could you please...? C：Sorry，I can't.I have to... 5．小结训练。(4 分钟) (A)1.Excuse me.Could you please pass the book ________ me? A．to B．for C．with D．of (D)2.My money ran out，could I ________ some money ________ you? A．borrow；to B．lend；from C．lent；to D．borrow；from (D)3.—Could I ________ your English book? —Sorry，I ________ it to Jim yesterday. A．borrow；lend B．lend；borrow C．borrowed；lent D．borrow；lent (B)4.The little boy has a sore throat and he tries ______ too much. A．not talk B．not to talk C．doesn't talk D．to talk 环节说明：通过本环节的学习，让学生掌握了用 could 有礼貌地来表达请求做某事的问 法及其应答语，同时小结训练更是加深了对重要知识点的巩固深化。 Step 4 问题探究 1．borrow 和 lend 的用法 ① 我可以借用你的自行车吗？ Could_I_borrow_your_bike? ② 他把字典借给我。 He_lent_his_dictionary_to_me. 从基本词义上看：两者都可表示“借”，但是 borrow 指“借进”，而 lend 则指“借 出”，两者其实是一对反义词，而不是同义词。从句型搭配上看：1.要表示“向某人借某物”， 英语用 borrow，其中要用介词 from；2.要表示“把某物借给某人”，英语用 lend，其中要用 介词 to。 从是否接双宾语来看：lend 可接双宾语 (即可用于 lend sb. sth.)，但 borrow 则不能接 双宾语 (即不能用于 borrow sb. sth.)。 2．My book is on your desk.Can you pass ________. A．it to me B．me it C．it for me D．it me 答案选择 A，pass 意为“递”，后面可以跟双宾语，经常用到的句型“把某物传递给某 人” pass sb.sth.或者是 pass sth. to sb.，但是当直接宾语为代词时只适用句型：pass sth. to sb.。 请学生们做前面课时训练部分。 第四课时 Section B (1a1e) 1.重点单词：snack 2．重点短语：borrow some money，go to the store，use your CD player 3．重点句型： —Could I invite my friends to a party? —No，you can't have a party.You have a test on Monday. 1.重点单词和短语 2．会用 could 有礼貌地来表达请求做某事及其应答语 1．重点单词和短语 2．会用 could 有礼貌地来表达请求做某事及其应答语 一、 预习课本 P21 新单词并背诵，完成下面的汉译英。 4．—我能邀请我的朋友参加聚会吗？ —不，你不能举行聚会。你星期一要考试。 ________________________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________________________ Step 1 情景导入 Prepare some cards with some phrases on them.One student act according to the phrases，and the others guess what he is doing. 环节说明：寓教于乐，使学生乐学、爱学。 Step 2 完成教材 1a1b 的任务 1．两人一组互相提问 1a 中的短语。(3 分钟) 2．在生活中青少年会要求父母做一些事情，同时父母也会要求孩子们做一些事情，认 真阅读 1a 中的短语，在青少年的要求后面标注 T，在父母的要求后面标注 P。完成后小组 内互相交流答案。(3 分钟) 3．听录音仿照 1c 的对话形式，利用 1a 中的短语两人一组来编练新对话，邀请多组学 生来表演对话。(5 分钟) 参考案例 Parents：Could you clean your room? Child：Yes，I can. Child：Could I invite my friends to a party? Parents：No，you can't have a party.You have a test on Monday. 4．小结训练(4 分钟) (A)1.________ you take out the trash? A．Could B．How C．When D．Where (B)2.Could you please ________ the floor? A．to sweep B．sweep C．sweeping D．swept (C)3.Would you mind ________ to the store with me? A．go B．to go C．going D．went (B)4.— Could you please do the dishes? — Yes，________． A．you can B．sure C．I will D．I can (C)5.I have to ________ chores.Do you? A．make B．take C．do D．did (A)6.— Do you have to ________ your bed every day? — No，I don't. A．make B．take C．do D．pick 环节说明：学生通过这一环节的学习能更加熟练地运用 Could 句型提出请求及回答， 同时小结训练对重要词组和句型进行了巩固练习。 Step 3 完成教材 1c1e 的任务 1．听 Sandy 和她妈妈的对话，把你所听到的短语标注出来，集体核对答案。(3 分钟) 2．再听一遍录音，把 1d 表格中剩余的栏目填写完整，集体核对答案完成 1d。(3 分钟) 3．再听一遍录音，并跟读整体感知对话。(3 分钟) 4．你将举行一个聚会，并且需要你的朋友帮忙做一些事情，请仿照 1e 的对话形式用所 给的短语和所学的表示礼貌请求的句型来请求你的搭档帮忙。(5 分钟) 参考案例 A：Could you please take out the rubbish? B：Yes，sure. ... 5．小结训练(5 分钟) 1．take out，could，please，you，trash，the Could_you_please_take_out_the_trash? 2．are，I，and，parents，my，going，tomorrow，vacation，on My_parents_and_I_are_going_on_vacation_tomorrow. 3．I，please，movies，go，could，to，the Could_I_go_to_the_movies，please? 4．you，often，the，clean，room，do Do_you_often_clean_the_room? 5．but，have，you，to，your，finish，first，homework But_you_have_to_finish_your_homework_first. Step 4 问题探究 1．My cousin Jim invited me________ his home next weekend. A．to visit B．visit C．to visiting D．for visiting 答案选择 C，invite sb.后面用动词不定式做宾语补足语。即通常用到的句型：invite sb.to do sth.意为“邀请某人做某事”。 2．—May I use your ruler? —________． A．Yes，please B．You are nice C．It doesn't matter D．You are welcome 答案选择 A，用 may 来提问，征求对方的意见的时候，肯定回答常用 Yes，please.。 请学生们做前面课时训练部分。 第五课时 Section B (2a2e) 1．重点单词：chore，stress，waste，provide，anyway，depend，develop，fairness，since， neighbor，result，ill，drop，independence，independent 2．重点短语：a piece of，in order to，depend on，look after，as a result，take care of，fall ill 3．重点句式： Housework is a waste of their time. They should spend their time on schoolwork in order to get good grades and get into a good university. There is no need for them to do it now. It's the parents' job to provide a clean and comfortable environment at home for their children. I don't mind doing them. It's not enough to just get good grades at school. Children these days depend on their parents too much. Doing chores helps to develop children's independence and teaches them how to look after themselves.It also helps them to understand the idea of fairness. Everyone should do their part in keeping it clean and tidy. The earlier kids learn to be independent，the better it is for their future. 1.重点短语和句型 2．泛读技巧 1．重点短语和句型 2．泛读技巧 一、 预习课本 P22 新单词并背诵，完成下面的汉译英。 1．杂务____________ 2.精神压力__________ 3．浪费____________ 4.提供____________ 5．发展____________ 6.而且____________ 7．公平性__________ 8.从……以后________ 9．邻居____________ 10.结果____________ 11．有病____________ 12.落下____________ 13．独立____________ 14.独立的____________ 二、认真预习 2a2e 内容找出下列短语和句型。 7．做家务就是浪费他们的时间。 ________________________________________________________________________ 8．他们应该把时间花在学习上以便能取得好成绩考入好的大学。 ________________________________________________________________________ 9．对于他们来说现在没有必要做它。 ________________________________________________________________________ 10．在家里给孩子们提供一个整洁的舒适的环境是父母们的工作。 ________________________________________________________________________ 11．我不介意做它们。 ________________________________________________________________________ 12．仅仅在学校取得好成绩是不够的。 ________________________________________________________________________ 13．现在的孩子依赖父母太多。 ________________________________________________________________________ 14．做家务能够提高孩子们的独立能力而且能够教会他们怎么照顾自己。它也能够帮助 他们理解公平的含义。 ________________________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________________________ Step 1 情景导入 Teacher：Do you often help your parents at home？What do you often do to help your parents at home？Do you think kids should help out with chores at home？Now let's discuss the questions in groups，and then I will ask some students to give us their points of view. 环节说明：以 2a 中的问题作为讨论的话题，既完成了 2a 的教学任务，同时又引出了本 节课的学习重点(2b 中的短文)。 Step 2 完成教材 2a2c 的任务 1．分别让每个小组就小孩是否应该帮父母做家务这个问题发表各自的观点。(5 分钟) 2．快速通读 2b 中的两封信件，选出你同意谁的观点。(3 分钟) 3．认真阅读 2b 中的文章，根据 Mr.Smith 和 Ms.Miller 写的信件，找出赞成及不赞成 孩子做家务的理由，完成后请学生展示自己的答案，教师点拨，完成 2c。(5 分钟) 4．再次细心阅读短文，理解每一句话的意思，小组合作解决遇到的疑难问题。(5 分钟) 5．教师点拨短文中出现的重点和难点。(5 分钟) 6．熟读短文，识记背诵知识要点。(5 分钟) 7．小结训练。(5 分钟) (B)1.The girl sits in the front of the classroom ________ see the blackboard clearly. A．so that B．in order to C．for D．in order that (D)2.The girl is hardworking.She always spends three hours ________ English every night. A．learn B．to learn C．learns D．learning (B)3.If you have remembered the words.There is no need for you ________． A．write B．to write C．writing D．wrote (B)4.We have eaten up all the food.Could you please provide something to eat ________ us. A．with B．for C．at D．to (C)5.Your success ________whether you work hard or not. A．so that B．in order to C．depends on D．looks after (C)6.________ he is，________ he feels. A．The busy；the better B．The busyer；the better C．The busier；the better D．The busier；the best (D)7.It' s your job to ________the kids. A．take care well B．take care of well C．look good after D．take good care of 环节说明：通过本环节的学习不仅锻炼了学生的阅读能力，而且通过小结训练让学生对 重要知识点进行了巩固练习。 Step 3 完成教材 2d2e 的任务 1．再认真阅读 2b 中的两封信件，找出含有 2d 中的短语的句子，并熟读背诵，然后仿 照书中的句子用所给的短语造句，完成后小组内交流答案，教师邀请几位学生读出写的句子。 (5 分钟) 2．两人一组互相讨论 2e 中的问题，老师发表自己对问题的观点，然后邀请几位学生发 表自己的观点。(5 分钟) 环节说明：通过这一环节的 2d 环节的学习，让学生熟练掌握了本节课的重点句型；通 过 2e 环节让学生发表了自己的观点，又锻炼了学生的口语表达能力。 Step 4 问题探究 1．He gets up early every morning ________ get to school on time. A．in order that B．so that C．in order to 答案选择 C，in order to 后面接动词原形引导的目的状语短语，构成简单句；so that，in order that 引导的是目的状语从句，构成复合句，并且从句中谓语动词常与 can，could，may， might 等情态动词连用。 2．His son provided the old man ________ all the food and the money he needed. A．for B．with C．to D．at 答案选择 B，provide 意为“提供；供应；供给” 表示供给所需物品以方便使用，其后 常接名词或代词作宾语或双宾语，并且常和介词 with/for 搭配使用，即构成句型 provide sb. with sth. / sth. for sb. 给……提供……。 3．Whether you will succeed or not ________ how hard you work. A．depends on B．depends at C．looks after D．in order to 答案选择 A，根据句意“你是否能成功，取决于你多努力”，要用词组 depend on，意 为“取决于，依靠”。 4．The ________ we are，the fewer mistakes we'll make. A．careful B．more careful C．more carefully D．most careful 答案选择 B，本句的意思是“我们越认真，犯的错误就越少”。句式“The＋比较级， the＋比较级”表示“越……，就越……”，因此选择 B。 请学生们做前面课时训练部分。 第六课时 Section B (3aSelf Check) 1．复习本单元的重要单词、短语及句型 2．完成本单元的写作 1．复习本单元的重要单词、短语及句型 2．完成本单元的写作 完成本单元的写作 一、 认真复习本单元学过的单词短语及句型。 二、 认真预习 3aSelf Check 找出以下句型。 1．你能九点以前回来吗？ ________________________________________________________________________ Step 1 情景导入 Teacher：We have learnt many important words and phrases，such as provide，depend on， in order to，take care of，and so on.Do you know the meanings of the words and phrases？Can you make sentences with the phrases by yourselves？Now please write down some sentences with the phrases.I will ask some students to come to the blackboard. 环节说明：这个环节不仅复习了学过的动词词组，同时还能让学生灵活运用真正掌握这 些词组。 Step 2 完成教材 3a3b 的任务 1．你认为学生应该做家务吗？就这个话题和你的搭档进行讨论，发表自己的观点，并 且把讨论要点写下来，然后请部分学生当众陈述自己的观点，完成 3a。(7 分钟) 2．根据 3a 中的观点要点，写一篇短文阐述自己的观点，完成后小组内互相交流纠错， 借鉴好词好句，教师抽查点拨。(10 分钟) 参考案例 I think we should help parents do some chores. First，after a whole day's work，our parents must be very tired.If we help them with the housework，they'll feel quite happy and pleased.And by doing housework，we will know how hard it is for our parents to go to work everyday while raising a family.We will make even greater efforts in our study later on.In the second ，doing housework not only trains our abilities，but also helps us make a sense of responsibility.There is a lot of housework in each family.As a member of the family，each of us should share housework with our parents.We can realize we're members of our families through the housework. Finally，doing some housework can give us a chance to do some physical exercises.Since the student has to sit studying most of the time，doing housework is certainly beneficial to his health. So，I think it is necessary for us to do some housework. 环节说明：通过这个教学环节锻炼了学生的写作能力和口语表达能力。 Step 3 完成教材 Self Check 的任务 1．我们在日常生活中会做很多家务，请把含有 1 中动词的表示家务的短语写出来，完 成后小组内交流，比一比谁写得多。(2 分钟) 2．认真阅读 2 中的句子，然后将这些句子按要求做的事和允许做的事分类，完成后核 对答案，学生大声的熟读句子。(5 分钟) 3．利用 2 中的问题，写一个对话，完成后小组内互相交流，并请几位学生读出他们写 的对话，由教师点评。(5 分钟) 环节说明：这一环节通过训练，让学生们对本单元的重要短语和交际用语有了更深刻的 理解。 Step 4 问题探究 1．—Excuse me，could I borrow some money from you? —Of course，you ________． A．could B．can C．must D．need 答案选择 B，could 用于问句表示客气委婉的请求，肯定回答要用 can 而不能用 could， 因此答案选择 B。 请学生们做前面课时训练部分。 Unit 4 Why don't you talk to your parents? 第一课时 Section A (1a2d) 1.重点单词：allow，wrong，guess，deal 2．重点短语：write him a letter，talk about，look through，work out 3．重点句式： Why don't you talk to your parents? My parents don't allow me to hang out with my friends. I got into a fight with my best friend. What's wrong? I don't want to surprise him. I don't want to talk about it on the phone. I had a fight with my best friend. You should call him so that you can say you are sorry. I found my sister looking through my things. But why don't you forget about it so that you can be friends again? Although she is wrong，it's not a big deal. Hope things work out. 1．重点短语和句型 2．用 Why don't you...？向他人提出建议 1．重点短语和句型 2．用 Why don't you...？向他人提出建议 一、 预习课本 P2526 新单词并背诵，完成下面的汉译英。 1．允许____________ 2.错误的____________ 3．猜测____________ 4.协议____________ 二、 认真预习 1a2d 找出下列短语和句型。 5．你为什么不和你的父母谈谈呢？ ________________________________________________________________________ 6．我的父母不允许我和我的朋友逛街。 ________________________________________________________________________ 7．我和我最好的朋友打架了。 ________________________________________________________________________ 8．你怎么了？ ________________________________________________________________________ 9．我不想惊扰他。 ________________________________________________________________________ 10．我不想在电话上谈论这件事情。 ________________________________________________________________________ 11．你应该给他打电话以便你能给他道歉。 ________________________________________________________________________ 12．我发现我的妹妹正在查看我的东西。 ________________________________________________________________________ 13．但是为什么你不忘记这件事以便你们重新成为朋友呢？ ________________________________________________________________________ 14．即使是她错了，那也不是什么大不了的事情。 ________________________________________________________________________ 15．希望事情得到解决。 ________________________________________________________________________ Step 1 情景导入 情景体现：一学生神情略显忧虑，教师上前查问： T：What's up？You look worried. S：Yes.I got into a fight with my best friend.But I don't know how to do it.So I need your help. T：I think you should talk to him.(towards other students)Do you have any other advice? Student 1：I think you should say sorry to him. Student 2：Why don't you write a letter to him? ... ... 环节说明：通过贴近现实生活的情景教学，激起学生的表达欲望，引起学生的学习兴趣。 Step 2 完成教材 1a1c 的任务 1．自主大声朗读 1a 中的句子，然后两人一组互相背诵翻译。(3 分钟)。 2．1a 中的问题是我们经常遇到的，这些问题对于你来说严重还是不严重，根据自己的 实际情况把句子分类，完成后小组内交流。 3．学生齐读 1a 中的短语，为 1b 听力做好准备。(2 分钟) 4．听录音，在 1a 中圈出你所听到的问题，集体核对答案。(3 分钟) 5．再听一遍录音，并跟读对话。(2 分钟) 6．结对练习 1c 中的对话，并请一些学生表演他们的对话。(3 分钟) 7．模仿 1c 中的对话，用 1a 中的问题与同伴编练新对话，并邀请几组学生表演对话。 (5 分钟) 参考案例 A：What's wrong? B: I am really tired because I studied until midnight last night. A：Why don't you go to sleep earlier this evening. 8．小结训练。(3 分钟) (C)1.Kate looks worried，what's ________？ A．the wrong B．matter C．wrong D．his the matter (B)2.Do you know what's the trouble________ Nancy？She is crying there. A．to B．with D．for D．at (B)3.I am good with my little brother.And I never fight ________ him. A．to B．with D．for D．at (A)4.Tomorrow is Mother's Day.Why don't you ________ her a gift? A．get B．to get C．getting D．got (B)5.It's dangerous to swim in the river alone.So my mother doesn't ________me to swim here. A．tell B．allow C．let D．have 环节说明：听说结合，第一时间向学生传达语言目标，通过结对对话练习和小结训练， 使语言目标得以强化。 Step 3 完成教材 2a2c 的任务 1.听 Peter 和他朋友的对话录音，在 2a 的句子中填写 could 或 should 将朋友的建议补 充完整，集体核对答案。(3 分钟) 2．Peter 的朋友给他提了一些建议，但是有一些 Peter 不是很喜欢，请再听一遍录音在 2a 后面的括号内填上不喜欢的原因，原因从 2b 中选择，完成后集体核对答案。(3 分钟) 3．听第三遍录音，学生跟读。(3 分钟) 4．让学生分角色朗读 2c 中的对话，并要求多组同学表演对话。(5 分钟) 参考案例 A：What's the matter? B：I had a fight with my best friend.What should I do? A：Well，you should call him so that you can say you're sorry. 5．小结训练。(3 分钟) (B)1.My teacher often gives me _______ on English study. A．some advices B．advice C．some piece of advice D．some advice (A)2.Though I haven't seen my parents for a long time.I often write ________ them. A．to B．for C．at D．with (D)3.I saw a very funny movie _______ the computer yesterday. A．to B．for C．at D．on (C)4.—________ look up the words in a dictionary? —That's a good idea. A．Why not you B．Why don't C．Why not D．What about (C)5.When I walked through the park，I found a boy ________ under a tree. A．cried B．cry C．crying D．cries 环节说明：通过读、写、听、说学习训练让学生掌握提建议的句型，并且使学生的口语 表达能力在这一环节得到提升。 Step 4 完成教材 2d 的任务 1．学生自读对话，回答下面的问题。(5 分钟) ①Who was Kim angry with? ② What did Kim's sister do? ③What should Kim do? 2．大声朗读 2d 中的对话，读熟后与同伴结对练习，分角色表演对话。(3 分钟) 3．邀请三组学生来表演对话。(5 分钟) 4．小结训练。(3 分钟) 1．我发现我的妹妹正在查看我的东西。 I_found_my_sister_looking_through_my_things. 2．为什么你不忘记这件事以便你们重新成为朋友呢？ Why_don't_you_forget_about_it_so_that_you_can_be_friends_again? 3．即使是她错了，那也不是什么大不了的事情。 Although_she_is_wrong，it's_not_a_big_deal. 环节说明：将对话问题化，既能锻炼学生的思维能力又能加深学生对课文的理解。小结 训练又对对话中的重要句型进行了巩固加深。 Step 5 问题探究 1．你为什么不和我们一起去购物呢？ Why_don't_you_go_shopping_with_us? Why don't you do sth.意为“你为什么不做某事呢？”表示商量着给对方建议。使用否定 式疑问句使语气显得更委婉，更容易为对方所接受。通常也可以用 Why not do sth.来表达。 提出建议的句型还有：What about...＝ How about...？about 是个介词，可跟名词或动名 词；You should/could do something；You'd better (not) do something 等。 2．allow 的用法 ① 我们不允许在教室吃饭。 We_are_not_allowed_to_eat_at_the_classroom. ② 我父母不允许我使用他们的电话。 My_parents_don't_allow_me_to_use_their_phones. allow 意为“允许，准许”，后面可接动名词短语作宾语，不可直接用动词不定式作宾 补，即：allow doing sth.“允许做某事”。 若其后跟有间接宾语，则可用不定式，即可用于 allow sb.to_do sth. 3．He speaks loudly ________ everyone can hear him clearly. A．so...that B．so that C．in order to D．so 答案选择 B，in order to 后面接动词原形引导的是目的状语短语，构成简单句；so that 引导的是目的状语从句，构成复合句，并且从句中谓语动词常与 can，could，may，might 等情态动词连用。而 so...that 意为“如此……以至于……”引导结果状语从句。 请学生们做前面课时训练部分。 第二课时 Section A (3a3c) 1.重点单词：relation，communication，argue，cloud，elder，instead，whatever，nervous， offer，proper，secondly，communicate，explain，clear 2．重点短语：get on with，hang over，in future 3．重点句式： I can't get on with my family. I don't know if I should say anything about this. When they argue，it's like a big，black cloud hanging over our home. He always refuses to let me watch my favorite TV show. Why don't you talk about these feelings with your family? If your parents are having problems，you should offer to help. Why don't you sit down and communicate with your brother? I hope you'll feel better about yourself in future. Can you explain to me how to do this math problem? 1.重点的短语及句型 2．同义单词或短语 1．重点的短语及句型 2．同义单词或短语 一、 预习课本 P27 新单词并背诵，完成下面的汉译英。 1．关系__________ 2.争吵__________ 3．交流__________ 4.云朵__________ 5．代替__________ 6.年纪较长的________ 7．任何__________ 8.焦虑的__________ 9．主动提供________ 10.恰当的__________ 11．其次__________ 12.交流(n.)__________ 13．解释__________ 14.清楚易懂的________ 二、 认真预习 3a3c 找出下列短语和句型。 4.我和我的家人相处得不好。 ________________________________________________________________________ 5．我不知道关于这件事我是否应该说些什么。 ________________________________________________________________________ 6．当他们吵架的时候，就像有一块巨大的乌云笼罩在我家。 ________________________________________________________________________ 7．他总是拒绝让我看我喜欢的电视节目。 ________________________________________________________________________ 8．你为什么不把你的感觉和你的家人谈谈呢？ ________________________________________________________________________ 9．如果你的父母有问题，你就应该主动提供帮助。 ________________________________________________________________________ 10．你为什么不把这些感受和你的家人谈谈呢？ ________________________________________________________________________ 11．我希望今后你自己能好起来。 ________________________________________________________________________ 12．你能给我解释一下怎么做这道数学题吗？ ________________________________________________________________________ Step 1 情景导入 Teacher ： Sad and Thirteen is a boy ， now he is very sad.He can't get on well with his family.Do you want to know what happened to him and his family on earth？Let's read the letters together. 环节说明：由 Sad and Thirteen 的烦恼入手引出本节课要学的内容，过渡自然，引起学 生的兴趣。 Step 2 完成教材 3a3b 的任务 1.阅读3a中的两封信件，总结出Sad and Thirteen 的烦恼以及Robert Hunt 给出的建议， 完成后让学生展示自己的答案，教师点拨。(3 分钟) 2．认真阅读 3a 表格中的烦恼和建议，你同意 Robert Hunt 给出的建议吗？在小组内发 表你的观点。而且你还可以提出解决问题的更好的建议。(5 分钟) 3．再次细心阅读短文，理解每一句话的意思，小组合作解决遇到的疑难问题。(5 分钟) 4．教师点拨短文中出现的重点和难点。(5 分钟) 5．熟读短文，识记背诵知识要点。(5 分钟) 6．小结训练。(3 分钟) (A)1.He is a very friendly student at school，he can ________ each student. A．get on with B．look after well C．be angry with D．get along well (C)2.It's unfair to do it like this，so they all refuse ________ it. A．do B．doing C．to do D．did (B)3.I gave him advice ________ money.I think advice is more important than money. A．instead B．instead of C．and D．or (B)4.He is an outgoing boy，he would like to communicate________ you. A．to B．with C．for D．at (C)5.He offered ________ instead of me. A．go B．going C．to go D．goes 环节说明：通读阅读分析文章，学生的阅读分析能力在这一环节得到提升；小结训练又 及时地巩固强化了重要知识点。 Step 3 完成教材 3c 的任务 1．认真阅读 3a 中的短文，找出和 3c 中单词或短语意思相同的单词或短语，完成后集 体核对答案。(3 分钟) 2．用找出来的单词或短语造句，让几个学生到黑板上板书句子，教师点评所写句子。 (5 分钟) 3．小组内互相交流所写的句子。(3 分钟) 环节说明：通过这一环节的学习让学生对同义的单词或短语有了更深刻的了解，同时也 为以后学习英语写作积累了更多的知识。 Step 4 问题探究 1．我和我的朋友相处得好。 I_get_on_with_my_friends. get on with 意为“与……和睦相处”，同义短语为 get_along_with。 如果 get on/along with 后面接名词，尤其用于疑问词 how 的后面，常指“……进展如 何”。 2．instead 和 instead of 的用法 ① 他累了，让我代替他去吧。 He_was_tired，let_me_go_instead. ② 我们步行去那里而不是乘公交车。 We_walked_there_instead_of_taking_a_bus. instead 是副词，意为“代替，顶替”，需要在一定的上下文中使用，注意：它一般位 于句首或句末，但不能位于名词的前面，也不能位于句中。 instead of 是介词 短语，意为 “代替，而不是”，后面常接形容词，名词，动名词和介词短语． 3．offer 的用法 ① 他给了我一杯水。 He_offered_me_a_cup_of_water. ② 他主动提出教我怎么做这道数学题。 He_offered_to_teach_me_how_to_solve_this_math_problem. 1．offer 有“(主动)拿给，给予”的意思，相当于 give，后可接名词或代词作宾语，也 可接双宾语，即 offer_sb._sth. ＝off_sth._to_sb.；offer 后接不定式，表示“主动提出做某事”， 即句型 offer_to_do_sth. 4．They often ________ with each other on the phone. A．communicates B．communication C．communicate D．communicated 答案选择 C，communicate 是谓语动词。主语 they 为非单三，谓语动词要用原形，因此 答案选择 C。communication 是名词。 5．I think there will be a robot in each family ________. A．in future B．in the future C．in ten year's time D．in a future 答案选择 B，根据句意“我认为在将来每个家庭都会有一个机器人”。in the future 意 为“在将来”，in future 意为“从今以后”，而 C 选项正确的形式应为 in ten years' time.因此 答案选择 B。 请学生们做前面课时训练部分。 第三课时 Section A (Grammar Focus4c) 1.重点单词：copy，return 2．重点词组：not...any more 3．重点句式： I studied until midnight last night so I didn't get enough sleep. I'm worried about my school grades.What's your advice? You left your homework at home. Your best friend does not trust you any more. You should just be yourself. 1.重点单词词组 (although，so that，until) 2．能够针对问题给出建议 1．重点单词词组 (although，so that，until) 2．能够针对问题给出建议 一、 预习课本 P28 新单词并背诵，完成下面的汉译英。 1．复制____________ 2.回来____________ 二、 认真预习 Grammar Focus4c 找出下列短语和句型。 1 ． 不 再 ________________________________________________________________________ 2．我昨天晚上一直学习到半夜，所以没得到充足的睡眠。 ________________________________________________________________________ 3．我很担心我的成绩。你有什么建议？ ________________________________________________________________________ 4．你把你的作业落到了家里。 ________________________________________________________________________ 5．你最好的朋友再也不信任你了。 ________________________________________________________________________ 6．你应该做你自己。 ________________________________________________________________________ Step 1 情景导入 Teacher：We have learned how to give advice.Today we will do some practice to remember it well. 环节说明：开门见山的提出本节课的学习目标—针对问题提出建议。 Step 2 完成教材 Grammar Focus 的任务 1．学生大声朗读 Grammar Focus 中的句子。(2 分钟) 2．小结训练。(2 分钟) 1．你看起来很累。你怎么啦？ You_looked_very_tired.What's_the_matter? 我昨天晚上一直学习到深夜，所以没得到充足的睡眠。 I_studied_until_midnight_so_I_didn't_get_enough_sleep. 2．我该怎么办呢？ What_should_I_do? 为什么你不忘记这件事？ Why_don't_you_forget_this_thing? 即使是她错了，那也不是什么大不了的事情。 Although_she_was_wrong，that_was_not_a_big_deal. 3．他该怎么办呢？ What_should_he_do? 他应该和他的朋友谈谈以便他能道歉。 He_should_have_a_talk_with_his_friend_so_that_he_can_say_he's_sorry. 4．也许你可以去他们家。 Maybe_you_can_go_their_home. 我认为我能，但是我不想惊扰到他。 I_guess_I_could，but_I_don't_want_to_surprise_him. 环节说明：通过对 Grammar Focus 中句型的填空练习能够使学生更好地来理解掌握本单 元的重点语法和句型。 Step 3 完成教材 4a4c 的任务 1．认真阅读 3a 中的句子，然后用 although，so that 和 until 填空，请几位学生到黑板上 写答案，完成后教师点拨核对答案，学生大声朗读句子，体会三个单词或短语的用法。(2 分钟) 2．认真阅读 4b 中的句子，针对每个问题，写出自己的建议，完成后和你的搭档比较一 下，看看谁的建议比较好。(3 分钟) 3．阅读 4c 右面方框中的句子，然后从中选择一个问题，仿照所给的对话形式向你的同 学征求建议。 参考案例 A: My best friend is more popular than me.I want to be like him.What should I do? B：You could try to be more friendly. A：You should just be yourself. 4．小结训练(4 分钟) (B)1.________ they are very tired，they feel happy.Because they finally finished their project. A．So B．Although C．If D．But (D)2.We didn't start our discussion ________ everybody arrived. A．since B．if C．while D．until (D)3.You'd better take the map with you ________ you won't get lost. A．as long as B．as soon as C．now that D．so that (B)4.The old man is very forgetful，he always ________ something on the bus when he takes the bus. A．forgets B．leaves C．left D．drops (B)5.We ________going to beg for help ________． A．not；any more B．aren't；any more C．no；more D．not；any longer 环节说明：通过本环节的学习，使学生对前一阶段所学的知识进行了复习巩固。 Step 4 问题探究 1．I still remember my first teacher ________ we haven't seen each other for a long time. A．if B．until C．though D．because 答案选择 C，if 引导条件状语从句；until 引导时间状语从句；though 引导让步状语从句； because 引导原因状语从句。句意为“我仍然记得我的第一位老师，尽管我们好长时间没见 面了。”故选 C。 2．not...any more 的用法 你不能再喝了。 You_can't_drink_any_more. not...any more 意思是“不再”， 侧重程度和数量 (喝酒的量到了一定程度，不能再继 续下去了。)；not...any more 的同义短语 not...any longer 和 no longer 确切含意为某状态在某 个时刻之后不再继续下去了，它们侧重时间，比如：He no longer lives here.＝ He doesn't live here any longer.他不在这儿居住了。(一个时间以前他住在这儿，过了这个时间，他就离开了。) 要注意的是：由于 no longer 本身就带有否定的含义，即表示“再也不”，所以不能在同一 个句子中加入否定词，比如： I'll come here no longer.我再也不来了。特地补充很重要的一 点：no longer 通常放在谓语动词的前面；和 be 动词连用时，放在系动词后面；而 not ...any longer 中的 any longer 通常位于句末。 请学生们做前面课时训练部分。 第四课时 Section B (1a2e) 1.重点单词：member，pressure，compete 2．重点短语：lower stress，each other 3．重点句型： My parents give me a lot of pressure about school. I have to compete with my classmates at school. 提建议 提建议 一、预习课本 P29 新单词并背诵，完成下面的汉译英。 1．成员____________ 2.压力____________ 3．竞争____________ 二、认真预习 1a1e 找出下列短语和句型。 3．我的父母在学校方面给了我许多的压力。 ________________________________________________________________________ 4．在学校我不得不和我的同学竞争。 ________________________________________________________________________ Step 1 情景导入 Teacher ： Hello ， everyone.We all know that the contemporary society is full of fierce competition everywhere.So everyone has a lot of stress.We also have a lot of stress from our school and our family.If we always have too much stress ， we will feel uncomfortable.So we should lower stress.Do you know the ways to lower stress？Now please talk about it in groups. 环节说明：由竞争到压力，再由压力到缓解压力的方法，过渡自然，易于理解，同时会 激起学生用英语表达的积极性，锻炼了学生的口语表达能力。 Step 2 完成教材 1a1b 的任务 1．1a 提供了一些减轻压力的方法，大声朗读这些短语并熟记。然后按你最喜欢的方式 到最不喜欢的方式给句子排列顺序。(5 分钟) 2．小组内互相交流答案，然后分别阐述你最喜欢的方法及原因。(4 分钟) 参考案例 A：I think reading books helps me lower stress.Because it can make me quiet. 3．小结训练。(2 分钟) 1．你经常和你的朋友逛街吗？ Do_you_often_go_shopping_with_your_friends? 2．这项工作很难，他们花费了三天的时间才完成。 This_work_was_difficult，it_cost_them_three_days_to_finish_it. 3．读书是我的爱好。 Reading_is_my_hobby. 4．你和你的父母谈论你的学习情况吗？ Do_you_talk_about_your_study_with_your_parents? 环节说明：通过本环节的学习让学生灵活运用了所学的重要知识点。 Step 3 完成教材 1c1e 的任务 1．认真听录音，标注出魏明讨论到问题，集体核对答案。(3 分钟) 2．再听一遍录音，听 Alice 给魏明的建议，完成 1d 的填空，完成后请几个学生展示答 案，教师点拨。(5 分钟) 3．再听一遍录音，并跟读，整体感知对话。(3 分钟) 4．针对魏明的问题，给出你的建议。仿照 1e 的形式和你的搭档连词对话。并邀请学生 表演对话。(5 分钟) 参考案例 A：I think Wei Ming should ...? B：Why? A：Because... 5．小结训练(3 分钟) 1．my，school，parents，about，give，pressure，me，of，a，lot My_parents_give_me_a_lot_of_pressure_about_school. 2．at，do，classmates，you，with，your，compete，school Do_you_compete_with_your_classmates_at_school? 3．should，other，we，help，each We_should_help_each_other. Step 4 问题探究 1．I am going to compete ________ a boy ________ the writing competition. A．with；in B．in；for C．with；for D．for；in 答案选择 A，句意“我要与一个男孩比赛写作文”。compete with 表示“与……竞争”； compete in，参加……竞争，在……上竞争、比赛；compete for，为了……进行竞争、比赛。 引出正确答案为 A。 请学生们做前面课时训练部分。 第五课时 Section B (2a2c) 1．重点单词：opinion，skill，typical，football，continue，compare，crazy，push，development， cause，normal 2．重点短语：so many afterschool classes，cut out，compare...with... 3．重点句式： Many of them are learning exam skills so that they can get into a good high school and later a good university. I really want them to be successful. The tired children don't get home until after 7：00 p．m. They have a quick dinner，and then it's time for homework. They are always comparing them with other children. Doctors say too much pressure is not good for a child's development. All these activities can cause a lot of stress for children. Kids should have time to relax and think for themselves，too. Although it's normal to want successful children，it's even more important to have happy children. 1.重点短语和句型 2．根据上下文来猜测单词的意思 1．重点短语和句型 2．根据上下文来猜测单词的意思 一、预习课本 P3031 新单词并背诵，完成下面的汉译英。 1．意见____________ 2.技艺____________ 3．典型的____________ 4.足球____________ 5．继续____________ 6.比较____________ 7．疯狂的____________ 8.推动____________ 9．发展____________ 10.造成____________ 11．通常的____________ 二、认真预习 2a 2e 内容找出下列短语和句型。 4．他们当中的很多人正在学习考试技巧，以便他们能够进入到一所好的高中，之后进 入到一所好的大学。 ________________________________________________________________________ 5．我真的想让他们成功。 ________________________________________________________________________ 6．这些疲惫的孩子直到晚上 7：00 以后才能到家。 ________________________________________________________________________ 7．他们总是拿他们和其他的孩子作比较。 ________________________________________________________________________ 8．他们匆忙的吃完晚饭，然后做作业的时间就到了。 ________________________________________________________________________ 9．医生说太多的压力对孩子的发展不好。 ________________________________________________________________________ 10．所有这些活动会给孩子们带来很多压力。 ________________________________________________________________________ 11．孩子们应该有时间来放松而且也要为自己着想。 ________________________________________________________________________ 12．虽然想要成功的孩子是很正常的，但是要幸福的孩子是更重要的。 ________________________________________________________________________ Step 1 情景导入 Teacher：Do you have too much homework to do？What homework do you have to do？ Yes，English homework，math homework，Chinese homework，history homework，and so on.Maybe you often feel tired，and you are under too much pressure.On the other hand，you have to study for tests，for your future.To make your parents happy，you have to study harder and get higher grades.So you are under too much pressure.You need to find some ways to relax.When you are tired，when you are under too much pressure，what do you often do to relax？Do you often do afterschool activities？What afterschool activities do you often do? Do you want to know the students' lives in other countries？Now，let's read the passage and find what the students' lives in other countries and what the children need.Please open your books to Page30. 环节说明：由现在比较敏感的话题，学生的课业负担入手，贴近学生实际生活，易于引 起学生的的学习兴趣。 Step 2 完成教材 2a2c 的任务 1．认真阅读 2a 中的短语，然后标出你和你的同学经常做的活动，完成后小组内互相交 流答案。(3 分钟) 2．阅读 2b 中的文章，回答问题 What is the common problem for Chinese and American families？和 Who gives their opinions about the problem？完成后请学生展示答案，教师点拨。 (3 分钟) 3．再认真阅读一遍短文，根据上下文的意思猜测黑体单词的意思，然后将它们和 2c 中的意思来匹配。完成后分别让几位学生回答问题，教师点拨。(5 分钟) 4．再次细心阅读短文，理解每一句话的意思，小组合作解决遇到的疑难问题。(5 分钟) 5．教师点拨短文中出现的重点和难点。(5 分钟) 6．熟读短文，识记背诵知识要点。(5 分钟) 7．小结训练。(7 分钟) (B)1.I am very tired every day，because I have ________ to do. A．so many homework B．so much homework C．so homework D．too many (C)2.You'd better ________ that sentence. A．cut down B．cut up C．cut out D．come out (C)3.It's time ________us ________supper.Please hurry up. A．to us；have B．for us；having C．for us; to have D．to us；to have (C)4.It's Sunday.There are ________ people in the park. A．such many B．so such C．so many D．so little (A)5.Compare this new TV set ________ the old one，you will see which is better. A．with B．on C．for D．at (B)6.We should compete________ others at school so that we can make much progress. A．to B．with C．at D．for 环节说明：通过本环节的学习不仅锻炼了学生的阅读能力，而且通过小结训练让学生对 重要知识点进行了巩固练习。 Step 3 完成教材 2d2e 的任务 1．再次认真阅读文章，回答 2d 中的 3 个问题，完成后小组内交流答案，然后让学生再 展示答案，教师点拨。(5 分钟) 2．以小组为单位讨论 2e 中的问题，小组讨论完成后，分别请几位学生代表本组成员发 表观点，比一比哪个小组的发言最精彩。(5 分钟) 环节说明：通过这一环节的学习，锻炼了学生的阅读能力和口语表达以及语言组织能力。 Step 4 问题探究 1．她在这次舞蹈竞赛中将与玛丽竞争。 She_will_compete_with_Mary_in_this_dancing_competition. Compete 意为“竞争，比赛”，经常和 with 连用，后面接与之竞争的事物，即 compete with...，意为“和……竞争”；如果在某方面进行竞争要用介词 in。 2．compare 的用法 ① 要是把他俩的工作比较一下，就会发现她的好得多。 Comparing_their_work_with_each_other，it_will_be_found_that_hers_is_much_better. ② 他总是帮助别人，人们把他比作雷锋。 He_always_helps_others，so_people_compare_him_as_Lei_Feng. compare 意为“比较”， 表示“把……与……比较”，通常用 compare...with．..，但 在现代英语中，也可用 compare...to...，或者用 compare...and...。表示“把……比作……”， 通常用 compare..as．..，在表示“把……与……相比”时，compare...with...与 compare...to... 皆可用。 3．________ everything that's not necessary，and you've got a more meaningful story. A．cut down B．cut up C．cut out D．cut off 答案选择 C，根据句意“将一切非必需的东西删去，你才能提炼出更有意义的故事”， 应选择 cut out，其意为“削减，删除”。 4．China is a ________country and its________is very fast. A．development；developing B．developing；development C．developed；development D．developing；develop 答案选择 B，根据句意“中国是一个发展中国家，它的发展速度非常快”，应该选 B。 developing 是形容词，意为“发展中的”；developed 形容词，但意思是“发达的”；development 意为“发展”是形容词。 请学生做前面课时训练部分。 第六课时 Section B 3aSelf Check 1．重点单词：perhaps 2．重点短语：in my opinion 3．重点句式： Although many people like to eat junk food，they should really eat more fruit and vegetables so that they can be healthy. You should keep trying to talk to her until she talks to you. Why don't you tell him to do something quiet when you're studying. You could tell him to turn down the TV. 1.根据具体情况提出自己的建议 2．until，although 和 so that 的用法 1．根据具体情况提出自己的建议 2．until，although 和 so that 的用法 一、 预习课本 P3132 新单词并背诵，完成下面的汉译英。 2.虽然很多人喜欢吃垃圾食品，但是他们真的应该多吃些蔬菜和水果以便他们能更健 康。 ________________________________________________________________________ 3．你应该一直努力跟她交谈直到她和你交谈为止。 ________________________________________________________________________ 4．当你学习的时候你为什么不告诉他做一些安静的事情呢？ ________________________________________________________________________ 5．你可以告诉他把电视机调小。 ________________________________________________________________________ Step 1 情景导入 Teacher：Mary is very sad today because she quarreled with her best friend and she doesn't know how to do it？Can you give her some advice? Student 1：I think she should write a letter to her friend. Student 2：Why doesn't she call her friend and say sorry to her? ... ... 环节说明：通过给他人提供建议这个环节，既可以完成本节课的学习目标之一：给他人 提供建议，又能活跃课堂气氛，使学生的口语表达能力和语言组织能力都得到提升。 Step 2 完成教材 3a4 的任务 1．一家杂志就孩子们的课外班的情况采访了一些家长，3a 左侧的观点是家长的意见， 那么关于这个问题你的观点是什么呢？请把你的观点写到右侧的方框中，完成后小组内互相 交流。(7 分钟) 2．根据 3a 中的重点观点笔记，给杂志社写一篇文章，阐述你的观点，写作时可以参考 给出的句型及短语。完成后小组内互相交流纠错，借鉴好词好句，教师抽查点拨。(10 分钟) 参考案例一 In my opinion，It's important for children to take afterschool classes.I believe it's better for students to improve academic performance.There are some specialty classes，such as art，dance， piano and so on.In this class Children can let themselves become versatile.Perhaps children could make new friends and their communication range is wider. I don't really agree to let the students take after school classes.First I think the children should have enough time to relax.They are all very tired and under too much pressure.Second， some afterschool classes are to make money，children can't learn the real ability. 参考案例二 I don't really agree to let the students take after school classes.First I think the children should have enough time to relax.They are all very tired and under too much pressure.Second， some afterschool classes are to make money，children can't learn the real ability. 环节说明：通过这个教学环节锻炼了学生的写作能力和口语表达能力。 Step 3 完成教材 Self Check 的任务 1．读 1 中的 5 个句子，然后用 until，so that 和 although 来补全句子，完成后集体核对 答案。(2 分钟) 2．大声的朗读核对答案后的句子，体会 until，so that 和 although 的用法。 3．认真阅读 2 给出的 3 个问题，然后从给出的建议中选择一个你比较同意的观点，然 后再写出自己的观点，完成后小组内互相交流，并且部分学生展示自己的观点。(5 分钟) 环节说明：通过 1 这一环节让学生熟练掌握了 until，so that 和 although 的用法。通过 2 环节的训练，让学生能够针对具体问题提出自己的建议。 Step 4 问题探究 1．The TV is too noisy，could you please ________． A．turn down it B．turn it off C．turn off it D．turn it down 答案选择 A, 根据句意“电视太吵了，你能把声音调小一点吗？”turn down 意为“调 小”，代词作宾语要放在动词和副词中间。turn off 意为“关上”。 请学生们做前面课时训练部分。Unit 5 What were you doing when the rainstorm came? 第一课时 Section A (1a2d) 1.重点单词：rainstorm，suddenly，alarm，strange 2．重点短语：on the street，at the bus stop，go off，take a hot shower，miss the bus，pick up，so many times 3．重点句式： What were you doing when the rainstorm came? What was the girl doing at the time of the rainstorm? I called at seven and you didn't pick up. I was in the kitchen helping my mother. I was sleeping at that time. While you were sleeping，I called Jenny and she helped me. 1．重点短语和句型 2．过去进行时态的用法 3．when 和 while 的用法 1.过去进行时态的用法 2．when 和 while 的用法 一、预习课本 P3334 新单词并背诵，完成下面的汉译英。 1．暴风雨__________ 2.突然__________ 3．闹钟__________ 4.奇特的__________ 二、认真预习 1a2d 找出下列短语和句型。 7．暴风雨来临的时候你正在做什么？ ________________________________________________________________________ 8．我七点打了电话，但是你没有接。 ________________________________________________________________________ 9．我在厨房给我妈妈帮忙。 ________________________________________________________________________ 10．我那时在睡觉。 ________________________________________________________________________ 11．当你睡觉的时候，我给 Jenny 打了电话，她帮助了我。 ________________________________________________________________________ Step 1 情景导入 The teacher points at a girl in the classroom and asks： Teacher：Where are you? Student 1：I am in the classroom... Teacher：What are you doing? Student 1：I am answering your questions. The teacher writes “What are you doing？”on the blackboard and asks in Chinese：这是 什么时态？引导学生回答，复习现在进行时态的意义及结构。再问这位学生：“What were you doing when I came in？”，引入过去进行时态，板书课题，引出本节课的教学任务。 环节说明：以旧带新，由学过的现在进行时态引出过去进行时态，易于学生理解，降低 学习难度，便于引起学生的学习兴趣。 Step 2 完成教材 1a1c 的任务 1．自主大声朗读 1a 中的句子，然后两人一组互相朗读翻译。(3 分钟)。 2．认真观察 1a 中的图片，将图片和句子匹配，完成后集体核对答案。(2 分钟) 3．学生齐读 1b 中的短语，为听力做好准备。(2 分钟) 4．听录音，在 1b 中圈出你所听到的回答，集体核对答案。(3 分钟) 5．再听一遍录音，并跟读对话。(2 分钟) 6．结对练习 1c 中的对话，并请一些学生表演出他们的对话。(3 分钟) 7．模仿 1c 中的对话，用 1b 听力材料中的信息与同伴编练新对话，并邀请几组学生表 演对话。(5 分钟) 参考案例 A：What was the girl doing at the time of the rainstorm? B：She was... 8．小结训练。(3 分钟) (B)1.The alien________ the UFO when I saw him. A．was getting out B．was getting out of C．is getting out of D．gets (C)2.What________you________at this time yesterday? A．did；do B．are；doing C．were；doing D．is；do (B)3.________Tom was playing computer games，his father came in. A．When B．While C．Until D．After (A)4.He was sleeping ________ someone knocked on the door. A．when B．while C．as D．after 环节说明：听说结合，第一时间向学生传达语言目标，通过结对对话练习和小结训练， 使语言目标得以强化。 Step 3 完成教材 2a2c 的任务 1.认真观察 2a 中的图片，然后听录音，根据听到的顺序为图片标序号，集体核对答案。 (3 分钟) 2．再认真听一遍录音，根据对话内容完成 2a 的填空，完成后集体核对答案。(3 分钟) 3．听第三遍录音，学生跟读。(3 分钟) 4．仿照 2c 的形式，利用 2a 中的对话信息复述记者和男孩之间的对话，完成后邀请几 组学生表演对话。(5 分钟) 参考案例 Reporter：Tell us what happened yesterday morning? Boy：... Reporter：So，when the rainstorm suddenly came，what were you dong? Boy：... 5．小结训练。(3 分钟) (D)1.It's 12：00 o'clock.Let's begin________ supper. A．have B．has C．had D．to have (A)2.There is something wrong with my alarm clock.It doesn't________． A．go off B．go on C．get off D．get on (A)3.He got up late this morning.So he ______ the early bus. A．missed B．catched C．got off D．went off (A)4.________ I was walking to school，I saw a cat climbing a tree. A．When B．Since C．Before D．After (B)5.Yesterday he ______ a new dictionary from the bookshop. A．buyed B．bought C．brought D．boughted (B)6.________ the police arrived，the alien left the ground. A．When B．Before C．After D．While 环节说明：通过听、说、读、写学习训练让学生掌握提供建议的句型；并且使学生的口 语表达能力在这一环节得到提升。 Step 4 完成教材 2d 的任务 1．学生自读对话，回答下面的问题。(5 分钟) ①What was Linda doing at seven last night? ②Was Linda having a shower at nine last night? ③Why did Mary call Linda? ④Who helped Mary at last? 2．大声朗读 2d 中的对话，读熟后与同伴结对练习，分角色表演对话。(3 分钟) 3．邀请三组来表演对话。(5 分钟) 4．小结训练。(3 分钟) 连词成句 1．I，up，called，pick，at，didn't，seven，you，and I_called_at_seven_and_you_didn't_pick_up. 2．time，I，that，at，was，sleeping I_was_sleeping_at_that_time. 3．times，why，sister，you，did，call，many，your，so Why_did_you_call_your_sister_so_many_times? 4．late，my，up，alarm，off，got，go，didn't，so，I My_alarm_didn't_go_off_so_I_got_up_late. 环节说明：将对话问题化，既能锻炼学生的思维能力又能加深对课文的理解。小结训练 又对对话中的重要句型进行了巩固加深。 Step 5 问题探究 1．过去进行时态 ①那个时候我正在看电视。I_was_watching_TV_at_that_time. 这是过去进行时态的简单句形式，过去进行时表示在过去某一时间内正在进行或持续进 行的动作。其结构为：主语＋be 的过去式＋动词的现在分词＋其他。其中 be 随主语的人称 和数的变化而变化。当主语是第一人称或第三人称单数时用 was，主语是第二人称或第一、 三人称复数时用 were. 2．when 和 while 的用法 ① 当我看到玛丽的时候她正在吃饭。 When_I_saw_Mary，she_was_eating. ② Linda 睡觉的时候 Jenny 正在做什么？ What_was_Jenny_doing_while_Linda_was_sleeping? when 是 at or during the time that，既指时间点，也可指时间段；while 是 during the time that，只指时间段，因此 when 引导的时间状语从句中的动词可以是终止性动词，也可以是 延续性动词，而 while 从句中的动词必须是延续性动词。 when 说明从句的动作和主句的动作可以是同时发生，也可以是先后发生；while 则强 调主句的动作在从句动作的发生的过程中或主从句两个动作同时发生。 由 when 引导的时间状语从句，主句用过去进行时，从句应用一般过去时；如果从句和 主句的动作同时发生，两句都用过去进行时的时候，多用 while 引导。 3．Jim begins ________ English books at seven in the morning every day. A．to read B．read C．readed D．reads 答案选择 A，begin 意为“开始”，后面跟动词不定式或动名词，即句型 begin to do sth. ＝begin doing sth.。 请学生们做前面课时训练部分。 第二课时 Section A (3a3c) 1.重点单词：storm，report，area，wind，light，wood，window，flashlight，match， beat，heavily，against，asleep，rise，apart 2．重点短语：in the neighborhood，make sure，pieces of，fall asleep，die down，in a mess， fallen trees，broken windows，in times of difficulty 3．重点句式： Black clouds were making the sky very dark. With no light outside，it felt like midnight. Ben's dad was putting pieces of wood over the windows while his mom was making sure the flashlights and radio were working. Ben was helping his mom make dinner when the rain began to beat heavily against the windows. It was hard to have fun with a serious storm happening outside. He finally fell asleep when the wind was dying down at around 3：00 a．m. Although the storm broke many things apart ， it brought families and neighbors closer together. 1.重点短语及句型 2．When 和 while 的用法 3．过去进行时态 1．重点短语及句型 2．When 和 while 的用法 一、 预习课本 P35 新单词并背诵，完成下面的汉译英。 1．暴风雨____________ 2.报道____________ 3．地域____________ 4.风____________ 5．光线____________ 6.木头____________ 7．窗户____________ 8.手电筒____________ 9．火柴____________ 10.敲打____________ 11．大量地____________ 12.碰撞____________ 13．睡着____________ 14.增加____________ 15．分离____________ 二、 认真预习 3a3c 找出下列短语和句型。 9．在困难的时候 ________________________________________________________________________ 10．乌云使天空很黑暗。 ________________________________________________________________________ 11．外面没有光，感觉就像深夜。 ________________________________________________________________________ 12．Ben 的爸爸正在把几块木头固定到窗户上，而他的妈妈正在确保手电筒和收音机正 在工作。 ________________________________________________________________________ 13．当雨点猛烈地敲打窗户的时候，Ben 正在帮着妈妈做晚饭。 ________________________________________________________________________ 14．外界发生严重的风暴是很难让人高兴起来的。 ________________________________________________________________________ 15．他最终在凌晨三点暴风雨逐渐变小的时候睡着了。 ________________________________________________________________________ Step 1 情景导入 Teacher：It often rains heavily in some places，can you say something about what the weather is like before the storm comes？And what is the neighborhood like after the storm？Now let's read the passage in 3a to find the answers to the questions. 环节说明：由两个问题入手引出本节课要学的内容，过渡自然，引起学生的兴趣。 Step 2 完成教材 3a3b 的任务 1.快速阅读短文，找出老师提问的两个问题的答案，完成后让学生展示答案，教师点 拨。(5 分钟) 2．认真阅读短文，根据短文内容完成 3b 中的句子，请几名学生到黑板上展示答案，完 成后教师点拨。(5 分钟) 3．再次细心阅读短文，理解每一句话的意思，小组合作解决遇到的疑难问题。(5 分钟) 4．教师点拨短文中出现的重点和难点。(5 分钟) 5．熟读短文，识记背诵知识要点。(5 分钟) 6．小结训练。(3 分钟) (C)1.—The window is broken and we need ________ —OK，I will get some at once. A．some woods B．a pieces of wood C．some pieces of wood D．much woods (A)2.He studies hard all the time，so he makes sure that he can ________the test. A．pass B．to past C．to pass D．passing (B)3.It took a long time for the excitement to ________. A．die of B．die down C．dying down D．die from (B)4.It was raining heavily outside and I could not ________ for a long time. A．go to bed B．be asleep C．fall asleep D．be sleepy (C)5.Mary ________ basketball when I saw her. A．plays B．played C．was playing D．is playing 环节说明：通读阅读分析文章，学生的阅读分析能力在这一环节得到提升；小结训练又 及时的巩固强化了重要的知识点。 Step 2 完成教材 3c 的任务 1．让学生齐读“Although the storm broken many things apart，it brought families and neighbors closer together”，并且背诵。(2 分钟) 2．小组内谈谈对这句话的理解，并且说出其他让人们能够团结一心的事情和我们应该 怎么在困难的时候互相帮助。(3 分钟) 3．每个小组内选出一名学生代表本组发表自己的看法。(3 分钟) 环节说明：通过这个环节的学习让学生认识到在困难面前我们要团结一心，互相帮助， 同时通过本环节锻炼了学生的语言表达能力。 Step 4 问题探究 1．The fire ________． A．die away B．die down C．die off D．die out 答案选择 B，句意为“火慢慢熄了”，die down 意为“(慢慢)熄灭”、“逐渐变弱”。 die away 指声音、风、光线等“渐息”、“渐弱”。die off 意为“一个一个地死去”(＝ die one by one)。die out 指家族、种族、习俗、观念等“灭绝”、“绝迹”。所以答案选择 B。 2．He ________ when there was a loud knock at the door. A．fell asleep B．was asleep C．got to sleep D．went to bed 答案选择 A，fall asleep 意为“睡着”，表示一个动作的过程，侧重于“自然而然地入 睡”，有时也含有“不想入睡而入睡”之意；be asleep“熟睡”，强调睡眠的状态，该短语 在句中作谓语。get to sleep“入眠，睡着”，强调进入梦乡的过程。根据句意“他刚睡着， 这时有人大声敲门”，答案应选择 A 选择。 请学生们做前面课时训练部分。 第三课时 Section A (Grammar Focus4c) 1.重点短语：turn on the radio，have a look 3．重点句式： What was Ben doing when it began to rain heavily? What was Jenny doing while Linda was sleeping? The radio news talked about a car accident near our home. My brother and I went out right away to have a look. When we got to the place of the accident，the car was in bad shape from hitting a tree. The roads were icy because of the heavy snow from the night before. You're kidding! 1.when 和 while 的用法 2．过去进行时态 1．when 和 while 的用法 2．过去进行时态 一、认真预习 Grammar Focus4c 找出下列短语和句型。 3．天开始下大雨的时候 Ben 正在干什么？ ________________________________________________________________________ 4．Linda 睡觉的时候，Jenny 正在做什么？ ________________________________________________________________________ 5．电台新闻报道了我们家附近的一场交通事故。 ________________________________________________________________________ 6．我弟弟和我立刻出去看了看。 ________________________________________________________________________ 7．当我们到达事故现场的时候，一辆汽车已经由于撞到树上变形了。 ________________________________________________________________________ 8．因为昨天晚上的大雪，道路结冰了。 ________________________________________________________________________ 9．你在开玩笑。 ________________________________________________________________________ Step 1 情景导入 Teacher：Do you like snow？The white snow is very beautiful，but it's very dangerous for the driver to drive on an icy road ， and the accidents often happen.Now there is a car accident happened near my home.Let's see together. 环节说明：由雪天路滑容易发生交通事故入手，引出本节课的内容，激起学生的好奇心， 为学习新内容做好铺垫。 Step 2 完成教材 Grammar Focus 的任务 1．学生大声朗读 Grammar Focus 的句子。(2 分钟) 2．小结训练。(2 分钟) 1．What were you doing at eight last night? I was taking a shower. 2．暴雨来的时候她正在做什么？ What_was_she_doing_at_the_time_of_the_rainstorm? 她正在做她的作业。 She_was_doing_her_homework. 3．What was he doing when the rainstorm came? He was reading in the library when the rainstorm came. 4．What was Ben doing when it began to rain heavily? When it began to rain，Ben was helping his mom make dinner. 5. Linda 睡觉的时候，Jenny 正在做什么？ What_was_Jenny_doing_while_Linda_was_sleeping? Linda 睡觉的时候，Jenny 正在帮助 Mary 做作业。 Jenny_was_helping_Mary_with_her_homework_while_Linda_was_sleeping. 环节说明：通过对 Grammar Focus 句型的填空练习能够使学生更好地来理解掌握本单 元的重点语法和句型。 Step 3 完成教材 4a4c 的任务 1．学生两人一组互相提问背诵 4a 中的短语，然后利用这些短语仿照例句用 when 和 while 来写句子，请几组学生到黑板上写句子，完成后小组内互相交流所写句子，师生共同 点拨黑板上的句子。(5 分钟) 2．认真阅读 4b 中的短文，然后用 was，were，when 和 while 填空，完成后小组成员 互相交流答案。(3 分钟) 3．教师点拨短文中的重难点句型，然后两人一组互相朗读短文。(3 分钟) 4．两人一组仿照 4c 方框中的对话形式，互相询问对方在该时间点正在干什么？并且把 表格填写完整。(3 分钟) 参考案例 A：What were you doing at nine o'clock last Sunday morning? B：I was sleeping.How about you? A：I was doing my homework. B：You're kidding! 5．小结训练(4 分钟) 1．I was listening to music when she came in. 2．Don't make so much noise when the baby is sleeping. 3．Lily was dressed in white while Lucy was dressed in blue. 4．Mother was cooking while I was watching TV. 5．When I was walking in the street，I met Miss Black. 环节说明：通过本环节的学习和练习，让学生熟练地掌握了过去进行时态以及 while 和 when 的用法。 Step 4 问题探究 1．Peter likes reading a newspaper ________ he is having breakfast. A．until B．while C．because D．when 答案选择 B，由句意“彼得在吃早饭的时候喜欢看报纸”可知，从句是用 while 或 when 来引导的时间状语从句。如果从句和主句的动作同时发生，两句都用进行时态的时候，用 while 引导。故正确答案为 B 选项。 2．—Sam，what will the weather be like tomorrow? —Sorry，Mum.I didn't watch the weather forecast just now.I________ a football match. A．was watching B．am watching C．would watch D．will watch 答案选择 A，句意为：我刚才没有看天气预报，我(那时)正在看足球比赛。可知本题是 过去进行时，强调过去正在进行的动作。故选 A。 请学生们做前面课时训练部分。 第四课时 Section B (1a1d) 重点句式： What event happened at the school yesterday? Which team won at the event? Kate saw a dog by the side of the road. Kate waited for someone to walk by. When the school basketball competition started，Kate was still making her way to school. 1.过去进行时态 2．when 和 while 的用法 1．过去进行时态 2．when 和 while 的用法 一、认真预习 1a1d 找出下列句型。 1．学校昨天发生什么大事了。 ________________________________________________________________________ 2．哪个队在这个项目中获胜了？ ________________________________________________________________________ 3．Kate 在路边看到了一只狗。 ________________________________________________________________________ 4．Kate 等着有人走过。 ________________________________________________________________________ 5．当学校篮球比赛开始的时候，Kate 仍然在前往学校的路上。 ________________________________________________________________________ Step 1 情景导入 Teacher：Hello，boys and girls.Yesterday Kate's school had a basketball competition，and the match was very wonderful.But Kate was late for the match.Do you want to know what happened to her on the way？Let's learn Section B，1a to 1c to find the answer.OK? 环节说明：导入环节引起学生的好奇心，为听力做好了铺垫。 Step 2 完成教材 1a1d 的任务 我们平时会参加很多活动，或许参加某一项活动时我们迟到了，或许因为种种原因我们 不能出现，现在小组内互相说说你参加某项活动时出现的导致你不能按时参加或不能参加的 原因及其中的故事。(5 分钟) 2．认真阅读 1b 中的问题，听录音并且将问题的答案写在横线上，完成后集体核对答案。 (2 分钟) 3．再听一遍录音，按事情的发展顺序给 6 个句子标出序号，完成后请几名学生展示自 己的答案，然后教师点拨。(3 分钟) 4．认真听一遍录音，整体感知事情的全部过程。(3 分钟) 5．根据听力信息两人一组仿照 1d 形式来谈论 Kate 为什么没有赶上足球比赛，学生 A 以 when 或 while 为开头说句子，学生 B 根据听力信息来补全学生 A 的句子，并邀请几名学 生来展示。(5 分钟) 参考案例 A：When the school basketball competition started...? B: When the school basketball competition started，Kate was making her way to school. 6．小结训练。(3 分钟) (A)1.He ______ an old man while he ______ down the street. A．met；was walking B．was meeting；was walking C．met；walked D．meets；walking (B)2.I was trying to draw a cat on the board ________ the teacher came in. A．while B．when C．what time D．so (C)3.My best friend visited my house while I ________. A．cooked B．cooking C．was cooking D．cook (A)4.The teacher came in while Lucy ________ her purse in the classroom. A．was looking for B．was finding C．was finding out D．was seeing 环节说明：通过听说训练，使学生更熟练地掌握了语言交际用语；通过小结训练，让学 生熟练掌握了过去进行时态以及 when 和 while 的用法。 Step 4 问题探究 1．When it rained heavily yesterday，I was ________ my way to the train station. A．walking B．making C．doing D．going 答案选择 B，根据句意“当昨天下大雨的时候，我正在前往火车站的路上”，make one's way to 意为“往……走去”。故答案选择 B。 2．When I walked to school yesterday，I saw two kids crying ________ the side of the river. A．for B．by C．at D．to 答案选择 B，by the side of 意为“在……旁边”。 请学生们做前面课时训练部分。 第五课时 Section B (2a2e) 1．重点单词：passage，pupil，completely，silence，recently，terrorist，date，tower，realize 2．重点短语：in history，in silence，take down，at first，look out the window 3．重点句式： People often remember what they were doing when they heard the news of important events in history. My parents were completely shocked! Even the date—September 11，2001—has meaning to most Americans. She remembers working in her office near the two towers. I didn't believe him at first，but then I looked out the window and realized that it was true. I was so scared that I could hardly think clearly after that. 1.重点短语和句型 2．利用所学知识谈论过去发生的事情 3．培养阅读技巧(从标题和段落第一句中获取信息) 1．利用所学知识谈论过去发生的事情 2．培养阅读技巧(从标题和第一句中获取信息)，提高阅读能力 一、预习课本 P3839 新单词并背诵，完成下面的汉译英。 1．段落____________ 2.学生____________ 3．完全地____________ 4.沉默____________ 5．不久前____________ 6.日期____________ 7．恐怖分子____________ 8.塔楼____________ 9．意识到____________ 二、认真预习 P2a2e 内容找出下列短语和句型。 6.人们常常会记得当他们听到历史上重大事件的消息时他们正在做什么。 ________________________________________________________________________ 7．我的父母都彻底地惊呆了。 ________________________________________________________________________ 8．甚至这一天——2001 年 9 月 11 日——对于大多数的美国人来说都很有意义。 ________________________________________________________________________ 9．她记得它在两个塔楼附近的办公室里工作。 ________________________________________________________________________ 10．最初我不相信他，但是我向窗外看后，我意识到那是真的。 ________________________________________________________________________ 11．我是如此的害怕，以至于在那之后我不能清晰的思考。 ________________________________________________________________________ Step 1 情景导入 Teacher：I remember man first walked on the moon on July 20，1969.I remember HongKong returned to China in 1997.I remember Macao returned to China in 1999.Do you remember anything important in history？If you do，can you tell me？(Choose some students to tell some important events) Teacher：Great！Today we are going to learn...Do you remember what you were doing...？In this article，we can learn about some important events in history. 环节说明：以历史上的重大事件为载体导入本课学习内容，过渡自然，为学生很好地理 解文章做好铺垫。 Step 2 完成教材 2a2b 的任务 1．认真观察 2b 中的图片和标题，让学生思考这篇短文是关于什么的？小组内互相讨论 2a 中的三个问题，然后邀请几个学生谈谈自己的看法。(3 分钟) 2．快速阅读 2b 中的短文，了解短文大意，完成 2b 中的两个问题，请学生回答该问题， 教师点拨。(3 分钟) 3．再次细心阅读短文，理解每一句话的意思，小组合作解决遇到的疑难问题。(5 分钟) 4．教师点拨短文中出现的重点和难点。(5 分钟) 5．熟读短文，识记背诵知识要点。(5 分钟) 6．小结训练。(5 分钟) (C)1.Don't ________ the window when the car is running on the road.It's too dangerous. A．look for B．look at C．look out D．look up (D)2.Why not keep your mouth ________ and your eyes ________？ A．closing；opening B．close；open C．closed；opening D．closed；open (C)3.My mother was cooking while I ________ the radio. A．listened to B．have listened to C．was listening to D．is listening to (A)4.The little boy made a mistake，when he saw his father he was in ________ A．silence B．silent C．silently D．unsilence (C)5.When I got to school yesterday，I ________ I left my homework at home. A．remember B．forget C．realized D．saw (C)6.The apples are ________ delicious that I want to eat another one. A．too B．very C．so D．such 环节说明：通过本环节的学习不仅锻炼了学生的阅读能力，而且通过小结训练让学生对 重要知识点进行了巩固练习。 Step 3 完成教材 2c2e 的任务 1．认真阅读文章，在正确句子前面的横线上写 T，在错误的句子前面的横线上写 F， 在文章中没有涉及到的句子前面的横线上写 NG。完成后请几位学生回答问题，教师点拨。 (5 分钟) 2．再次认真阅读文章，在文章中画出和所给句子意思相同的句子，完成后小组内核对 答案，并大声朗读句子。(5 分钟) 3．关于文章中的事件，你记住了多少呢？两人一组仿照 2e 中的形式互相检查。(5 分钟) 参考案例 A：When did Dr.Martin Luther King die? B：He died on... 环节说明：通过本环节的学习让学生对课文有了更深刻的理解，同时锻炼了学生的阅读 能力。 Step 4 问题探究 1．人们常常会记得当他们听到历史上重大事件的消息时他们正在做什么。 People_often_remember_what_they_were_doing_when_they_heard_the_news_of_important _events_in_history. 本 句 是 一 个 宾 语 从 句 ， 主 句 是 people_often_remember... ， 其 宾 语 从 句 是 what_they_were_doing... ． 宾 语 从 句 中 又 含 有 一 个 时 间 状 语 从 句 when_they_heard_the_news_of_important_events_in_history。 2．① 他们默默地走着。 They_walked_in_silence. ② 孩子们出去了，房间里十分安静。 The_kids_went_out_and_it_was_very_silent_in_the_room. Silence 意为“沉默”，是名词，经常用到的词组是 in_silence 意为“安静地，默默地”。 它的形容词为 silent． 3．The bridge was broken many years ago，now the workers are ________ it down. A．looking B．takeing C．writeing D．putting 答案选择 B，根据句意“这座桥很多年前就坏了，现在工人们正在拆掉它”，take down 意为“拆掉，拆毁”，引出答案选择 B。 请学生们做前面课时训练部分。 第六课时 Section B (3aSelf Check) 1．重点单词：beat 2．重点词组：point out，go away，go up，call out 3．重点句式： I went up and started to play. I played the song without any mistakes. I waited for them to call out the winner. When I heard my name I heart beat so quickly I thought I would stop breathing. It was the happiest day of my life. 1．when 和 while 的用法 2．能用过去进行时态叙述过去正在发生的事情 能用过去进行时态叙述过去正在发生的事情 一、预习课本 P3940 新单词并背诵，完成下面的汉译英。 1．跳动____________ 二、认真预习 3aSelf Check 找出下列短语和句型。 1．指出____________ 2.消失____________ 3．走过去____________ 4.喊出____________ 5．我走过去开始弹奏。 ________________________________________________________________________ 6．我准确无误地弹奏了这首歌曲。 ________________________________________________________________________ 7．我等着他们说出获胜者。 ________________________________________________________________________ 8．当我听到我的名字时，我的心脏跳动得是如此得快，我想我将要停止呼吸了。 ________________________________________________________________________ 9．这是我一生中最高兴的时刻。 ________________________________________________________________________ Step 1 情景导入 Teacher：Do you remember what were you doing when the important event happened？When and where did the event happen ？ Why was it important ？ Now please ask and answer the questions in 3a with your partner. 环节说明：以 3a 的问题为导入问题，自然的引出 3a 的学习，简单明了，同时学生两人 一组的对话练习更是练习了口语表达能力，而且还降低了学生完成 3a 的难度。 Step 2 完成教材 3a4 的任务 1．两人一组互相提问 3a 中的问题，然后将问题答案要点写下来，为完成 3b 写作做好 准备。(5 分钟) 2．根据 3a 问题的答案以及 3b 的写作提示，完成 3b 的写作，完成后小组内互相交流纠 错，借鉴好词好句，教师抽查点拨。(7 分钟) 参考案例 An important event that I remember well was Wenchuan Earthquake.It happened on May 12th，2008 in Wenchuan.When I heard the news of this event，I was staying at home，because I was ill that day.My friends were having English class at school.This event was very important to me because one of my pen pals was in Wenchuan.I was very worried about him.I will remember the event well because many people died in the earthquake. 环节说明：通过这个教学环节锻炼了学生的写作能力和口语表达能力。 Step 3 完成教材 Self Check 的任务 1．认真阅读 1 中的句子，用 when 或 while 完成填空，完成后集体核对答案并且大声 朗读句子。(5 分钟) 2．认真阅读 2 中的短文，然后用所给单词的正确形式填空，完成后小组内核对答案并 且讨论句子中的疑难句型及知识要点。(8 分钟) 3．教师点拨短文中出现的知识要点。(3 分钟) 环节说明：通过 1 环节让学生牢固掌握了本单元的重点单词 when 和 while 的用法，2 环节的学习使学生能灵活运用学习到的知识。 Step 4 问题探究 1．While you are writing，remember to ________ those unnecessary words. A．give out B．leave out C．take out D．point out 答案选择 D，根据句意“当你写的时候，指出不必要的单词”，point out 意为“指出”。 故答案选择 D。 2．He ________ here after he finished his work. A．will leave B．leaves C．left D．would leave 答案选择 D，本题考查过去将来时，过去将来时态表示从过去的某一时间看将要发生的 动作或存在的状态，由“助动词 would＋动词原形”构成，主语是第一人称时，可用 should 代替 would。 请学生们做前面课时训练部分。Unit 6 An old man tried to move the mountains. 第一课时 Section A (1a2d) 1.重点单词：shoot，begin，god，remind，bit，silly 2．重点短语：Journey to the West，Yu Gong Moves a Mountain，Hou Yi shoots the Suns， Nu Wa Repairs the Sky，once upon a time，instead of，work on，a little bit 3．重点句式： An old man tried to move the mountains. How does the story begin? Where would they put all the earth and stone from the mountains? As soon as the man finished talking，Yu Gong said that his family could continue to move the mountains after he died. Finally，a god was so moved by Yu Gong that he sent two gods to take the mountains away. It doesn't seem very possible to move a mountain. The story is trying to show us that anything is possible if you work hard. Yu Gong kept trying and didn't give up. I think we should try to find other ways to solve a problem. What could Yu Gong do instead of moving the mountains? That's better and faster than moving a mountain! You have different opinions about the story，and neither of you are wrong. There are many sides to a story and many ways to understand it. 1．重点短语和句型 2．unless，so...that，as soon as...等的用法 1.重点短语和句型 2．unless，so...that，as soon as...等的用法 一、预习课本 P4142 新单词并背诵，完成下面的汉译英。 1．射击____________ 2.开始____________ 3．神____________ 4.提醒____________ 5．稍微____________ 6.愚蠢____________ 二、认真预习 1a2d 内容，找出下列短语和句型。 9．一位老人努力移走大山。 ________________________________________________________________________ 10．这个故事是怎么开始的？ ________________________________________________________________________ 11．他们将要把山上的土和石头放到哪里？ ________________________________________________________________________ 12．那个人一说完，愚公就说他的家人将在他死后继续来移山。 ________________________________________________________________________ 13．最后，一个神仙被愚公感动了，他就派了两个神仙把两座大山给搬走了。 ________________________________________________________________________ 14．移走一座大山似乎是不可能的。 ________________________________________________________________________ 15．这个故事试图告诉我们只要你努力了，一切都有可能。 ________________________________________________________________________ 16．愚公一直在努力而且不放弃。 ________________________________________________________________________ 17．我认为我们应该努力找到其他的解决问题的方法。 ________________________________________________________________________ 18．愚公能做什么来代替移山呢？ ________________________________________________________________________ 19．那比移一座山要更快更好。 ________________________________________________________________________ 20．对于这个故事你们有不同的看法，你们两个都没有错。 ________________________________________________________________________ 21. 一个故事可以从多方面、用很多方法去理解它。 ________________________________________________________________________ Step 1 情景导入 (Play a song Yu Gong Moves a Mountain) Then teacher：Do you know the song? Students：Yes，we do. Teacher：Do you know the name of the song? Students：Yes，Yu Gong Moves a Mountain. ( Maybe the students can't say the name of the song in English) Teacher：Do you know how to say it in English？Now please read after me，“Yu Gong Moves a Mountain”．Today we are going to learn an old story “Yu Gong Moves a Mountain”． 环节说明：由歌曲《愚公移山》引出本节课要学的内容，易于引起学生的学习兴趣，使 学生很快的投入到学习中去。 Step 2 完成教材 1a1c 的任务 1．学生朗读 1a 中的故事，教师纠正读音，然后背诵并且互相提问。(3 分钟) 2．仔细观看图片，你们知道四幅图片涉及的是哪些故事吗？请将图片与 1a 中的故事相 匹配。完成后集体核对答案。(2 分钟) 3．认真听录音，根据听到的内容选出 Anna 和 Wang Ming 正在讨论的故事，集体核对 答案。(3 分钟) 4．再听一遍录音，并跟读对话。(2 分钟) 5．两人一组互相讨论 1c 中的问题，完成后要求几组学生展示讨论的结果。(3 分钟)。 参考案例 1．How does the story begin? 2．What happened next? 3．Where would they put all the earth and stone from the mountains? 6．小结训练。(3 分钟) 1．《西游记》Journey_to_the_West 2．《愚公移山》Yu_Gong_Moves_a_Mountain 3．《后羿射日》Hou_Yi_shoots_the_Suns 4．《女娲补天》Nu_Wa_Repairs_the_Sky (B)5.It's seven o'clock.Let's begin________ our breakfast. A．have B．to have C．has D．having (D)6.I don't know ________． A．what did the story happen B．when did the story happen C．happen what D．when the story happened 环节说明：听说结合，在第一时间向学生传达语言目标，通过对话练习和小结训练，使 语言目标得以强化。 Step 3 完成教材 2a2c 的任务 1.认真观察 2a 中的图片，然后听录音，根据听到的顺序为图片标序号，完成后集体核 对答案。(3 分钟) 2．再认真听一遍录音，圈出你所听到的单词，完成后集体核对答案。(3 分钟) 3．听第三遍录音，学生跟读。(3 分钟) 4．两人一组根据图片内容提示及听力信息内容来用自己的语言讲述故事，完成后请几 名学生讲述故事。(5 分钟) 5．小结训练。(3 分钟) (C)1.After a short while，they continue ________the plan. A．discuss B．to discuss C．discussing D．discussed (B)2.I'm sorry，you can't use my computer now.I am ________ it. A．woking out B．working on C．works for D．works at (C)3.He often reminds me ________ English. A．to practice speak B．practicing speaking C．to practice speaking D．to practicing speaking (B)4.You will achieve nothing ________ you work hard. A．if B．unless C．when D．that (D)5.I'll go to visit my aunt in England ________ the summer holidays start. A．while B．since C．until D．as soon as (D)6.Li Na is ________ famous ________ all the tennis fans in China know her. A．too；to B．enough；to C．as；as D．so；that 环节说明：通过听、说、读、写训练，让学生能用简单的英语来讲述《愚公移山》的故 事；同时学生的口语表达能力在这一环节也得到提升。 Step 4 完成教材 2d 的任务 1．学生自读对话，完成下面的问题。(5 分钟) ①判断正误 T 或 F；②根据对话内容填空；③英译汉 ①Ming Ming thinks the story of Yu Gong is trying to show us that anything is possible if you work hard.(T) ②Anna thinks Yu Gong could build a road instead of moving the mountains. ③There are many sides to a story and many ways to understand it. 一个故事可以从多方面、用很多方法去理解它。 2．大声朗读 2d 对话，读熟后与同伴结对练习，分角色表演对话。(3 分钟) 3．邀请三组来表演对话。(5 分钟) 4．小结训练。(3 分钟) 英译汉 1．这个故事试图告诉我们只要你努力了，一切都有可能。 The_story_is_trying_to_tell_us_that_anything_is_possible_if_you_work_hard. 2．我认为我们应该努力找到其他的解决问题的方法。 I_think_we_should_try_to_find_other_ways_to_solve_a_problem. 3．那比移一座山要更快更好。 That's_better_and_faster_than_moving_a_mountain! 4．对于这个故事我们应该有不同的看法，你们两个都没有错。 We_should_have_different_opinions_about_the_story，and_neither_of_you_are_wrong. 5.一个故事可以从多方面、用很多方法去理解它。 There_are_many_sides_to_a_story_and_many_ways_to_understand_it. 环节说明：将对话问题化，既能锻炼学生的思维能力又能加深对课文的理解。小结训练 又对对话中的重要句型进行了巩固加深。 Step 5 问题探究 1．remind 用法 ①His words remind me________we did together during the past holiday. A．that B．of that C．what D．of what 答案选择 D，remind sb.of sb./sth.意为“使某人想起某人/某事”。what 在句中引导宾语 从句，并在从句中作宾语。 2．remind 的用法归纳： ① remind sb.to do sth. 提醒某人做某事 如：Please remind me to call him back. ② remind sb.＋that 从句 如：He reminds me that I should answer the letter as early as possible. ③ remind sb.提醒某人 如：If my father forgets it，I hope you can remind him. 3．a little bit 今天有点冷。Today_is_a_little_bit_cold. a little bit 和 a_little 以及 a_bit 意思一样，只不过比 a bit 的一点还少一点。作副词使用， 在肯定句中修饰名词、动词、形容词及其形容词比较级。 请学生们做前面课时训练部分。 第二课时 Section A (3a3c) 1.重点单词：magic，birth，stick，hide，tail，Western，weak 2．重点短语：a new TV program called Monkey，give birth to ...，at other times，turn...into... 3．重点句式： Most of them were hearing this story for the first time. Sometimes he can make the stick so small that he can keep it in his ear. He can also make 72 changes to his shape and size，turning himself into different animals and objects. But unless he can hide his tail，he cannot turn himself into a person. And as soon as the TV program came out more than 30 years ago，Western children became interested in reading this story because the clever Monkey King keeps fighting to help the weak and never gives up. 1.重点的短语及句型 2．能用自己的语言复述故事 1．重点的短语及句型 2．能用自己的语言复述故事 一、预习课本 P43 新单词并背诵，完成下面的汉译英。 1．有魔力的__________ 2.生出__________ 3．棍__________ 4.隐藏__________ 5．尾巴__________ 6.西方的__________ 7．虚弱__________ 二、 认真预习 3a3c，找出下列短语和句型。 5．他们大多数人是第一次知道这个故事。 ________________________________________________________________________ 6．有时候，他能够把金箍棒变得如此小以至于他能够把它放到耳朵里。 ________________________________________________________________________ 7．他能够在形状和大小上做到 72 变，把他自己变成不同的动物和物品。 ________________________________________________________________________ 8．但是他如果不把尾巴藏起来，他就不能变成人。 ________________________________________________________________________ 9．这部电视节目在 30 多年前一上映，西方的孩子就对读这个故事很感兴趣，因为聪明 的猴王一直在为了帮助那些弱势群体而斗争，而且从不放弃。 ________________________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________________________ Step 1 情景导入 Teacher：Hello，boys and girls.Have you ever seen a TV program called Journey to the West ？ I am sure that all of us have seen it .There is a very famous character called Sun Wukong.What do you think of him？What happened to him？Can you say something about him? Let some of the students say something about the Journey to the Western. 环节说明：有关《西游记》的谈论，能引起学生的兴趣，激起学生用英语表达的欲望， 自然地引出本节课要学习的内容。 Step 2 完成教材 3a3c 的任务 1.快速阅读短文，找出方框中的 3 个问题的答案，完成后让学生展示答案，教师点拨。 (5 分钟) 2．认真阅读短文，根据短文内容完成 3b 中的表格，请几名学生展示答案，完成后教师 点拨。(5 分钟) 3．细心阅读短文，理解每一句话的意思，小组合作解决遇到的疑难问题。(5 分钟) 4．教师点拨短文中出现的重点和难点。(5 分钟) 5．再次认真阅读短文，用 3a 中的短语来完成 3c 中的句子填空，完成后请学生展示答 案，教师点拨。(3 分钟) 6．熟读短文，识记并背诵知识要点。(5 分钟) 7．小结训练。(3 分钟) (D)1.Do you know the boy ________ Jim. A．calls B．to call C．calling D．called (C)2.The husband is very happy because his wife gave birth ________ a fine healthy baby yesterday. A．for B．at C．to D．in (B)3.It's not very difficult for us to turn water ________ ice in winter. A．in B．into C．to D．for (C)4.Though the boy is only four years old，he is very interested in ________ Beijing Opera. A．sings B．to sing C．singing D．sang (C)5.The rich ________ not always happy. A．am B．is C．are D．be 环节说明：通过阅读分析文章，学生的阅读分析能力在这一环节得到提升；小结训练又 及时地巩固强化了重要的知识点。 Step 3 问题探究 1．I don't know the girl ________ Mary. A．call B．called C．calling D．calls 答案选择 B，called 是 call 的过去分词，在此作后置定语修饰 the girl，可用 named 和 with the name of 来替换。 2．Can you turn this passage ________ English? A．in B．into C．for D．at 答案选择 B，句意“你能把这个短文译成英语吗”？turn...into...意为“把……变 成……”。所以答案为 B。 3.________ rich________ not always happier than ________ poor. A．A；is；a B．The；is；the C．The；are；the D．A；is；the 答案选择 C，the＋形容词表示性质或特征相同的人，具有复数意义，因此答案选择 C。 请学生们做前面课时训练部分。 第三课时 Section A (Grammar Focus4c) 1.重点单词：stepsister，prince，fit，couple，smile，marry，born，object 2．重点短语：fall in love with，get married，be born 3．重点句式： —Why was Yu Gong trying to move to the mountains? —Because they were so big that it took a long time to walk to the other side. He is the main character in Journey to the West. Why can't the Monkey King turn himself into a person? The mice knew that unless they helped her make a dress，she would not be able to go to the party. As soon as the prince saw her，he fell in love with her. The new couple were so happy that they couldn't stop smiling when they got married. 1.重点单词和句型 2．能够用英文讲述故事 能够用英文讲述故事 一、预习课本 P44 新单词并背诵，完成下面的汉译英。 1．继姐(妹)__________ 2.王子__________ 3．适合__________ 4.两人__________ 5．微笑__________ 6.结婚__________ 7．出生__________ 8.物品__________ 二、认真预习 Grammar Focus4c，找出下列短语和句型。 4．—愚公为什么要努力去搬走大山？ —因为它们是如此之大，步行到达山的另一边要花费很长时间。 ________________________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________________________ 5．它是《西游记》中的主要人物。 ________________________________________________________________________ 6．为什么猴王不能把自己变成人？ ________________________________________________________________________ 7．老鼠知道如果他不帮助她做一条裙子，她就不能去参加晚会。 ________________________________________________________________________ 8．王子一见到她就喜欢上了她。 ________________________________________________________________________ 9．这对新人是如此的高兴以至于他们在结婚时不能停止微笑。 ________________________________________________________________________ Step 1 情景导入 Teacher：We have learned two stories，they are Yu Gong Moves a Mountain and Journey to the West.Today we will learn another story Cinderella. 环节说明：开门见山直接提出本节课要学的故事 Cinderella，简单明了。 Step 2 完成教材 Grammar Focus 的任务 1．学生大声朗读 Grammar Focus 的句子。(2 分钟) 2．小结训练。(2 分钟) 1．—这个故事是怎么开始的？ ________________________________________________________________________ —从前， 有一位老人…… ________________________________________________________________________ 2．—接下来发生了什么事情？ ________________________________________________________________________ —那个人一说完，愚公就说他的家人将在他死后继续来移山。 ________________________________________________________________________ 3．—愚公为什么努力去移山？ ________________________________________________________________________ —因为它们是如此之大，步行到达山的另一边要花费很长时间。 ________________________________________________________________________ 4．—猴王是谁？ ________________________________________________________________________ —它是《西游记》中的主要人物。 ________________________________________________________________________ 5．—为什么猴王不能把自己变成人？ ________________________________________________________________________ —他不能把他自己变成人，除非他能隐藏他的尾巴。 ________________________________________________________________________ 环节说明：通过对 Grammar Focus 句型的填空练习能够使学生更好的来理解掌握本单 元的重点句型。 Step 3 完成教材 4a4c 的任务 1．认真阅读 4a 中的句子，然后用 unless，as soon as 或者 so...that 来完成句子，完成后 请学生来展示答案，然后熟读句子。(3 分钟) 2．读熟句子之后让学生用自己的语言来讲述故事，并请学生展示。(5 分钟) 3．认真阅读 4b 中的短文，用括号内所给单词的正确形式来填空，完成后请学生展示答 案，教师点拨。(5 分钟) 4．学生熟读 4b 短文，并且两人一组互相朗读。(3 分钟) 5．小组内互相讲述自己喜欢的故事，并且每组派出一名代表参加全班比赛，比一比那 个组讲得好。(10 分钟) 6．小结训练。(2 分钟) (B)1.We're talking about “China Dream” these days.It's ________attractive________ all of the Chinese people are interested in it. A．such；that B．so；that C．too；to D．so；to (A)2.Henry will give us a report as soon as he ________. A．arrives B．arrived C．is arriving D．will arrive (D)3.We can easily become unhappy________ we work out our problems in our daily life. A．after B．if C．until D．unless 环节说明：通过本环节的学习，让学生掌握了 unless，as soon as 和 so...that 的用法及重 点的句型。同时通过讲述故事这一环节提高了学生的语言表达能力。 Step 4 问题探究 1．I told him the news _______ be came back yesterday. A．until B．as soon as C．unless D．at 答案选择 B，until 直到……时，在……以前，引导时间状语从句；as soon as 一…… 就……，引导时间状语从句；unless 除非，引导条件状语从句。句意：昨天他一回来，我就 把这个消息告诉了他。依据句意选 B。 2．我去年去了上海并且喜欢上了它。 I_went_to_Shanghai_and_fell_in_love_with_it_last_year. fall in love with sb/sth.喜欢(爱)上某物/某人。 3．marry 的用法 ①上星期约翰和玛丽结婚了。 John_and_Mary_got_married_last_week. ②上个月简和一位医生结婚了。 Jane_married_a_doctor_last_month. ③ 她把女儿嫁给了一位商人。 She_married_her_daughter_to_a_businessman. marry 既可用作及物动词，也可用作不及物动词，意为结婚；嫁；娶；与……结婚等。 常见用法有： ①表示嫁给某人；与……结婚：marry_sb(一般不与介词 with 连用)； ② 表示与某人结婚：be/get married to sb. ③ 表示父母把女儿嫁给某人或为儿子娶媳妇时用句型：marry sb to_sb。 请看下面一组对话：仔细体会 marry 及其句型的用法。 A：Is Helen married? B：Yes，she is.She married a Frenchman. A：When did they get married? B：In 1998. A：Then they have been married for six years. 请学生们做前面课时训练部分。 第四课时 Section B (1a1d) 1.重点单词：gold，emperor，underwear，silk，stupid，cheat 2．重点句式： Nobody wanted to sound stupid. They were trying to cheat the emperor. 1.重点单词和句型 2．能够听懂并且能够讲述《皇帝的新装》 能够听懂并且能够讲述《皇帝的新装》 一、预习课本 P45 新单词并背诵，完成下面的汉译英。 1．金色的____________ 2.国王____________ 3．内衣____________ 4.丝绸____________ 5．愚蠢的____________ 6.欺骗____________ 二、认真预习 1a1d，找出下列句型。 1．没有人想听起来很愚蠢。 ________________________________________________________________________ 2．他们努力去欺骗皇帝。 ________________________________________________________________________ Step 1 情景导入 Teacher：We have learned a story by Hans Christian Andersen.Have you remembered its name? Students：Yes. Teacher：What's the name? Students：Cinderella. Teacher：Who can tell the story for us? (Ask some students to tell the story.) Teacher：Today we are going to learn another story by Hans Christian Andersen.And we have learned it in our Chinese book.Do you know what its name is? Students ： Yes.The Emperor's New Clothes.(The students may say it in Chinese.Then the teacher says the English name of the story and asks the students to read.) 环节说明：《灰姑娘》故事复述既锻炼了学生的口语表达能力，同时又以此引出《皇帝 的新装》这篇本节课要学的故事，过渡自然、简单。 Step 2 完成教材 1a1d 的任务 1．学生朗读 1a 中的单词，教师纠正读音错误，然后两人一组互相提问背诵单词。(3 分钟) 2．仔细观察 1c 图片，明确字母所指代的单词，然后将 1a 中的单词和 1c 中的字母匹配， 完成后集体核对答案。(3 分钟) 3．听录音，按听到的顺序给图片标号，完成后集体核对答案。(3 分钟) 4．再听一遍录音，根据对话内容完成 1c 中的句子，集体核对答案，完成 1d。(3 分钟) 5．听第三遍录音，学生跟着大声朗读。(3 分钟) 6．根据图片信息提示和听力信息用自己的语言讲述这个故事，先是小组内互相讲述， 然后每组推荐一名学生参加全班比赛，比一比哪个组讲得好。(10 分钟) 7．小结训练。(2 分钟) 1．The dress is made of silk． 2．It' s stupid of you to do it like this. 3．The boy is very honest and he never cheat others. 4．He is an e mperor who loved the clothes. 5．He found a bag of gold in a deep hole under the the ground. 环节说明：通过听、说、读、写训练，使学生能更好地用英文来讲述《皇帝的新装》这 个故事，通过小结训练，让学生熟练地掌握了重点的单词。 Step 3 问题探究 1．—Do you know the song Gangnam Style? —Of course.It ________ interesting. A．tastes B．smells C．sounds D．feels 答案选择 C。taste 尝起来；smell 闻起来；sound 听起来；feel 感觉。句意为：你知道《江 南 style》这首歌吗？当然，它听起来很有趣。故 C 项适合该语境。 2．He is an honest boy，he never ________others. A．cheat B．cheats C．beats D．tell 答案选择 B，根据句意“他是一个诚实的孩子，他从来没有骗过人”可知应该填写意为 “欺骗”的单词，所以排除 C 和 D，又因为主语为第三人称单数，所以选择 B。 请学生们做前面课时训练部分。 第五课时 Section B (2a2e) 1．重点单词：stepmother，wife，husband，whole，scene，stone，shine，ground，lead， voice，inside，brave 2．重点短语：a fairy tale，the rest of，make a plan，get wood，come back，never mind， inside the house，in the forest 3．重点句式： One year，the weather was so dry that no food would grow. The wife told her husband that unless he left the children to die in the forest，the whole family would die. Hansel made a plan to save himself and his sister. Did you hear our stepmother planning to kill us? Don't eat it until you get to the forest. I'm dropping white stones along the way. When the moon is shining bright，we will be able to see the stones. What a long time you slept in the forest! As soon as you wake up，you must go to the forest with your father. It's leading us to that wonderful house made of bread，cake and sugar. The children learn that something bad is going to happen. 1.重点短语和句型 2．以《糖果屋》为载体，理解文章的类型，针对不同的文章类型采用不同的方式来理 解学习 1．重点短语和句型 2．针对不同的文章类型采用不同的方式来理解学习 一、预习课本 4647 新单词并背诵，完成下面的汉译英。 1．继母____________ 2.妻子____________ 3．丈夫____________ 4.全部的____________ 5．场景____________ 6.石头____________ 7．发光____________ 8.地面____________ 9．带路____________ 10.声音____________ 11．里面____________ 12.勇敢的__________ 二、认真预习 2a2e 的内容，找出下列短语和句型。 9．有一年天气是如此干旱以至于食物都不能生长。 ________________________________________________________________________ 10.妻子告诉丈夫如果他不把孩子们留到森林死去，他们全家将会死去。 ________________________________________________________________________ 11．Hansel 制订了一个计划来拯救自己和妹妹。 ________________________________________________________________________ 12．你听到我们的继母打算杀死我们吗？ ________________________________________________________________________ 13．到了森林里你们再吃它。 ________________________________________________________________________ 14．我沿路撒了白色的石头。 ________________________________________________________________________ 15．当月亮发光照耀的时候，我们就能看到这些石头。 ________________________________________________________________________ 16．你们在森林里睡了好长的时间呀！ ________________________________________________________________________ 17．只要你一醒来，你就必须要跟着你的爸爸去森林里。 ________________________________________________________________________ 18．它正在带领我们去那个奇妙的用面包、蛋糕和糖果盖成的房子。 ________________________________________________________________________ 19．孩子们知道不幸的事情将要发生。 ________________________________________________________________________ Step 1 情景导入 Teacher：A fairy tale is an old，traditional story.In this unit we have learned some fairy tales.Do you still remember what they are? After the students say the names of the fairy tales，then asks some of the students to retell the one or two stories. Teacher：Today we will continue to learn another fairy tale—Hansel and Gretel. 环节说明：通过让学生复述学过的故事，提高了学生的口语表达能力和语言组织能力， 同时由以此引出本节课要学的童话故事《糖果屋》，引起学生的好奇心，激发他们的学习欲 望。 Step 2 完成教材 2a2c 的任务 1．小组内互相交流 2a 中所给出的三个童话故事的情节，然后邀请几个学生简单的讲述 故事情节。(3 分钟) 2．阅读 2b 《糖果屋》第一段，小组内交流讨论故事情节将会如何发展，然后阅读剩 余部分，看看谁预测的比较准。(3 分钟) 3．认真阅读短文，思考每一个场景讲述的主题是什么，然后将 2c 中的句子与场景匹配， 完成后集体核对答案。(5 分钟) 4．再次细心观察每一个场景，理解每一句话的意思，小组合作解决遇到的疑难问题。 (5 分钟) 5．教师点拨短文中出现的重点和难点。(5 分钟) 6．熟读短文，识记背诵知识要点。(5 分钟) 7．小结训练。(7 分钟) (C)1.The weather is ________ sunny ________ many people go to the park to enjoy the sunshine. A．very；that B．such；that C．so；that D．too；to (B)2.Unless you work hard，you ________ the English text. A．pass B．will pass C．past D．will past (B)3.They had a meeting yesterday and made a plan ________ some money to the poor. A．giving away B．to give away C．to hand out D．to give up (D)4.We didn't start our discussion ______ everybody arrived. A．since B．if C．while D．until (B)5.The villagers plant many trees ________the road. A．at B．along C．for D．by (B)6.________ exciting sport it is to go bike riding! A．What a B．What an C．What D．How (D)7.—Will you please give the dictionary to Jane? —Sure，I'll give it to her ________ she arrives here. A．before B．until C．because D．as soon as (A)8.—Excuse me，could you please tell me the way to the hospital. —No problem.I will lead you ________． A．there B．here C．to there D．to here (C)9.A smile costs ________，but gives so much. A．something B．anything C．nothing D．everything 环节说明：通过本环节的学习不仅锻炼了学生的阅读能力，而且通过小结训练让学生对 重要知识点进行了巩固练习。 Step 3 完成教材 2d2e 的任务 1．认真阅读课文，根据短文内容回答 2d 的问题，找学生展示答案 2d 的问题，教师点 拨。(5 分钟) 2．四人一组分角色表演，然后邀请几组学生表演。(10 分钟) 环节说明：通过 2d 环节让学生对文章有了更深刻的理解；2e 环节让学生在理解故事情 节的基础之上提升了学生的表演和语言组织能力。 Step 3 问题探究 1．She leads me ________ the supermarket. A．for B．to C．at D．for 答案选择 B，lead 意为“引导、带领”，经常用到的句型为 lead sb.to sp.带领某人去某 地。因此答案选择 B。除此之外 lead 还有“致使/诱惑……的意思”经常用到的句型为 lead sb.to do sth.致使/诱惑某人做某事……。 2．When you ________ at a restaurant ，please order just enough food. A．ate B．will eat C．eat D．haven eaten 答案选择 C，when 在此题中意为“当……的时候”，引导时间状语从句，当主句为祈 使句时，从句用一般现在时态，因此答案选择 C。 3．—________ excellent work you have done! —It's very kind of you to say so. A．What an B．How C．What 答案选择 C，work 意为“工作”是不可数名词，因此答案选择 C。 4．whole 与 all 的用法区别 ①有时这两个词含义大致相同， 全部 whole＝all 位置不同：all 要放在冠词、指示代词、物主代词等之前，而 whole 应放在这些词之后。 ② 所有的孩子都过得很快活。All_the_children_are_living_happily. 整座在楼都在燃烧。The_whole_building_is_burning. 在复数名词前一般用 all，在单数可数名词前一般要用 whole；all 指“一个不剩”(即“全 部”)；whole 指“一点不缺”(即“整个”)。 ③在不可数名词之前一般用 all，而不用 whole，(但偶尔有例外：the whole time/all the time；his whole energy/all his energy 等)；但在物质名词前是绝对不能用 whole 的。 请学生们做前面课时训练部分。 第六课时 Section B (3aSelf Check) 复习前面几个课时学过的重点单词、短语及句型。 1．unless，as soon as 和 so...that 等的用法 2．会讲述故事 会讲述故事 1．复习学过的重点单词、短语和句型 2．复述学过的故事 Step 1 情景导入 Teacher：Today we will learn the last period of Unit 6.First I will ask some students to retell the story of Yu Gong and Cinderella. (Some students retell the two stories.) 环节说明：让学生复述学过的故事，复习前面学过的内容，简单明了。 Step 2 完成教材 3a3b 的任务 1．认真阅读 2b 中的每一个场景，为每一个场景写出几个关键词来说明本场景的主要情 节，完成后小组内互相交流所写的关键词并说明理由。(5 分钟) 2．再次阅读 2b 故事，然后完成 3b 的故事情节概述，完成后集体核对答案。(5 分钟) 3．两人一组互相复述故事，并请几位学生复述故事。(7 分钟) 环节说明：通过这个教学环节锻炼了学生的总结能力和口语表达能力。 Step 3 完成教材 Self Check 的任务 1．认真阅读 1 中的句子然后用自己的观点补全句子，完成后小组内互相交流所写答案 并且总结 unless，as soon as 和 so...that 的用法。(3 分钟) 2．认真阅读 2 中的短文，用所给词的正确形式将短文补充完整，请学生展示答案，教 师点拨。(5 分钟) 3．认真阅读短文，两人一组互相复述故事，然后邀请几名学生复述故事。(8 分钟) 环节说明：通过 1 的学习使学生复习了本单元的重要单词和短语的用法，故事复述环节 锻炼了学生的语言组织能力和口语表达能力。 Step 4 问题探究 1．The man is so old that he can't find the way ________ home. A．to B．for C．at D．[ZK)] 答案选择 D，the way to 意为“去……的路”，但是在本题中 home 是副词，所以要省 略了介词 to，因此答案选择 D。 请学生们做前面课时训练部分。Unit 7 What is the highest mountain in the world? 第一课时 Section A (1a2d) 1.重点单词：square，meter，deep，desert，population，Asia，wall，tour，tourist，ancient， protect，wide 2．重点短语：manmade objects，as far as I know 3．重点句式： Qomolangma is higher than any other mountain in the world. What is the highest mountain in the world? China has the biggest population in the world.It's a lot bigger than the population of the US. It has a much longer history than the US. China is almost as big as the US. Did you know that China is one of the oldest countries in the world? How long is the wall? The main reason was to protect China. As far as I know，there are no manmade objects as big as this. Is Badaling part of the Ming Great Wall? 1．重点短语和句型 2．形容词和副词比较级和最高级的用法 1.重点短语和句型 2．形容词和副词比较级和最高级的用法 一、预习课本 P4950 新单词并背诵，完成下面的汉译英。 1．平方____________ 2.米____________ 3．深的____________ 4.沙漠____________ 5．人口____________ 6.亚洲____________ 7．墙____________ 8.旅行____________ 9．旅行者__________ 10.古老的__________ 11．保护____________ 12.宽的____________ 二、认真预习 1a2d，找出下列短语和句型。 3．珠穆朗玛峰比世界上的其他任何一座山峰都高。 ________________________________________________________________________ 4．什么山是世界上最高的山？ ________________________________________________________________________ 5．中国是世界上人口最多的国家。它比美国的人口数要多的多。 ________________________________________________________________________ 6．它比美国拥有更悠久的历史。 ________________________________________________________________________ 7．中国几乎跟美国一样大。 ________________________________________________________________________ 8．你知道中国是世界上最古老的国家之一吗？ ________________________________________________________________________ 9．这道城墙有多长？ ________________________________________________________________________ 10．最主要的原因是保护中国。 ________________________________________________________________________ 11．据我所知再没有和这个一样大的人造工程了。 ________________________________________________________________________ 12．八达岭是明长城的一部分吗？ ________________________________________________________________________ Step 1 情景导入 ( Show some pictures of Qomolangma，the Nile，the Caspian Sea and the Sahara to the students) ( Point at the picture of Qomolangma) Teacher：What is it? Student 1：It's Qomolangma. Teacher：How high is it? Student 2：It's 8844.43 meters high. The teacher can help the student say the number. Teacher：Qomolangma is the highest mountain in the world. Let the students repeat. Then show the other pictures like this. ... 环节说明：由世界地理之最入手，引出最高级，学生易于理解和接受，并能引起他们的 学习兴趣，同时为 1a 的学习打下基础。 Step 2 完成教材 1a1c 的任务 1．学生朗读 1a 中的数字，教师纠正错误，然后将 1a 的地理事物和实际情况连线，完 成后集体核对答案。(3 分钟) 2．两人一组仿照所给对话形式练习对话，并邀请几组学生表演对话。(2 分钟) 参考案例 A：How high is Qomolangma? B：It's 8844.43 meters. 3．认真听录音，将 1b 中的句子补充完整，完成后集体核对答案。(3 分钟) 4．再听一遍录音，并跟读对话。(3 分钟) 5．两人一组利用 1a 和 1b 中信息仿照 1c 的形式编练新的对话，完成后要求几组学生表 演对话。(5 分钟)。 参考案例 A：What is the highest mountain in the world? B：Qomolangma. 6．小结训练。(3 分钟) (B)1.—All of us are proud of the progress he's made during the past few years. —Yes，we're sure he will be even ________. A．successful B．more successful C．most successful D．successfully (A)2.My father told me a story last night.It is ________ one I've ever heard. A．the funniest B．funniest C．funnier D．the funnier (C)3.China is developing ________ of all the countries in the world. A．fast B．faster C．the fastest D．the more fast (B)4.—How tall he is! —Yes，he is ________ than any other student in his class. A．tall B．taller D．tallest D．more tall (D)5.—Peter looks sporty. —Yes.He is the ________ runner in my class. A．slower B．slowest C．faster D．fastest 环节说明：听说结合，第一时间向学生传达语言目标，通过结对对话练习和小结训练， 使语言目标得以强化。 Step 3 完成教材 2a2c 的任务 1.听录音，根据听到的顺序为句子标号，集体核对答案。(3 分钟) 2．再认真听一遍录音，将 2a 中的数字填在合适的句子中，完成后集体核对答案。(3 分钟) 3．听第三遍录音，学生跟读。(3 分钟) 4．两人一组利用 2a 句子中的信息，仿照 2c 的形式编练新的对话，邀请几组学生表演 新的对话。(5 分钟) 参考案例 A: Did you know that China is one of the oldest countries in the world? B: Yes，I did.It's much older than my country. 5．小结训练。(3 分钟) (D)1.Tian'anmen Square is one of ________ squares in the world. A．large B．larger C．largest D．the largest (B)2.Lee came to Beijing in 2005.He has been here ________ than you. A．long B．longer C．longest D．the longest (D)3.—Are you feeling better today，dear? —No，even ____________ . A．well B．better C．bad D．worse (B)4.We don't have much homework now and our school bags are ________ they used to be. A．as heavy as B．not as heavy as C．as heavily as D．not as heavily as (C)5.—Which country has ________ population，China，America or Japan? —China，of course. A．biggest B．the most C．the biggest D．the smallest 环节说明：通过听说训练让学生熟练掌握比较级和最高级；同时学生的口语表达能力在 这一环节得到提升。 Step 4 完成教材 2d 的任务 1．学生自读对话，完成下面的问题。(5 分钟) ①判断正误 T 或 F；②根据对话内容填空；③回答问题；④英译汉 ①When people visit the Great Wall，they often ask how long it is.(T) ②Badaling is a part of the Ming Great Wall and is the_most_famous part. ③Why did the ancient emperors build the wall? The_main_reason_was_to_protect_China. ④As far as I know，there are no manmade objects as big as this. 据我所知，再没有和这个一样大的人造工程了。_ 2．大声朗读 2d 对话，读熟后与同伴结对练习，分角色表演对话。(3 分钟) 3．邀请三组来表演对话。(5 分钟) 4．小结训练。(3 分钟) (A)1.—________ is the Nile? —It's 6671 kilometers long. A．How long B．How far C．How deep D．How high (B)2.As ________ as I can see，there are no mistakes. A．long B．far C．soon D．quickly (B)3.—Today is the ________ day in my life ， because I won the first prize in the congratulations. —Congratulations! A．happy B．happiest C．happier D．much happier (B)4.We must play a part in ________ our earth. A．promising B．protecting C．appearing D．polluting 环节说明：将对话问题化，既能锻炼学生的思维能力又能加深对课文的理解。小结训练 又对对话中的重要句型进行了巩固加深。 Step 5 问题探究 1．population 的用法 ① 这个城市的人口是 600 万。 The_population_of_this_city_is_6_million. ② 德国的人口是多少？ What's_the_population_of_Germany? ③ 中国的人口比美国的人口多得多。 The_population_of_China_is_a_lot_bigger_than_that_of_the_US. ① population 直接作主语时意为“人口数”，这时谓语动词要用单数形式。但是如果部 分人口(分数、百分数)作主语，谓语用复数。 ② 表示“某地有多少人口”有两种表达方式： a)The population of ＋某地＋be＋数词 (该句型中 population 前用冠词 the); b)某地＋has a population of ＋数词＋(people)(该句型中 population 前用冠词 a)。 ③“某地有多少人口”要用“What is the population of ...？”或“How_large is the population of...？”提问． ④表示人口“多”要用 huge 或 large 修饰，表示人口“少”要用 small 修饰。 2．There are ________ students in the room，so it's very quiet. A．not B．not a C．no D．not some 答案选择 C，no 置于可数名词单数前面时，相当于 not a；放在可数名词复数前面或 不可数名词前时，相当于 not any，意为“没有的，全无的”。因此答案选择 C。 3．as far as 的用法 ① 我们走得不如其他人远。 We_didn't_go_as_far_as_the_others. ② 就我所知，他人不错。 As_far_as_I_know，he's_a_good_man. ① as far as 本义，意为“与……一样远”，“一直到……”(在否定句中也可用 so far as)。 ② 用于引申义，意为“就……而言”，“从……来看”，“尽……所能”，“只要”(有 时可用 so far as)。 请学生们做前面课时训练部分。 第二课时 Section A (3a3c) 1.重点单词：paragraph，southwestern，thick，include，freezing，condition，succeed， Japan，challenge，achieve，force，nature 2．重点短语：run along，take in，in the face of，even though，so many people 3．重点句式： The Himalayas run along the southwestern part of China. Thick clouds cover the top and snow can fall very hard. Even more serious difficulties include freezing weather conditions and heavy storms. It's also very hard to take in air as you get near the top. People want to challenge themselves in the face of difficulties. The spirit of these climbers shows us that we should never give up trying to achieve our dreams. It also shows that humans can sometimes be stronger than the forces of nature. 1.重点的短语及句型 2．能够概括文章段落大意 1．重点的短语及句型 2．能够概括文章段落大意 一、预习课本 P51 新单词并背诵，完成下面的汉译英。 1．段落____________ 2.西南的____________ 3．厚的____________ 4.包括____________ 5．冻冰的____________ 6.条件____________ 7．成功(v.)__________ 8.日本____________ 9．挑战____________ 10.完成____________ 11．力量____________ 12.大自然__________ 二、认真预习 3a3c，找出下列短语和句型。 1．贯穿 2．吸入 3.面对 4．即使 5．如此多的人 6．喜马拉雅山横贯中国的西南。 ________________________________________________________________________ 7．厚厚的云层笼罩在顶部而且雪下得很大。 ________________________________________________________________________ 8．甚至更严重的困难包括冰冻的天气条件和暴风雪。 ________________________________________________________________________ 9．当你接近顶部的时候，吸入空气也是非常困难的。 ________________________________________________________________________ 10．人们想在面对困难的时候挑战自己。 ________________________________________________________________________ 11．这些爬山者的这种精神告诉我们不要放弃努力实现我们的梦想。 ________________________________________________________________________ 12．它也表明有时候人类比自然的力量要强大。 ________________________________________________________________________ Step 1 情景导入 (Show the pictures of the Himalayas) Teacher：This is the Himalayas.And it runs along the southwestern part of China. (Show a picture of Qomolangma) Teacher：This is the the highest mountains in the world，and it's very dangerous for people to climb.But many people try to climb this mountain.Do you know who has reached the top？What can we learn from the climbers？And what does the spirit of the climbers tell us？Now let's begin our class with these questions and find out the answers from the article—Qomolangma—the Most Dangerous Mountain in the World. 环节说明：由喜马拉雅山和珠穆朗玛峰的图片引出本节课要学习的内容，并且在导入时 对学生提出问题，使学生在学习的时候具有针对性。 Step 2 完成教材 3a3c 的任务 1.快速阅读短文，将方框中的三个段落和段意匹配，完成后让学生展示答案，教师点 拨。(5 分钟) 2．认真阅读短文，根据短文内容完成 3b 中的表格，请几名学生展示答案，完成后教师 点拨。(5 分钟) 3．再次认真阅读短文，用 3a 中的短语来完成 3c 中的句子填空，完成后请学生展示答 案，教师点拨。(3 分钟) 4．细心阅读短文，理解每一句话的意思，小组合作解决遇到的疑难问题。教师点拨短 文中出现的重点和难点。(5 分钟) 5．熟读短文，识记并背诵知识要点。(5 分钟) 6．小结训练。(3 分钟) (A)1.Vines run ________ the sides of the road. A．along B．up C．down D．to (D)2.There are ten people in this office ________ me. A．includes B．include C．included D．including (C)3.Fish take________oxygen through their gills. A．up B．into C．in D．for (B)4.There are so ________ toys in the shop that I can't decide which to buy. A．such B．many C．more D．that (C)5.The policeman showed great bravery ________danger. A．in the face B．in the front of C．in the face of D．before 环节说明：通过阅读分析文章，学生的阅读分析能力在这一环节得到提升；小结训练又 及时的巩固强化了重要的知识点。 Step 3 问题探究 1．I can't believe _______ a little girl can read ________ many books. A．so；so B．such；such C．so；such D．such；so 答案选择 D，so 副词，“如此”，后跟形容词或副词；such 形容词，“如此的”，后可 跟可数名词或不可数名词。跟可数名词单数时要加不定冠词；如果单数名词前有形容词修饰， such 和 so 都可使用，但词序不同。当名词前有表示数量的词 many，much，few，little 时， 要用 so；但 little 作“小”来理解时，只能用 such。因此答案选择 D。 2．It's difficult for us to ________ air when we get near the top of the high mountain. A．take off B．take up C．take down D．take in 答案选择 D，根据句意“当我们将要到达山顶的时候，对于我们来说吸入空气是很难 的”，应该选择 take in 意为“吸入”。 3．He works so hard that he is sure his dream ________. A．to achieve B．to come true C．achieve D．come true 答案选择 A，achieve 实现(理想、愿望、预言等)，及物动词，主语一般为人；come true 实现，不及物动词组，一般由物(理想、愿望、预言等)作主语。又因为 be sure 后面跟动词 不定式，所以答案选择 A。 请学生们做前面课时训练部分。 第三课时 Section A (Grammar Focus4c) 1.重点单词：ocean 2．重点短语：the Pacific Ocean 3．重点句式： —Which is the deepest salt lake in the world? —The Caspian Sea is the deepest of all the salt lakes. 形容词和副词的比较级 形容词和副词的比较级 一、预习课本 P52 新单词并背诵，完成下面的汉译英。 1．海洋 二、认真预习 Grammar Focus3c，找出下列短语和句型。 1．太平洋 2.—世界上最深的咸水湖是哪个？ —里海是所有的咸水湖中最深的。 ________________________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________________________ Step 1 情景导入 Teacher：We have learned how to compare things with Comparative and Superlative Forms of Adjective and Adverbs.Today we will do some practice to remember it well. 环节说明：开门见山地提出本节课的学习目标——形容词和副词的比较级和最高级。 Step 2 完成教材 Grammar Focus 的任务 1．学生大声朗读 Grammar Focus 的句子。(2 分钟) 2．小结训练。(2 分钟) 1．—世界上最高的山是什么？ What's_the_highest_mountain_in_the_world? —Qomolangma. 2．—珠穆朗玛峰有多高？ How_high_is_Qomolangma? —It's 8844.43high. 它比其他的任何一座山都高。 It's_higher_than_any_other_mountain. 3．—世界上最深的咸水湖是哪个？ Which_is_the_deepest_salt_lake_in_the_world? —里海是所有的湖中最深的。 The_Caspian_Sea_is_the_deepest_of_all_the_salt_lakes. 4．—你知道中国是世界上最古老的国家之一吗？ Did_you_know_that_China_is_one_of_the_oldest_countries_in_the_world? —是的，我知道。它比美国要古老。 Yes，I_did.It's_much_older_than_the_US. 环节说明：通过对 Grammar Focus 句型的填空练习，能够使学生更好的理解掌握本单 元的重点句型和语法。 Step 3 完成教材 4a4c 的任务 1.认真阅读 4a 中的句子，然后用方框中所给词的正确形式填空，完成后小组内互相交 流答案。(3 分钟) 2．熟读 4a 中的句子，然后小组内总结比较级和最高级的用法及常用句型。(3 分钟) 3．认真阅读 4b 中的句子，然后仿照 4b 的形式根据所给出的提示来写出两组比较的句 子，完成后小组内互相交流答案。(5 分钟) 4．运用比较级和最高级写出 5 个问句，然后向你的搭档提问你所写出的问题。(3 分钟) 5．小结训练。(2 分钟) (D)1.She's already ________ her brother. A．so tall than B．as tall than C．so tall as D．as tall as (D)2.It is said that it is ________ today than yesterday.Shall we go skating this afternoon? A．the hottest B．hot C．hottest D．hotter (A)3.Shanghai is bigger than ________ in Japan. A．any other city B．all the other cities C．any city D．the other cities (C)4.She looks ________ than she does. A．the more older B．very older C．much older D．more older (C)5.The garden is becoming ________． A．more beautiful and more B．more beautiful and beautiful C．more and more beautiful D．more beautiful and beautifuler (A)6.They competed(比赛)to see who could work ________. A．the fastest and best B．the faster and the better C．fastest and better D．faster and better 环节说明：通过本环节的学习，学生熟练掌握了形容词和副词的比较级和最高级的用法 及特殊句型。 Step 4 问题探究 1．—Who ran ________ of all in the sports meeting? —Hector did，I think. A．fast B．faster C．the fastest D．more fast 答案选择 C，句意：在所有的人中，谁在运动会上跑得________。我认为是 Hector。fast 是原级“快”；faster 是比较级“更快”；the fastest 是最高级“最快”；more fast 是错误表 达法。根据句意在三者或三者以上中作比较要用最高级，故选 C。 2．Liu Ying is good at singing.She sings ________the famous singer，CoCo. A．as well as B．as good as C．as better as D．as the best as 答案选择 A，根据 as ＋原级＋ as 可知 C 和 D 是错误的。A 项为和……一样好，well 为副词；B 项为和……一样好，good 为形容词。根据谓语动词 sings 可知用 well，副词修饰 动词。所以选择答案 A。 请学生们做前面课时训练部分。 第四课时 Section B (1a1d) 1.重点单词：weigh 2．重点短语：at birth 3．重点句式： The elephant weighs many times more than this panda. 1.形容词和副词的比较级和最高级 2．数字的表达 1．形容词和副词的比较级和最高级 2．数字的表达 一、预习课本 P53 新单词并背诵，完成下面的汉译英。 1．重量(v.) 二、认真预习 1a1d 找出下列短语和句型。 1．出生时 2．大象比这只熊猫重好多倍。 ________________________________________________________________________ Step 1 情景导入 (Show two pictures to the students.One is a picture of a panda and the other is an elephant.) Teacher：What's this? Students：It's a panda. Teacher：What's this? Students：It's an elephant. Teacher ： Can you say something about the two animals with Comparative Forms of Adjectives and Adverbs? ... 环节说明：由图片引导，用比较级对两者进行比较，引出 1a 的教学内容，过渡自然， 易于理解及引起学生的学习兴趣。 Step 2 完成教材 1a1d 的任务 1.认真阅读 1a 中所给的信息，然后用这些信息仿照给出的例句对大象和熊猫进行比较， 邀请几位学生说出自己所想的句子。(5 分钟) 2．请学生朗读出方框中的数字，教师纠正读音。为听力做好准备。(4 分钟) 3．听录音，标出所听到的数字，集体核对答案，完成 1c。(3 分钟) 4．再听一遍录音，用正确的数字来补全句子，请学生展示答案。(3 分钟) 5．再细心听录音并跟读，整体感知对话。(3 分钟) 6．游戏接龙，根据听力信息或自己熟知的有关熊猫的内容，小组内轮流说出有关熊猫 的句子，比一比谁说得多说得好，邀请几组学生来展示。(5 分钟) 参考案例 A：A baby panda cannot see. B：An adult panda weighs many times more than a baby panda. 7．小结训练。(5 分钟) (A)1.Jim is funnier than ________ in his class. A．any other boy B．any boy C．any other boys D．all the boys (B)2.—Which animal do you think runs ________，a dog or a rabbit? —A rabbit，of course. A．fast B．faster C．fastest D．the fastest (B)3.—Why don't you buy this book? —Because it is ________ of the two books. A．expensive B．more expensive C．most expensive D．the most expensive (D)4.David jumped the ________ in the long jump.He won the game! A．longest B．fastest C．highest D．farthest 环节说明：通过听力训练和对话练习，让学生掌握了比较级的用法和倍数的表达；小结 训练让学生熟练并巩固了比较级的用法。 Step 4 问题探究 1．Li Ming is much cleverer than ________ student in their class. A．any B．any other C．others D．the others 答案选择 B，“主语＋比较级＋than any other...”结构表示：主语所描述的事物比其他任 何一个都……，比较级形式表示最高级含义。若比较范围不同，than 后应用“any＋可数名 词的复数形式＋其他”。例如：China is larger that any countries in Africa.中国比非洲上的任 何国家都大。 2．Our school is ________ than yours. A．bigger twice B．twice bigger C．two bigger D．twice bigger 答 案 选 择 D ， 本 题 考 查 倍 数 的 表 达 方 法 ， 用 到 的 句 型 是 ： A is...times larger /higher/longer/wider than B. 还有经常用到的句型：A is ...times the size /height/length/width of B. 如：The new building is three times the height of the old one.这座新楼比那座旧楼高三倍。 (新楼是旧楼的四倍高) A is ...times as big /high/long/wide/large as B. 如：Asia is four times as large as Europe.亚洲是欧洲的四倍大。(亚洲比欧洲大三倍) 请学生们做前面课时训练部分。 第五课时 Section B (2a2e) 1．重点单词：bamboo，research，awake，excitement，illness，adult，remain，artwork， wild，government 2．重点短语：die from，every two years，run over，fall over, or os 3．重点句式： Lin Wei and the other panda keepers are preparing the milk for the baby pandas' breakfast. When the babies see the keepers，they run over with excitement and some of them even walk into their friends and fall over. The babies often die from illnesses and do not live very long. Adult pandas spend more than 12 hours a day eating about 10 kilos of bamboo. They send people to schools to tell children about the importance of saving these animals. There will be more forests for pandas to live in. 1.重点短语和句型 2．掌握略读技巧 掌握略读技巧 一、预习课本 P5455 新单词并背诵，完成下面的汉译英。 1．竹子____________ 2.研究____________ 3．醒的____________ 4.激动____________ 5．疾病____________ 6.成年的____________ 7．遗留____________ 8.图片____________ 9．政府____________ 10.野生的__________ 二、认真预习 2a2e 内容，找出下列短语和句型。 6．林伟和他的熊猫饲养员正在给熊猫宝宝准备牛奶作早餐。 ________________________________________________________________________ 7．当熊猫宝宝看到饲养员的时候，它们兴奋地跑了过去，它们当中的一些甚至踩着它 们的朋友摔倒了。 ________________________________________________________________________ 8．这些幼崽经常死于疾病，而且活的时间不长。 ________________________________________________________________________ 9．成年熊猫一天花 12 个多小时吃大约 10 公斤的竹子。 ________________________________________________________________________ 10．他们把人们请到学校来告诉孩子们拯救这些动物的重要性。 ________________________________________________________________________ 11．将会有更多的森林让熊猫来居住。 ________________________________________________________________________ Step 1 情景导入 (Show some pictures of pandas to the students) Teacher：Do you know what they are？Yes，they are pandas.They are very lovely，many people like them very much.Do you like them ？ There are only over two thousand pandas in China.We should play a part in saving the animals.Do you want to know what the difficulties are？And how do people protect the animals？If you want to know the answers，let's read the article together. 环节说明：以熊猫数量减少以及饲养过程中出现的难题为导入点，抓住学生想探寻原因 的心理，引起学生的好奇心，激发他们的学习欲望。 Step 2 完成教材 2a2c 的任务 1．利用方框中的单词两人一组互相谈论熊猫的情况，完成后请几位学生来展示谈论的 成果。(5 分钟) 2．通读 2b 短文，找出 10，1200 和 2000 所代表的含义，请几位学生展示答案，教师点 拨。(3 分钟) 3．再次阅读短文，写出 2c 中 5 个问题的答案，完成后小组内交流答案。 (5 分钟) 4．再次细心阅读短文，理解每一句话的意思，小组合作解决遇到的疑难问题。(5 分钟) 5．教师点拨短文中出现的重点和难点。(5 分钟) 6．熟读短文，识记并背诵知识要点。(5 分钟) 7．小结训练。(7 分钟) (B)1.She prepared a nice breakfast________ us. A．to B．for C．at D．with (A)2.He couldn't help jumping with ________when he heard the good news. A．excitement B．excited C．exciting D．excite (B)3.In a cold winter，wild animals can die ______ lack of food. A．of B．from C．with D．out (D)4.My kids spend hours ________ on the phone to their friends. A．chat B．to chat C．chating D．chatting (D)5.I know the importance ________ English，so I work hard at it. A．to learn B．of learn C．for learning D．of learning (C)6.There will be more paper for us to ________． A．write in B．write with C．write on D．write to 环节说明：通过本环节的学习不仅锻炼了学生的阅读能力，而且通过小结训练让学生对 重要知识点进行了巩固练习。 Step 3 完成教材 2d2e 的任务 1．认真阅读课文，用短文中的单词或短语来补全句子，集体核对答案，并大声朗读句 子。(5 分钟) 2．熊猫是我们的国宝，我们每一个人都应该去保护它们。把你的建议和方法写出来， 然后小组内交流讨论。(5 分钟) 环节说明：通过 2d 环节让学生对文章有了更深刻的理解；2e 环节使学生知道了要爱护 环境、爱护动物。 Step 4 问题探究 1．prepare 的用法： 1) 我进办公室时，我们的英语老师正在备课。 Our_English_teacher_was_preparing_the_lessons_when_I_came_into_the_office. 2) 她给我们准备了很多礼物。 She_prepared_us_many_presents/gifts. 3) 她这样说是因为她想使爸爸对那个坏消息有所准备。 She_said_so_because_she_wanted_to_prepare_her_father_for_the_bad_news. 4) 他们正准备过河，突然下雨了。 They_were_preparing_to_cross_the_river_when_it_began_to_rain. ① prepare sth.表示“准备……”，后接名词或代词作宾语。 ② prepare sb.sth.表示“给……准备……”，也可转换为 prepare_sth._for_sb.。 ③ prepare sb.for sth.表示“使某人对某事有所准备”。 ④ prepare to_do sth.表示“准备做……”。 2．The old man die ________ a traffic accident. A．of B．from C．to D．on 答案选择 B，“die of ”和“die from”都是“死于……”的意思。若死因存在于人体之上 或之内(主要指疾病、衰老等自身的原因)，一般用介词 of，如：die of illness (heart trouble， cancer，a fever，etc) 死于疾病 (心脏病，癌症，发烧等)。若死因不是存在人体之内或之上， 而是由环境造成的(主要指事故等方面的外部原因)，一般用介词 from，如： die from an earthquake (a traffic accident，a lightning stroke，etc) 死于地震(交通事故，雷击等)。若死因 是环境影响到体内，即两方面共有的原因，则用 of，from 均可，如：die of a drink (a wound， overwork，starvation，hunger and cold，etc) 死于饮酒(受伤，劳累过度，饥饿，饥寒等)。但 是在实际运用中，两者混用的情况较多。 请学生们做前面课时训练部分。 第六课时 Section B (3aSelf Check) 1．重点单词：whale，oil，huge 2．重点句式： Humans catch whales for meat，fat and oil. Jump high out of the water. Why do some of them have to be protected? How can they be protected? 1．重点单词和句型 2．形容词的比较级和最高级 3．关于鲸的书面表达 1．关于鲸的书面表达 一、预习课本 P55 新单词并背诵，完成下面的汉译英。 1．鲸____________ 2.油____________ 3．大的____________ 二、认真预习 3aSelf Check，找出下列句型。 1．人类捕捉鲸是为了得到肉，脂肪和油。 ________________________________________________________________________ 2．高高地跳出水面。 ________________________________________________________________________ 3．为什么他们当中的一些必须要受到保护？ ________________________________________________________________________ 4．他们怎么被保护？ ________________________________________________________________________ Step 1 情景导入 Teacher：Do you know whales？Can you say something about them？Today we will learn something about whales. 环节说明：开门见山直接提出本节课要学的内容，简单明了。 Step 2 完成教材 3a3b 的任务 1．你了解鲸鱼吗？认真阅读 3a 中关于鲸鱼的单词和句子，然后将这些单词和句子填写 到表格中相对应的问题后面，完成后小组内核对答案。(5 分钟) 2．根据 3a 中有关描述鲸鱼的单词和句子以及 3b 中所给出的句型提示来写一篇关于鲸 鱼文章，并且写出他们为什么需要得到保护，以及人们应该怎样做。(6 分钟) 3．完成写作后小组内互相交流纠错，借鉴好词好句，教师批阅点拨。(7 分钟) 参考案例 Whales are very huge，and some kinds have teeth.They live in the seas.They eat small fish and other sea lives.They can do many things.One interesting fact is that they can jump out of the water to enjoy themselves.Another interesting fact is that they can sing，and sing very well.But now some kinds of whales are in danger because there is more and more water pollution and people catch whales for meat，fat and oil.We should play a part in saving the whales because whale parts can be sold to makes things like candles and soap.We should protect whales from disappearing.I think people should learn more about whales and the rules on whale protection.And I think people should stop putting rubbish into the sea. 环节说明：通过这个教学环节锻炼了学生的写作能力并且使学生认识到要保护环境爱护 动物。 Step 3 完成教材 Self Check 的任务 1．朗读表格 1 中的单词，写出这些单词的比较级和最高级，完成后小组内互相核对答 案，并且用这些比较级和最高级来写句子。(5 分钟) 2．将表格 2 中的动词和宾语匹配，集体核对答案，然后让学生在每个动词后面再添加 更多的宾语，完成后小组内互相交流所写内容。(5 分钟) 3．认真阅读 3 中的句子，根据句意圈出正确的单词或者用所给词的正确形式来填空， 完成后请学生展示答案，教师点拨。(5 分钟) 环节说明：通过本环节的学习使学生熟练掌握了比较级和最高级。 Step 4 问题探究 1．Professor White has written some short stories，but he is ________ known for his plays. A．the best B．more C．better D．the most 答案选择 C。此题首先不能选 B 或 D，因为 well known 的比较级和最高级通常是 better known 和 best known，有时也可以是 more well known 和 most well known，但通常不能是 more known 和 most known。至于是选 A 还是 C，这就要看语境。由于 A 和 C 的区别是比 较级和最高级的区别，所以区分这两个答案的关键就是要分清句中涉及的是两者比较，还是 三者或三者以上的比较。细读全句，我们发现句中涉及的只有 stories 和 plays 这两者，所 以应选 C 为最佳。 请学生们做前面课时训练部分。Unit 8 Have you read Treasure Island yet? 第一课时 Section A (1a2d) 1.重点单词：treasure，island，classic，page，hurry，due 2．重点短语：full of，the back of，hurry up 3．重点句式： —Have you read Little Woman yet? —No，I haven't. —What's it about? —It's about four sisters growing up. Have you decided yet which book to write about for English class? I haven't finished reading it yet. Have you at least read the back of the book to see what it's about? You should hurry up. The book report is due in two weeks. 1．重点短语和句型 2．现在完成时态 现在完成时态 一、预习课本 P5758 新单词并背诵，完成下面的汉译英。 1．珠宝____________ 2.岛____________ 3．名著____________ 4.面，张____________ 5．匆忙____________ 6.预定____________ 二、认真预习 1a2d 内容，找出下列短语和句型。 1．充满 2．书的后面部分 3．快点 4．—你读过《小妇人》这本书吗？ —不，我没有。 ________________________________________________________________________ 5．—它是关于什么的？ —它是关于四姐妹成长的。 ________________________________________________________________________ 6．你决定了英语课上写哪本书了吗？ ________________________________________________________________________ 7．我还没有读完它呢！ ________________________________________________________________________ 8．至少你已经读完了书的后面部分并且明白了它的相关内容了吧？ ________________________________________________________________________ 9．你应该快点。 ________________________________________________________________________ 10．读书报告会就定在两周后。 ________________________________________________________________________ Step 1 情景导入 Teacher：Do you like reading books？Which classic have you read？What's it about？Why do you like it？Now please introduce one of your favorite classics to your partners in your group. 环节说明：通过这个环节让学生了解到更多的名著故事，同时还能锻炼学生的口语表达 能力和概括能力。 Step 2 完成教材 1a1c 的任务 1．学生朗读 1a 中的书名，教师纠正错误，然后将你知道的书名标注出来。完成后小组 内互相交流答案。(3 分钟) 2．认真听录音，将 1b 中的表格填写完整，完成后集体核对答案。(3 分钟) 3．再听一遍录音，并跟读对话。(3 分钟) 4．两人一组练习 1c 对话，然后仿照 1c 的形式讨论 1a 中的其他名著，编练新的对话， 完成后要求几组学生表演对话。(5 分钟)。 参考案例 A：Have you read Little Woman yet? B：No，I haven't.Have you? A：Yes，I have already read it. B：What's it like? A：It's fantastic. 5．小结训练。(3 分钟) 1．He has already finished his homework.(改为否定句) He hasn't finished his homework yet． 2．They have found the lost books already.(改为一般疑问句，并作否定回答) Have they found the lost books yet？No，they haven't． 3．Julia has not got home from school yet.(改为肯定句) Julia has already got home from school. 环节说明：听说结合，第一时间向学生传达语言目标，通过结对对话练习和小结训练， 使语言目标得以强化。 Step 3 完成教材 2a2c 的任务 1.谁读了 2a 中所提到的书籍？听录音，圈出读了该书的人的名字，完成后集体核对答 案。(3 分钟) 2．再认真听一遍录音，根据听到的内容，判断句子的正误，正确的在句子后面的方框 中写 T，错误的写 F，完成后请几名学生展示答案，教师点拨。(3 分钟) 3．听第三遍录音，学生跟读整体感知对话。(3 分钟) 4．两人一组利用 2a 和 2b 中的信息，仿照 2c 的形式编练新的对话，邀请几组学生表演 新的对话。(5 分钟) 参考案例 A：Has Tina read Treasure Island? B：Yes，she has.She thinks it's fantastic. A：What's it about? B：It's about ... 5．小结训练。(3 分钟) (B)1.— John，you ________ the computer games for two hours.It's bad for your eyes.Stop， please! — OK，Mum. A．played B．have played C．were playing D．play (D)2.The bottle is ________ water. A．filled of B．full with C．fulled of D．full of (C)3.I ________ the book，and I know what it is ________. A．read；on B．am reading；about C．have read；about D．has read；on 环节说明：通过听、说、读、写训练让学生熟练掌握现在完成时态的用法；同时学生的 口语表达能力在这一环节得到提升。 Step 4 完成教材 2d 的任务 1．学生自读对话，完成下面的问题。(5 分钟) ①判断正误 T 或 F；②根据对话内容填空；③回答问题；④英译汉 ①Amy has finished reading Little Woman.(F) ②Steve has decided to choose Little_Woman for the book report. ③Why did Steve ask Amy to hurry up to read the book? Because_the_book_report_is_due_in_two_weeks ， and_Amy_hasn't_finished_reading_the_book_Treasure_Island. ④Have you at least read the back of the book to see what it's about? 至少你已经看过书的后面部分并且知道了它的相关内容吧？ 2．大声朗读 2d 对话，读熟后与同伴结对练习，分角色表演对话。(3 分钟) 3．邀请三组来表演对话。(5 分钟) 4．小结训练。(3 分钟) (C)1.—Have you read Treasure Island? —________． A．Yes，I do B．No.I have C．Yes，I have D．No，I don't (D)2.Have you finished ________ the composition? A．write B．to write C．wrote D．writing (B)3.—Have you finished your homework? —Yes，I ________it last night. A．finish B．finished C．have finished D．will finish (B)4.He ________finished his homework yet. A．didn't B．haven't C．hasn't D．doesn't have (B)5.________，we have little time left. A．Excuse me B．Hurry up C．Don't worry about D．Take it easy 环节说明：将对话问题化，既能锻炼学生的思维能力又能加深对课文的理解。小结训练 又对对话中的重要句型进行了巩固加深。 Step 5 问题探究 1．现在完成时的构成 ① 我们已经打扫了教室。 We_have_cleaned_the_classroom. ② 我还没有完成我的作业。 I_haven't_finished_my_homework_yet. ③ —他们已经找到了丢失的书吗？ —是的，他们找到了。 Have_they_found_their_lost_books? Yes，they_have. 现在完成时用来表示之前已发生或完成的动作或状态，但它的影响现在还存在，常与 just(刚刚)，already(已经)，never(从来没有)，ever(曾经)，before(以前)，yet(仍然)，once(一 次)，twice(两次)，many times(很多次)，how many times(多少次)，so far(迄今为止)，during the past(last)three years(最近三年来)等连用。 肯定式：主语＋助动词 have /has ＋动词的过去分词＋其它。 当主语是第三人称单数时助动词用 has，其余人称一律用 have。 否定式：主语＋助动词 have /has＋not＋动词的过去分词＋其它。 注：有时 not 可以用 never 代替，表示“从来没有”的意思。 一般疑问式： 助动词 Have /Has ＋主语＋动词的过去分词＋其它？ 肯定回答用“Yes ，主语＋have/has”；否定回答用“No，主语＋haven't/hasn't”。有 时也可以用“No，not yet./No，never./No，not even once.” 如： —Has she ever been abroad ？她曾经出过国吗？ —No，never.不，从来没有。 2．The bag is full of rice.(改为同义句) The bag is ________ ________ rice. 答案为：filled with. be full of ＝be filled with，这两个词组意思相近，但相对而言，be full of 更强调状态，尤其强调“满满的”状态；be filled with 更强调动态的过程。 请学生们做前面课时训练部分。 第二课时 Section A (3a3c) 1.重点单词：ship，tool，gun，sand，else，cannibal，towards，land 2．重点句式： I've brought back many things I can use. Although I have lost everything，I have not lost my life. I go out with my gun almost every day to kill animals and birds for food. A few weeks ago，I found the marks of another man's feet on the sand. Who else is on my island? How long have they been here? He is smart and I have already taught him some English. 1.重点的短语及句型 2．现在完成时态 1．重点的短语及句型 2．现在完成时态 一、预习课本 P59 新单词并背诵，完成下面的汉译英。 1．船____________ 2.工具____________ 3．枪____________ 4.沙____________ 5．别的____________ 6.食人肉者____________ 7．朝____________ 8.陆地____________ 二、认真预习 3a3c，找出下列句型。 1．我带回来了很多我能用的东西。 ________________________________________________________________________ 2．虽然我丢掉了一切，但是我没有丢掉我的性命。 ________________________________________________________________________ 3．我几乎每天都带着枪出去捕杀动物和鸟类作为食物。 ________________________________________________________________________ 4．几周前我在沙滩上发现了另外一个人的足迹。 ________________________________________________________________________ 5. 还有谁在我的岛上？ ________________________________________________________________________ 6．他们在这儿多长时间了？ ________________________________________________________________________ 7．他很聪明，我已经教会他一些英语了。 ________________________________________________________________________ Step 1 情景导入 Teacher：Have you ever read Robinson Crusoe？It is the story of Robinson Crusoe，an Englishman who is shipwrecked in a lonely tropical island.He builds himself a hut，grows his own food，and becomes selfsufficient.After 23 years he meets with a group of cannibals and rescues one of their prisoners，a young native whom he calls Friday.Crusoe and his“man”Friday become close friends，and when they are finally rescued four years later，both return to England. 环节说明：简单的内容介绍能让学生对这部名著有了大概的了解，能够让学生更好的来 理解节选段落，降低了学习难度。同时也激起了学生的阅读兴趣。 Step 2 完成教材 3a3c 的任务 1.快速阅读短文，回答方框中的两个问题，完成后让学生展示答案，教师点拨。(3 分 钟) 2．认真阅读短文，在文中找出 3b 中五个句子所解释的单词，根据短文内容完成填空并 请几名学生展示答案，完成后教师点拨。(5 分钟) 3．再次认真阅读短文，根据文章内容来改正 3b 中句子的错误，完成后请学生展示答案， 教师点拨。(3 分钟) 4．细心阅读短文，理解每一句话的意思，小组合作解决遇到的疑难问题。教师点拨短 文中出现的重点和难点。(5 分钟) 5．熟读短文，识记并背诵知识要点。(5 分钟) 6．小结训练。(3 分钟) (C)1.Where ________ can you find this kind of tree? A．other B．another C．else D．others (D)2.—Have you ________traveled on the beach? —Yes，I have. A．just B．yet C．never D．ever (C)3.—Have you found your books? —Not________． A．ever B．already C．yet D．just (C) 4.We haven't finished our homework ________． A．already B．ever C．yet D．never (C)5.—Have you________ learned English? —Yes，I've ________learned a lot. A．never；ever B．ever；never C．ever；already D．already；ever 环节说明：通过阅读分析文章，学生的阅读分析能力在这一环节得到提升；小结训练又 及时的巩固强化了重要的知识点。 Step 3 问题探究 1．else 的用法 ① 没有别的事了，谢谢你。 There_is_nothing_else.Thank_you! ② 你还能看见别的什么人？ Who_else_can_you_see? ③ 快跑，不然我们就迟到了。 Hurry_up，or_else_we_will_be_late! else 的基本含义是“别的、其他的、另外的”等可以用在所有由 any，every，some， no开头及由body，one，thing，where 结尾的不定代词的后面。else 用作形容词时常常 用来作后置定语，即放在疑问代词 who，what，which，when，where，how 等后面；else 还 常用于固定结构 or else，意为“否则、要不然”。 请学生们做前面课时训练部分。 第三课时 Section A (Grammar Focus4c) 1.重点单词：technology，French 2．重点句式： What do your parents think about our plan? She is interested in science and technology and loves to imagine what the world will be like in 50 years. She can't wait to read them. What books have you already read? 1．现在完成时态的用法 2．所学过的各种时态的区别 各种时态的灵活运用 一、预习课本 P60 新单词并背诵，完成下面的汉译英。 1．科技____________ 2．法语____________ 二、认真预习 Grammar Focus4c 内容，找出下列句型。 1．你父母认为我们的计划怎么样？ ________________________________________________________________________ 2．她对科学和科技感兴趣而且喜欢想象 50 年以后世界是什么样子的。 ________________________________________________________________________ 3．她迫不及待的去读他们。 ________________________________________________________________________ 4.你读过什么书？ ________________________________________________________________________ Step 1 情景导入 Teacher：We have learned Present Perfect Tense.Today we will do some practice to remember it well.We should know the differences between Present Perfect Tense and the tenses we have learnt. 环节说明：开门见山的提出本节课的学习目标——现在完成时态。 Step 2 完成教材 Grammar Focus 的任务 1．学生大声朗读 Grammar Focus 的句子。(2 分钟) 2．小结训练。(2 分钟) 1．你读过《小妇人》吗？ Have_you_read_Little_Women_yet? Yes，I_have./No，I_haven't. 2．Tina 读过《金银岛》吗？ Has_Tina_read_Treasure_Island_yet? Yes，she_has．She thinks it is fantastic. 3．你决定写哪本书了吗？ Have_you_decided_which_book_to_write_about_yet? 4．我已经读完它了，它真的很好。 I've_already_finished_reading_it.It_was_really_good. 环节说明：通过对 Grammar Focus 句型的填空练习能够使学生更好的来理解掌握本单 元的重点语法和句型。 Step 3 完成教材 4a4c 的任务 1．认真阅读 4a 例句，然后用括号内所给的单词来补全对话，完成后小组内互相交流答 案，教师点拨易错点。(3 分钟) 2．两人一组练习 4a 中的对话，并邀请几组学生表演对话。(3 分钟) 3．认真阅读 4b 短文，然后用括号内所给单词的正确形式填空，完成后请学生说出答案， 教师点拨重难点。(3 分钟) 4．仿照 4c 的对话形式和你的搭档交流你们看过的书，看过的电影和听到的歌曲分别是 什么，并把对话内容记录在 4c 表格中。 参考案例 A：What books have you already read? B: I've already read Tom Sawyer and Harry Potter. A：What do you think of them? B: Well，I think Harry Potter was exciting，but Tom Sawyer was a bit boring. 4．小结训练。(3 分钟) (B)1.You ________ that question three times. A．already asked B．have already asked C．already have asked D．asked already (B)2.He ________ his homework and now is listening to music. A．finishes B．has finished C．finish D．is finishing (B)3.—When ________ you ________ Lucy in New York? —I ________ her for two years. A．did；meet；have't seen B．did；meet；haven't seen C．did；meet；don't see D．would；meet；hadn't seen (C)4.He ________ finished his homework yet. A．doesn't B．haven't C．hasn't D．doesn't have (D)5.His father gave him a gift，and he couldn't wait ________ it. A．open B．opens C．opening D．to open 环节说明：通过本环节的对话练习和习题及小结训练，让学生熟练的掌握了现在完成时 态及其与其他时态的区别。 Step 4 问题探究 1．— Dave，we will leave in 10 minutes.Are you ready? — No，I ________ our guide book and towels yet. A．don't pack B．didn't pack C．have packed D．haven't packed 答案选择 D，根据 no 可知还没有准备好，排除 C；根据句意“大卫，我们将十分后出 发。你准备好了吗？没有，我还……我们的旅游指南和毛巾”可知从过去到现在还没准备好， 是对现在的一种影响，用现在完成时态，结合完成时的标志 yet 可知用现在完成时。所以选 择答案 D。 2．I can't wait________ the result of the exam. A．learn B．learning C．to learn D．learned 答案选择 C，句意为“我迫不及待地想了解考试结果”，应该是 can't wait to do sth.表示 “迫不及待做某事”。所以答案为 C。 请学生们做前面课时训练部分。 第四课时 Section B (1a1d) 1.重点单词：pop，band 2．重点句式： The Toms must be popular. Listening to the Toms is a good way to wake up. How does it make them feel? 1.重点单词和句型 2．能够听懂对话录音 能够听懂对话录音 一、预习课本 P61 新单词并背诵，完成下面的汉译英。 1．流行音乐__________ 2.乐队__________ 二、认真预习 1a1d，找出下列句型。 1．The Toms 一定是受欢迎的。 ________________________________________________________________________ 2．听 The Toms 是一个清醒的好方法。 ________________________________________________________________________ 3．它让他们感觉怎么样？ ________________________________________________________________________ Step 1 情景导入 ( Show a picture of a singer to the students) Teacher：Hello，everyone.Do you know the singer？Do you know why I show her to you？Let me tell you.She is my favorite singer.Her name is Peng Liyuan.I like her very much，because her songs sound very beautiful.Her voice is very sweet.Who is your favorite singer？And why do you like him/her？Please tell your partners about your favorite singer in your group. 环节说明：教师对自己最喜欢的歌手进行介绍不仅能引起学生的表达欲望而且还为学生 们互相介绍自己最喜欢的歌手提供了参考，同时又完成了 1a 的教学任务。 Step 2 完成教材 1a1d 的任务 1．请几名学生向全班同学介绍自己最喜欢的歌手及原因。(3 分钟) 2．认真听 Alex 和 Dave 的对话录音，在 Alex 的观点前面写 A，在 Dave 的观点前写 D， 完成后集体核对答案。(2 分钟) 3．再认真听一遍录音，完成 1c 的表格，请学生展示答案，教师点拨。(3 分钟) 4．认真听第三遍录音，整体感知对话内容。(4 分钟) 5．小组内互相询问对方喜欢的音乐的种类和原因以及这种音乐给他们的感受。(5 分钟) 参考案例 A：What kind of music do you like to listen to? B：I like ... A：Why do you like to listen to it? B：Because... A：How does it make you feel? B：It makes me feel... 6．小结训练。(3 分钟) (C)1.The book ______ be Jim's because his name is on it. A．can B．may C．must D．need (C)2.I think ________ aloud is a good way to improve your speaking skill. A．read B reads C．reading D．readed (C)3.—Would you like ________ music? —Yes，I would love to. A．listen to B．to listen C．to listen to D．listening to (B)4.—Have you finished making the cake? —Yes，I ________it last night. A．finish B．finished C．have finished D．will finish (C)5.He ________seen the film yet. A．didn't B．haven't C．hasn't D．doesn't have 环节说明：通过这个环节提高了学生的听力水平并且学到了听力技巧。 Step 3 问题探究 1．—Where is Tom？We can't find him anywhere. — Perhaps he ________ home. A．has come B．is going C．went D．was going 答案选择 A。句意：汤姆在哪里？我们到处都找不到他。他可能已经回家了。“我们到 处都找不到他”就是“他可能回家了”的后果和影响，因此用现在完成时。故选 A。 2．—Difficulties always go with me! —Cheer up! If God closes a door in front of you，there ________ be a window opened for you. A．would B．must D．could D．can 答案选择 B。must 在表示推测时，意为“一定”，表示可能性很大的推测。根据句意 “——困难总是伴随我的左右。——振作起来吧！如果上帝在你面前关上一扇门的话，肯定 有一扇窗户为你开着。”可以判断用 must。所以选择答案 B。 请学生们做前面课时训练部分。 第五课时 Section B (2a2e) 1．重点单词：forever，abroad，actually，fan，southern，modern，success，belong，beauty， million，record 2．重点词组：fight over，the home of，belong to，the beauty of nature 3．重点句式： When Sarah was a teenager，she used to fight over almost everything with her family. She heard a song full of feelings about returning home on the radio. She came to realize how much she actually missed all of them. Ever since then，she has been a fan of American country music. However，country music brings us back to the “good old days” when people were kind to each other and trusted one another. Sarah hasn't been to Nashville yet，but it is her dream to go there one day. There are also always a lot of great country music concerts with famous musicians and singers，like Garth Brooks. Garth is one of the most successful musicians in American history. 1.重点短语和句型 2．现在完成时态 3．学习写短文概述 1．现在完成时态 2．学习写短文概述 一、预习课本 P62 新单词并背诵，完成下面的汉译英。 1．永远____________ 2.在国外____________ 3．真实的____________ 4.狂热爱好者________ 5．南方的____________ 6.现代的____________ 7．成功(n.)__________ 8.属于____________ 9．美丽____________ 10.一百万____________ 11．唱片____________ 二、认真预习 2a2e 内容，找出下列短语和句型。 1．吵架 2．……的发源地 3．属于 4．大自然的美丽 5．当 Sarah 还是一个青少年的时候，她几乎因为每一件事都和家人吵架。 ________________________________________________________________________ 6．她在收音机上听到一个充满了归家情感的歌曲。 ________________________________________________________________________ 7．她开始意识到事实上她是多么的想念所有的人。 ________________________________________________________________________ 8．自从那时起她就成了美国乡村音乐的狂热爱好者。 ________________________________________________________________________ 9．然而乡村音乐把我们带回到那个互相善待对方互相信任对方的“美好旧时代”。 ________________________________________________________________________ 10．Sarah 还没有去过纳什维尔，但是将来某一天去那里是她的梦想。 ________________________________________________________________________ 11．那里也有很多像 Garth Brooks 一样著名的音乐家和歌手开办的乡村音乐会。 ________________________________________________________________________ 12．Garth 是美国历史上最成功的音乐家之一。 ________________________________________________________________________ Step 1 情景导入 Teacher：Do you like music？What kind of music do you like？And why do you like it？ Please say something to your partner. OK ，stop here.Today we are going to learn a passage about a girl called Sarah.She likes country music very much，because a country music changed her life forever.Do you know what the country music is and how it changed her life？Let's learn the passage together. 环节说明：由学生喜欢的音乐入手，引出 Sarah 对美国乡村音乐的喜爱，通过乡村音乐 改变了她的生活这件事，激起了学生的好奇心，提高了学生的学习兴趣，为本课的学习做好 铺垫。 Step 2 完成教材 2a2c 的任务 1．小组内互相交流 2a 中的问题，然后请几位学生向全班同学介绍自己最喜欢的歌手或 与之相关的情况。(5 分钟) 2．快速阅读 2b 短文，了解短文大意，完成关于乡村音乐的情况介绍，完成后请学生 展示答案，教师点拨。(3 分钟) 3．认真阅读短文并且画出主要的句子，回答 2c 中的问题，完成后请学生说出答案，教 师点拨答案。 (5 分钟) 4．再次细心阅读短文，理解每一句话的意思，小组合作解决遇到的疑难问题。(5 分钟) 5．教师点拨短文中出现的重点和难点。(5 分钟) 6．熟读短文，识记并背诵知识要点。(5 分钟) 7．小结训练。(5 分钟) (C)1.Who does this Tshirt belong ________？ A．in B．on C．to D．of (B)2.Jim's name is on the book，so it must belong to ________. A．his B．him C．he D．himself (A)3.Although he hasn't ________ to America，he knows a lot about it. A．been B．gone C．went D．be (D)4.They keep pouring out ________trucks every year. A．two millions B．million of C．two millions of D．millions of (C)5.The old man is very kind ________ us，so we all respect him. A．in B．on C．to D．of 环节说明：通过本环节的学习不仅锻炼了学生的阅读能力，而且通过小结训练让学生对 重要知识点进行了巩固练习。 Step 3 完成教材 2d2e 的任务 1．利用 2c 中记下的笔记来为本短文写一个简短的概述，词数不少于 100 词，完成后小 组内互相交流，然后邀请几位学生读出自己的概述，教师点拨。(5 分钟) 2．合上课本，向你的搭档叙述关于乡村音乐的事实，关于乡村音乐你还知道些什么呢？ 把你想了解的问题列一个清单写出来，和搭档交流。(5 分钟) 环节说明：通过这个环节的训练让学生掌握了文章概述的写法，同时使学生更好的理解 文章。 Step 4 问题探究 1．—I'd like you to tell me something about Shen Nongjia. —I'm sorry，but neither Jack nor I ________ there. A．have been B．had been C．have gone D．has gone 答案选择 A，答语意为“对不起，但是杰克和我都没去过那儿。”可知要使用现在完成 时。have/has been to＋地点，意为“去过某地”，现在已经回来了；have/has gone to＋地点， 意为“去了某地或在去某地的路上”；答句是 neither ...nor...引导的两个并列主语，谓语动词 和离它最近的主语保持一致，故选 A。 2．Look！The red bike must belong to your ________. A．father's B．him C．father D．sister's 答案是 C，本句子是考查动词短语 belong to 的用法。belong to 的意思是“属于”，belong to 的后面用名词或者代词作宾语，不能用名词所有格或者物主代词作宾语。所以选择 C。 请学生们做前面课时训练部分。 第六课时 Section B (3aSelf Check) 1．重点词组：introduce，line 2．重点句式： Have you introduced this singer to others? Do you think it looks good on me? At the end of the day，the bus brought us back to our school. 1．单词及短语 2．现在完成时态 3．介绍喜欢的歌手或作家 1．现在完成时态 2．介绍喜欢的歌手或作家 一、预习课本 P6364 新单词并背诵，完成下面的汉译英。 1．介绍____________ 2.行____________ 二、认真预习 3aSelf Check 内容，找出下列句型。 1．你把这位歌手介绍给其他人了吗？ ________________________________________________________________________ 2．你认为我穿起来好看吗？ ________________________________________________________________________ 3．在傍晚的时候，汽车把我们带回了学校。 ________________________________________________________________________ Step 1 情景导入 Teacher：Hello，everyone.Today we are going to learn Unit 8，from Section B 3a to Self Check.In this lesson we will review Present Perfect Tense and learn how to write a composition about your favorite singer or writer. 环节说明：直接明确本节课的学习目标，简单明了。 Step 2 完成教材 3a3 的任务 1．首先考虑一下，确定你最了解的一名歌手或者是作家，然后列出一个关于他/她的清 单，清单内容可以参考 3a 项目。(5 分钟) 2．综合 3a 的各个方面的内容，写一篇关于这名歌手或作家的短文，可以参考 3b 的句 型或短语，请学生到黑板上板书文章，完成后小组内互相交流所写短文，借鉴好词好段，教 师点拨黑板上板书的作文。(10 分钟) 参考案例 My favorite star is a girl called Li Yuchun，who is well received by so many people coming from all over the world. She is famous as the winner of the 2005 Super Girl.After the contest，Li became a fulltime singer and wellknown in China.When I heard her songs for the first time，I became interested in them.From then on，I often listen to her songs.She has many songs such as Say Goodbye，Hello Baby，My Love，Why Me and so on.Most of her songs make me full of energy and confidence.She has sold millions of CDs.I have bought many of her CDs and I often sing her songs.She is still very popular with Chinese people. 环节说明：通过这个教学环节让学生完成了本单元的写作练习，同时锻炼了学生的写作 能力。 Step 3 完成教材 Self Check 的任务 1. 认真阅读 1 中的句子然后用左侧方框中的单词补全句子，集体核对答案后大声朗读 句子。(4 分钟) 2．阅读 2 中的句子，用括号中所给单词的正确形式填空，邀请几位学生到黑板上写出 答案，教师点评。(5 分钟) 3．把你这周已经做了的事情和没有做的事情列个清单，然后询问小组内其他两名学生 这一周事情的完成情况，并且完成 3 的表格。 环节说明：通过这个环节让学生熟练掌握了现在完成时态。 Step 4 问题探究 1．Allow me to introduce a friend ________you. A．on B．to C．for D．with 答案选择 B，introduce sb.to sb.意为“把某人介绍给某人”。 请学生们做前面课时训练部分。 Unit 9 Have you ever been to a museum? 第一课时 Section A (1a2d) 1.重点单词：amusement 2．重点短语：have/has been to，have/has gone to 3．重点句式： Have you ever been to a museum? Let's go somewhere different today. Frank's friend has never been to the water park. Have you ever been there? It's a great way to spend a Saturday afternoon. I learned about the inventions that led to color movies，too. We put up a tent and cooked outside. I've never been camping. 1．重点短语和句型 2．have has been to 和 have has gone to 的用法 3．现在完成时态 1.have has been to 和 have has gone to 的用法 2．现在完成时态 一、 预习课本 P6566 新单词并背诵，完成下面的汉译英。 3．你曾经去过博物馆吗？ ________________________________________________________________________ 4．今天让我们去一些不同的地方吧。 ________________________________________________________________________ 5．Frank 的朋友从来没有去过水上公园。 ________________________________________________________________________ 6．你去过那里吗？ ________________________________________________________________________ 7．这是一个度过周六下午的好方法。 ________________________________________________________________________ 8．我了解到了有关那个导致彩色电影出现的发明。 ________________________________________________________________________ 9．我们支起了一个帐篷并且野炊。 ________________________________________________________________________ 10．我从来没有野营过。 ________________________________________________________________________ Step 1 情景导入 (Show the pictures of amusement parks，water parks，space museums，zoos art museums， and history museums) Teacher：What can you see in the picture? (Look at the pictures and brainstorm the words they can think of，such as space museum， amusement park，water park，zoo，art museum and history museum.) T：Have you ever been to an amusement park? Ss：No. T：Now，we'll learn Unit 9—Have you ever been to a museum? 环节说明：通过多媒体图画的谈论问答，并因势引导，采用师生之间的交流方式，自然 导入“Have you ever been to a museum？”(“你曾经去过某地吗？”)这一话题。 Step 2 完成教材 1a1c 的任务 学生朗读 1a 中的单词或短语，教师纠正错误，然后两人一组互相提问。(3 分钟) 2．你想要去参观哪些地方呢？按照你最愿意到最不愿意的顺序把这些地方标号，完成 后小组内互相交流答案。(3 分钟) 3．认真听录音，标出 Claudia 和 Sarah 曾经去过的地方。将 1b 中的表格填写完整，完 成后集体核对答案。(3 分钟) 4．再听一遍录音，并跟读对话。(3 分钟) 5．两人一组练习 1c 对话，然后仿照 1c 的形式利用 1b 中的地方，编练新的对话，完成 后要求几组学生表演对话。(5 分钟)。 参考案例 A：Let's go somewhere different today. B：OK.Where do you want to go? A：Have you ever been to the space museum? B：No，I haven't.How about you? A：... 6．小结训练。(3 分钟) (C)1.—How clean the window is! —Yes，I ________ it three times! A．clean B．cleaned C．have cleaned D．am cleaned (A)2.—Where is Li Lei? —He ________ Shanghai. A．has gone to B．has been to C．went to D．goes to (B)3.—Do you know Tom? —Yes，he and I ________ friends since we met in Wuhan last year. A．have made B．have been C．were D．become (C)4.Have you ever ________ to a foreigner? A．speak B．spoke C．spoken D．to speak (C)5.If you don't go to the park，________． A．so do I B．neither do I C．neither will I D．so will I 环节说明：听说结合，第一时间向学生传达语言目标，通过结对对话练习和小结训练， 使语言目标得以强化。 Step 3 完成教材 2a2c 的任务 1.认真观察 2a 的城镇地图，听录音，圈出听到的地方，再集体核对答案。(3 分钟) 2．再认真听一遍录音，根据听到的内容，判断句子的正误，正确的在句子后面的方框 中圈 T，错误的圈 F，完成后请几名学生展示答案，教师点拨。(3 分钟) 3．听第三遍录音，学生跟读，整体感知对话。(3 分钟) 4．两人一组利用 2a 地图中的地方，仿照 2c 的形式，编练新的对话，邀请几组学生表 演新的对话。(5 分钟) 参考案例 A：Have you ever been to the space museum? B：Yes，I have.How about you? A：No，I haven't. B：Oh，It's fantastic.Let's go tomorrow. A：OK.How are we going to get there? B：We can take the subway. 5．小结训练。(3 分钟) (A)1.—________ you ________ to the capital? —No，I ________．I ________ there early next month. A．Have；been; haven't；am going B．Had；been；hadn't；am going C．Have；gone；haven't；was going D．Did；go；didn't；was going (B)2.Bruce ________ how to use a computer.He ________ a computer of his own.He ________ it two days ago. A．learns；will get；bought B．is learning；has got；bought C．learned；has got；bought D．is learning；got；has bought (B)3.— ________ you ________ England? —Yes，it ________ a beautiful country. A．Will；gone to；was B．Have；been to；is C．had；been to；is D．Have；gone to；is (C)4.Mary ________ to see the films because she ________ it twice. A．won't go；saw B．won't go；will see C．won't go；has seen D．didn't go；sees 环节说明：通过听、说读、写学习训练让学生熟练掌握现在完成时态；同时学生的口语 表达能力在这一环节得到提升。 Step 4 完成教材 2d 的任务 1．学生自读对话，完成下面的问题。(5 分钟) ①判断正误(T 或 F)；②根据对话内容填空；③回答问题；④英译汉 ①Jill went to the mountains and camped there.(T) ②Jill went to the film museum and learned about the inventions that led_to color movies. ③Has Anna ever been camping? No，she_has_never_been_camping. ④It's a great way to spend a Saturday afternoon. 这真是一个度过周六下午的好方法。 2．大声朗读 2d 对话，读熟后与同伴结对练习，分角色表演对话。(3 分钟) 3．邀请三组学生来表演对话。(5 分钟) 4．小结训练。(3 分钟) (A)1.She ________ as an animal keeper since 2008. A．has worked B．works C．would work D．worked (B)2.Mr.Black ________ China since the summer of 1998. A．has been to B．has been in C．has come to D．came to (B)3.— Would you like some more food? —Thank you.I ________ enough. A．will have B．have had C．have D．had 环节说明：将对话问题化，既能锻炼学生的思维能力又能加深对课文的理解。小结训练 又对对话中的重要句型进行了巩固加深。 Step 5 问题探究 1．— Is James at home? — No，he ________ Ya'an to be a volunteer. A．has gone to B．has been to C．is going to D．was going to 答案选择 A，由于句意为“—詹姆斯在家吗？—他做志愿者去了雅安。”，而 is going to 表将来，故排除掉 C 项。又因 has been to 意为“去过某地”，指人在说话现场；has gone to 意为“去了某地”，指人不在说话现场。根据语境，A 项正确。 2．— Hello，may I speak to Miss Wang? — Sorry，she isn't in.She ________ the office. A．has been to B．has gone to C．has been away D．was away 答案选择 B，句意：——喂，请王小姐接电话好吗？ ——对不起，她不在。她去办公室了。 have/ has been to “曾经去过某地”，人现在不 在那儿；have/ has gone to “到某地去了”，人现在不在这儿；have/ has been away “离开”， 是延续性动作的动词。根据题意选 B。 3．Eating too much sugar can lead ________ health problem. A．to B．for C．at D．with 答案选择 A，lead to 意为“导致、带来、通往”，其中 to 为介词。Lead 经常用到的句 型还有：lead sb to (sth) 使得出(观点)；引导(某人)。如： What led you to this conclusion？你是如何得出这个结论的？ 请学生们做前面课时训练部分。 第二课时 Section A (3a3c) 1.重点单词：unbelievable，progress，rapid，unusual，toilet，encourage，social，peaceful， performance，perfect，itself，collect 2．重点句式： They have information about different computers and who invented them. It's unbelievable that technology has progressed in such a rapid way. I wonder how much more computers will be able to do in the future. The museum teaches people about the history and development of toilets. It also encourages governments and social groups to think about ways to improve toilets in the future. The tea art performances show how to make a perfect cup of tea. Watching the tea preparation is just as enjoyable as drinking the tea itself. 1.重点的短语及句型 2．现在完成时态 1．重点的短语及句型 2．现在完成时态 一、预习课本 P67 新单词并背诵，完成下面的汉译英。 1．进步____________ 2.难以置信的________ 3．快速的____________ 4.特别的____________ 5．坐便器____________ 6.鼓励____________ 7．社会的____________ 8.和平的____________ 9．表演____________ 10.完美的__________ 11．它自己____________ 11.收集____________ 二、认真预习 3a3c 内容，找出下列句型。 1．它们有很多关于不同的电脑以及谁发明的电脑的信息。 ________________________________________________________________________ 2．科技以如此快速的方式向前进步是难以置信的。 ________________________________________________________________________ 3．我想知道在将来电脑还会多做多少事。 ________________________________________________________________________ 4．这个博物馆教给人们关于马桶的历史和发展的知识。 ________________________________________________________________________ 5．它也将鼓励政府和社会团体想出改善未来马桶的方法。 ________________________________________________________________________ 6．茶艺表演展示了怎么泡制一杯完美的茶。 ________________________________________________________________________ 7．观看制茶准备就像喝茶本身一样有乐趣。 ________________________________________________________________________ Step 1 情景导入 Teacher：Do you want to know more about the computers？Do you want to know about the history and the development of toilets？Do you want to watch the tea art performances？If your answers are yes，please let's learn together today and learn more about them. 环节说明：以三个短文的简单的内容概括作为导入，既能让学生对这三个文段有了大概 的了解，又能够让学生更好地来理解节选段落，降低了学习难度，同时也能激起学生的阅读 兴趣。 Step 2 完成教材 3a3c 的任务 1．快速阅读短文，回答方框中的两个问题，完成后让学生展示答案，教师点拨。(3 分 钟) 2．认真阅读短文，在文中找出 3b 中三个问题的答案，请几名学生展示答案，教师点拨。 (5 分钟) 3．再次认真阅读短文，从 3c 方框中选择出与文中画线单词意思一样的单词，完成后请 学生展示答案，教师点拨。(3 分钟) 4．细心阅读短文，理解每一句话的意思，小组合作解决遇到的疑难问题。教师点拨短 文中出现的重点和难点。(5 分钟) 5．熟读短文，识记背诵知识要点。(5 分钟) 6．小结训练。(3 分钟) (B)1.The man ________ many things. A．invent B．invented C．inventing D．invention (C)2.—I wonder ________ you exercise. —Every day. A．How long B．How far C．How often D．How soon (D)3.She encouraged him ________ to her. A．talk B．talks C．talking D．to talk (B)4.Could you tell me when ________ tomorrow? A．start B．to start C．starting D．starts (A)5.—I'm sorry to keep you waiting. —Oh，not at all.I just ________ here. A．have been B．had been C．was D．am 环节说明：通过阅读分析文章，学生的阅读分析能力在这一环节得到提升；小结训练又 及时的巩固强化了重要的知识点。 Step 3 问题探究 1．My mother often encourages me ________English as much as possible. A．speak B．speaks C．speaking D．to speak 答案选择 D，鼓励某人做某事 encourage sb.to do sth. 请学生们做前面课时训练部分。 第三课时 Section A (Grammar Focus4c) 1.重点单词：German，theme，province 2．重点句式： — I've been to the art museum many times. — Me ， too.And I've also visited the nature museum. —I've never been to a water park.—Me neither. I've already been there a couple of times，but I'm happy to go again. There are some special German paintings there right now. Disneyland is an amusement park with a special theme. Have you ever been to another province in China? 1．现在完成时态的用法 2．所学过的各种时态的区别 各种时态的灵活运用 一、预习课本 P68 新单词并背诵，完成下面的汉译英。 1．德国的____________ 2．主题____________ 3．省份________ 二、认真预习 Grammar Focus4c 找出下列句型。 1．—我去过艺术博物馆很多次。 —我也是。而且我还参观了自然博物馆。 ________________________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________________________ 2．—我从来没有去过水上公园。 —我也没有去过。 ________________________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________________________ 3．我已经去过那里几次了，但是我还是很高兴再次去那里。 ________________________________________________________________________ 4．那里现在有一些特殊的德国油画。 ________________________________________________________________________ 5．迪斯尼乐园是一个有着特殊主题的娱乐公园。 ________________________________________________________________________ 6．你曾经去过中国的其他省份吗？ ________________________________________________________________________ Step 1 情景导入 Teacher ： Have you ever seen Mickey Mouse ， Donald Duck and other famous Disney characters in cartoons before ？ Have you ever been to Disneyland ？ Today we will learn something about it. 环节说明：由迪斯尼卡通形象，引出了本节课的学习内容，引起学生的学习兴趣。 Step 2 完成教材 Grammar Focus 的任务 1．学生大声朗读 Grammar Focus 的句子。(2 分钟) 2．小结训练。(2 分钟) 1．—你曾经去过科学博物馆吗？ Have_you_ever_been_to_a_science_museum? —不，我从来没有去过科学博物馆。 No，I've_never_been_to_a_science_museum. 2．—你曾经参观过太空博物馆吗？ Have_you_ever_visited_the_space_museum? —是的，我去过。我去年去的那里。 Yes，I_have.I_went_there_last_year. 3．—我去过艺术博物馆很多次。 I_have_been_to_the_art_museum_many_times. —我也去过，而且我也参观了自然博物馆。 Me，too.And_I've_also_visited_the_nature_museum. 4．—我从来没有去过自然博物馆。 I've_never_been_to_the_nature_museum. —我也没有去过。 Me_neither. 环节说明：通过对 Grammar Focus 句型的填空练习能够使学生更好的理解掌握本单元 的重点语法和句型。 Step 3 完成教材 4a4c 的任务 1．认真阅读 4a 对话，然后用括号内所给的单词来补全对话，完成后小组内互相交流答 案，教师点拨易错点。(3 分钟) 2．两人一组练习 4a 中的对话，并邀请几组学生表演对话。(3 分钟) 3．认真阅读 4b 短文，然后用括号内所给单词的正确形式填空，完成后请学生说出答案， 教师点拨重难点。(3 分钟) 4．以对话的形式和你的搭档互相询问对方问题并把对话内容记录在 4c 表格中。 参考案例 A: Have you ever been to another province in China? B: Yes，I have.I have been to many provinces in China.What about you? A：No，I haven't.Have you ever... B：... 5 .小结训练。(2 分钟) 1．Mary lost(lose) her pen.Have you seen (see) it here and there? 2．Have you found (find) your watch yet? 3．—Are you thirsty? —NO，I have just had (have) some orange. 4．We havealready had (return) the book. 5．Have they built (build) a new school in the village? 环节说明：通过本环节的对话练习和习题及小结训练让学生熟练的掌握了现在完成时态 及其与其他时态的区别。 Step 4 问题探究 1．两三周 a_couple_of_weeks a couple of 相当于 a_few 或 a small number of，翻译成汉语就是“两个，几个，两三个”， 是不确定的说法。 请学生们做前面课时训练部分。 第四课时 Section B (1a1d) 1.复习学过的单词和短语 2．熟练掌握现在完成时态 1.重点单词和句型 2．熟练掌握现在完成时态 3．能够听懂对话录音 能够听懂对话录音 1．复习前三个课时学过的单词和短语 2．复习现在完成时态的用法 Step 1 情景导入 Teacher：Have you ever been to London? Student 1：No，I haven't. Teacher：Have you ever been to Beijing? Student 2：Yes，I have. Teacher：OK，now please ask and answer like this in pairs. 环节说明：通过师生问答和学生互答，让学生复习了现在完成时态，同时也练习了口语。 Step 2 完成教材 1a1d 的任务 1．学生朗读表示地名的词组，教师纠正错误，然后用 1a 中的地名来练习对话，并且请 几组学生来表演对话。(5 分钟) 参考案例 A：Have you been to the Great Wall? B：Yes，I have.Have you ever been there? A：No，I have never been there before. 2．认真听一名中学生采访一名外籍学生的对话录音，标注出你所听到的问题，完成后 集体核对答案。(3 分钟) 3．再认真听一遍录音，完成 1c 的表格，请学生展示答案，教师点拨。(3 分钟) 4．认真听第三遍录音，整体感知对话内容。(4 分钟) 5．小组内互相询问对方去过的地方或者是做过的事情。(5 分钟) 参考案例 A：Have you visited the old people in People's Home? B：No，I haven't.How about you? A：I visited them last year. B：Sounds great.I think I am going to visit it next month. 6．小结训练。(3 分钟) 1．I don't know this woman.I have_never_met (meet，never)her. 2．—Let's go to the cinema. —No，I have_already_seen (see，already) the film. 3．We haven't_finished (finish，not) our homework yet.Will you wait a minute? 4．John hasn't_come (come，not) yet.He will be back in a minute. 5．Mr.Green often goes to America.In fact，he has_been (be) there ten times. 6．—Where's John? —He has just gone (go) to the teachers' office. 7．She has_studied (study) English since she was ten.She began (begin) to study English when she was ten. 8．Jim isn't here.He ahs_gone (go) to the library.He went (go) there an hour ago. 9．He has_never_traveled (travel，never) on a train in his life. 环节说明：通过这个环节提高了学生的听力水平并且学到了听力技巧，小结训练能让学 生灵活运用现在完成时态。 Step 3 问题探究 1．— My car ________．Could you please give me a ride tomorrow? —I'm sorry I can't.I'm________ London tomorrow morning. A．is new，leaving B．has broken down，leaving for C．broke，leaving for D．is expensive，leaving 答案选择 B，由答语 tomorrow morning 知道是要用进行时表示将来时，leave for 到某地 去，故排除 A，D，break down 出故障，has broken down 相当于 is broken，所以选择答案 B。 第五课时 Section B (2a2e) 1．重点单词：thousand，safe，simply，fear，whether，Indian，Japanese，fox，daytime， equator，whenever，spring 2．重点词组：thousands of，on the one hand...on the other hand...，three quarters，an English speaking country，take a holiday，during the daytime，all year round 3．重点句式： More than three quarters of the population are Chinese. It's also a good place to practice your English. You won't have any problem getting rice，noodles or dumplings. It might seem strange to go to a zoo when it's dark. At the Night Safari，you can watch these animals in a more natural environment than in a normal zoo. The temperature is almost the same all year round. It's not too far from China. 1.重点短语和句型 2．阅读策略，训练和提高学生的阅读理解能力 1．重点短语和句型 2．阅读策略，训练和提高学生的阅读理解能力 一、预习课本 P6970 新单词并背诵，完成下面的汉译英。 1．千____________ 2.安全的____________ 3．仅仅____________ 4.害怕____________ 5．还是____________ 6.印度的____________ 7．日本的____________ 8.狐狸____________ 9．白天____________ 10.赤道____________ 11．春天____________ 12.无论何时__________ 二、认真预习 2a2e 内容，找出下列短语和句型。 8．超过四分之三的人是华人。 ________________________________________________________________________ 9．它也是一个练习英语的好地方。 ________________________________________________________________________ 10．你将毫不费力的找到米饭、面条或饺子。 ________________________________________________________________________ 11．天黑时去动物园似乎很奇怪。 ________________________________________________________________________ 12．在夜间野生动物园，你能在一种比普通动物园更自然的环境里欣赏动物。 ________________________________________________________________________ 13．温度几乎常年是一样的。 ________________________________________________________________________ 14．它离中国也不是太远。 ________________________________________________________________________ Step 1 情景导入 ( Show some pictures of the countries to the students) Teacher：Let's guess what countries they are? The students say out the names of the countries. (Then show the students pictures about Singapore and ask the students.) Teacher：Which country is it？What is it also called？Have you ever been there before？ OK，today we'll read an article about Singapore.We'll learn more about Singapore. 环节说明：通过这个环节既复习了国家的名字，同时又提出问题，引出了本节课要学的 内容。 Step 2 完成教材 2a2c 的任务 1．小组内互相交流关于新加坡的风土人情，然后互相说说想了解关于新加坡哪一方面 的知识。(5 分钟) 2．快速阅读 2b 短文，了解短文大意，然后找到文章介绍的参观新加坡的理由。(3 分 钟) 3．认真阅读短文，用短文中的信息来更正 2c 中四个句子的错误，完成后请学生说出答 案，教师点拨答案。 (5 分钟) 4．再次细心阅读短文，理解每一句话的意思，小组合作解决遇到的疑难问题。(5 分钟) 5．教师点拨短文中出现的重点和难点。(5 分钟) 6．熟读短文，识记并背诵知识要点。(5 分钟) 7．小结训练。(5 分钟) (C)1.—What time should I come here tomorrow? —Come________ you like. A．however B．whatever C．whenever D．whoever (A)2.The population of Shanghai ________larger than that of Hong Kong. A．is B．are C. Be D．have (C)3.On ________hand，she is a daughter.On ________hand she is a mother. A．one；other B．the one；another C．the one；the other D．one；another (A)4.The population of China ________ large.Four fifths of the population ________ farmers. A．is；are B．are；is C．are；are D．is；be (C)5.It's the best time ________ Beijing in autumn，I think. A．for visit B．to visiting C．to visit D．for visiting (C)6.There are few new words in the article，so you won't have any problem ________it. A．understand B．to understand C．understanding D．understood (A)7.We planted ________ trees last year. A．hundreds of B．hundred of C．five hundreds D．five hundred of 环节说明：通过本环节的学习不仅锻炼了学生的阅读能力，而且通过小结训练让学生对 重要知识点进行了巩固练习。 Step 3 完成教材 2d2e 的任务 1．认真阅读 2b 短文，用短文中的信息来补全 2d 中的关于新加坡的对话，完成后集体 核对答案。(5 分钟) 2．两人一组练习对话，并邀请几组学生表演对话。(5 分钟) 3．根据所学短文内容，把你记住的有关新加坡的描述写下来，完成后小组内互相交流， 比一比谁写得多写得全。(5 分钟) 环节说明：通过这个环节的学习让学生对短文有了更深刻地理解；同时也锻炼了学生的 口语表达能力和书面表达能力。 Step 4 问题探究 1. ________ of the warm water ________ already been used up. A．Twothird；has B．Twothird；have C．Twothirds；has D．Twothirds；have 答案选择 C，本题考查分数的表达法和主谓一致。分数的表示方法为：分子用基数词， 分母用序数词；分子大于“一”时，分母用复数，因此排除 A 和 B 两项。本句话的主语为 water 是不可数名词，谓语动词应该为单数形式即 has，所以答案选择 C。 2．Thirty percent of the population ______ in the cities. A．live B．lives C．living D．to live 答案选择 A，population 意为“人口数”，它单独做主语时，谓语动词用第三人称单数 形式；当分数和百分数修饰 population 做主语时，谓语动词常用复数形式。所以答案选择 A。 3．—“Food Safety” has become one of the hottest topics recently. —Yeah，it receives ________ Internet hits(点击) a day. A．thousands B．thousand of C．thousands of D．ten thousands 答案选择 C，thousand 意为“千”，当 thousand 和具体数字连用的时候不用变成复数； 和 of 连用的时候要用复数，构成词组 thousands of，意为“数以千计的”。 4．We had some problems ________ to the top of the mountain. A．get B．getting C．got D．to get 答案选择 B，have problems (in) doing sth.表示“做某事很费劲”。介词 in 指在某一方面， 在句中可以省略，后面接 doing sth.。problem 是可数名词，在该句子中意为“困难，麻烦”。 这里的 problem 可以用 difficulty 或 trouble 代替，但这两词在该句子中用做不可数名词。 请学生们做前面课时训练部分。 第六课时 Section B (3aSelf Check) 1.复习学过的单词、短语及重要句型 2．熟练掌握现在完成时态 1.重点单词和句型 2．熟练掌握现在完成时态 灵活运用现在完成时态 1．复习本单元学过的单词和短语及重要句型 2．复习现在完成时态的用法 Step 1 情景导入 Teacher：We learnt many new words and phrases last time，now let's have a dictation.Please take out a piece of paper and write down your names.OK，first，words： ①thousand ②safe ③simply ④fear... Now，let's write some phrases：① thousands of ② on the one hand...on the other hand... ③ three quarters... 环节说明：通过听写了解了学生对知识的掌握情况，能够让学生及时查漏补缺。 Step 2 完成教材 3a3 的任务 1．根据你的家乡或你参观过的一个地方的实际情况列出一个清单，清单内容可以参考 3a 条目，然后把各项内容填写完整，完成后小组内互相交流。(5 分钟) 2．综合 3a 的各个方面的内容，写一篇关于你的家乡或你参观过的一个地方的短文，可 以参考 3b 的句型或短语，请学生到黑板上板书文章，完成后小组内互相交流所写短文，借 鉴好词好段，教师点拨黑板上板书的作文。(10 分钟) 参考案例 Have you ever been to Beijing？It's the capital of China.It'a also a modern city in China.It is in the north of China.And Beijing has a large population.It's about 20 million.The weather in Beijing is a little hot in summer and a bit cold in winter.But you can choose spring or autumn to come to Beijing.Beijing is an old city with long history.There are many places of interest ， such as the Palace Museum ， the Summer Palace and so on.They are all very wonderful.There are many different kinds of snacks ， too.You can taste everything that you like.One great thing about Beijing is that there are many overpasses there.It's very easy for you to get lost if you come to the city for the first time. Please come to Beijing on vacation.I'm sure you will fall in love with it. 环节说明：通过这个教学环节让学生完成了本单元的写作练习，同时锻炼了学生的写作 能力。 Step 3 完成教材 Self Check 的任务 1．思考 1 中的问题，然后把你的答案写下来，完成后小组内互相交流。(4 分钟) 2．认真阅读 2 中的对话，然后根据所学知识将对话补充完整，请学生展示答案，教师 点拨。(5 分钟) 3．两人一组练习对话，然后仿照该对话形式来编练新对话，并邀请学生表演对话。(5 分钟) 4．两人一组仿照下面对话形式练习对话，并根据对方的答案填全表格。 参考案例 A：Have you ever been to a farm? B：Yes，I have. A：How many times have you been there? B：I have been there twice. A：What did you see there? B：... 环节说明：通过本环节的学习让学生熟练掌握了各种时态的综合用法。 Step 4 问题探究 1．—Where is Tom？We can't find him anywhere. — Perhaps he ________ home. A．has come B．is going C．went D．was going 答案选择 A，根据句意：汤姆在哪里？我们到处都找不到他。他可能回家了。“我们到 处都找不到他”就是“他可能回家了”的后果和影响，因此用现在完成时。故选 A。 请学生们做前面课时训练部分。 Unit 10 I have had this bike for three years. 第一课时 Section A (1a2d) 1.重点单词：yard，sweet，cent，toy，bear，maker，scarf，soft，board，check 2．重点短语：yard sale，in need，check out，board game 3．重点句式： How long have you had that bike over there? I have had it for three years! I learned how to ride a bike on it. Amy wants to keep her old things because they bring back sweet memories. You can also give old things away to people in need. I've had it since I was a baby. I've had this magazine for a couple of months. 1．重点短语和句型 2．现在完成时用法——持续性用法 现在完成时用法——持续性用法 一、预习课本 P7273 新单词并背诵，完成下面的汉译英。 1．院子____________ 2.甜的____________ 3．分____________ 4.玩具____________ 5．熊____________ 6.生产者____________ 7．围巾____________ 8.柔软的____________ 9．木板____________ 10.检查____________ 二、认真预习 1a2d 找出下列短语和句型。 5．你拥有那边的那辆自行车多长时间了？ ________________________________________________________________________ 6．Amy 想保存着这些旧东西，因为它们给她带来了甜蜜的回忆。 ________________________________________________________________________ 7．你也可以把这些旧东西捐给需要的人们。 ________________________________________________________________________ 8．我是一个小孩的时候就拥有它了。 ________________________________________________________________________ 9．我拥有这本杂志两三个月了。 ________________________________________________________________________ Step 1 情景导入 Teacher：Do you know yard sale？A yard sale is also called a garage sale，it is a sale where people sell miscellaneous household items that they no longer want from a table outside their house or garage.It is a private sale and it helps to exploit the last profit out of your unwanted or old stuff. Today we will hear a conversation about yard sale.Let's learn together. 环节说明：通过这一环节让学生了解到了关于庭院拍卖会的一些情况，同时为本节课的 听力训练做好了铺垫。 Step 2 完成教材 1a1c 的任务 1.认真观察 1a 图片中的物品，然后在小组内用英语说出它们的名字，比一比谁说得多。 (3 分钟) 2．图片中出现的物品你家有吗？你拥有它们多长时间了？和你的搭档谈论这个话题。 (3 分钟) 参考案例 A：Do you have a bike at home? B：Yes，I do.How long have you had it? A：I have had it for five years. A：... 3．认真阅读 1b 中的句子，为听力训练做好准备。(2 分钟) 4．认真听录音，标出你所听到的事实。完成后集体核对答案。(3 分钟) 5．再听一遍录音，并跟读对话。(3 分钟) 6．两人一组练习 1c 对话，然后仿照 1c 的形式利用图片中的物品，编练新的对话，完 成后要求几组学生表演对话。(5 分钟)。 参考案例 A：This is a really old book. B：Yes，I've had it for seven year.I've read it three times. A：Why are you selling it? B：Because I don't read it anymore. A：How much is it? B：You can have it for 75 cents. 7．小结训练。(3 分钟) (C)1.Li Hong has ________ the army for 2 years. A．joined B．joined to C．been in D．joined in (B)2.Mike ________ the storybook for a month. A．has bought B．has had C．had had D．has borrowed (B)3.We ________ junior middle school. A．already finished B．have already finished C．had already finished D．finished already (B)4.Those foreign friends left Guangzhou ________． A．since last week B．a week ago C．for a week D．since a week ago (D)5.I ________ at this school for two years already. A．am studying B．study C．studied D．have studied 环节说明：听说结合，第一时间向学生传达语言目标，通过结对对话练习和小结训练， 使语言目标得以强化。 Step 3 完成教材 2a2c 的任务 1.学生齐读 2a 中的单词和短语，听录音，用对号(√)标出 Amy 家将要捐赠出去的物品， 圈出他们将要保存下来的物品，集体核对答案。(3 分钟) 2．再认真听一遍录音，根据听到的内容，将 2b 的句子补充完整，完成后请几名学生展 示答案，教师点拨。(3 分钟) 3．听第三遍录音，学生跟读，整体感知对话。(3 分钟) 4．两人一组分别扮演 Amy 的妈妈和 Amy，仿照 2c 的形式编练新的对话，邀请几组学 生表演新的对话。(5 分钟) 参考案例 A：Amy，Can you give away these soft toys? B：Mom，I want to keep the bear. A：Why？It's so old. B：Because I've had it since I was a baby. 5．小结训练。(3 分钟) (C)1.We have been friends since ________． A．children B．five years C．five years ago D．five years before (C)2.They ________ in the city since last summer. A．live B．didn't live C．have lived D．live (A)3.Mrs.Wang has lived in Haikou ________ 1992. A．since B．from C．after D．before (D)4.—How long has he ________the bike? —About two weeks. A．borrowed B．lent C．keep D．kept 环节说明：通过听、说、读、写训练让学生掌握现在完成时态的持续性用法；同时学生 的口语表达能力在这一环节得到提升。 Step 4 完成教材 2d 的任务 1．学生自读对话，完成下面的问题。(5 分钟) ①为判断正误 T 或 F；②为根据对话内容填空；③为回答问题；④为英译汉 ①Amy gave some things away to Sunshine Home for Children.(T) ②Amy gave away a magazine，some soft toys，board games，a sweater，a dress and a bread_maker to the Sunshine Home for Children. ③How long has Amy had some soft toys and board games? She's_had_them_since_she_was_a_child. ④I have had this magazine for a couple of months. 我拥有这本杂志两三个月了。 2．大声朗读 2d 中的对话，读熟后与同伴结对练习，分角色表演对话。(3 分钟) 3．邀请三组学生来表演对话。(5 分钟) 4．小结训练。(3 分钟) 1．我拥有这本杂志两三个月了。 I_have_had_this_magazine_for_a_couple_of_months. 2．查看一下这些新课本。 Check_out_these_new_textbooks. 3．里面的故事也许有一点老，但是它们仍然很有趣。 The_stories_inside_may_be_a_bit_old，but_they_are_still_interesting. 环节说明：将对话问题化，既能锻炼学生的思维能力又能加深对课文的理解。小结训练 又对对话中的重要句型进行了巩固加深。 Step 5 问题探究 1．我买这本书三周了。 I_have_had_this_book_for_three_weeks. 现在完成时态还表示过去发生的动作或存在的状态，一直持续到现在，也许还将继续下 去，可以和表示从过去某一时刻延续到现在的一段时间的状语连用，即：for ＋时间段；since ＋时间点/从句；in(during) the last(past) ten years 等，谓语只可用延续性动词． 2．我借这本书两个星期了。 ①I have kept the book for two weeks. ②I have kept the book since two weeks ago. 现在完成时中 for 与 since 的区别： for ＋ 段时间，常与延续性动词的现在完成时连用 since 有四种用法： ①since＋时间点 eg：since last night ②since＋时间段＋ago eg：since two years ago ③since ＋从句(用一般过去时态) eg：since they came to China ④ It's (has been) ＋一段时间＋since 从句 请学生们做前面课时训练部分。 第二课时 Section A (3a3c) 1.重点单词：railway，certain，honest，truthful 2．重点短语：clear out，no longer，part with，as for，to be honest 3．重点句式： As they get bigger our house seems to get smaller. We've already cleared out a lot of things from our bedrooms. We've decided to each sell five things that we no longer use. He's owned a train and railway set since his fourth birthday. My daughter was more understanding，although she also felt sad to part with certain toys. 1.重点的短语及句型 2．现在完成时态——持续性用法 1．重点的短语及句型 2．现在完成时态——持续性用法 一、预习课本 P75 新单词并背诵，完成下面的汉译英。 1．铁路____________ 2.某个____________ 3．诚实的____________ 4.真实的____________ 二、认真预习 3a3c 内容，找出下列短语和句型。 5．随着他们的长大，我们的房子似乎变小了。 ________________________________________________________________________ 6．我们从房间里清理出了许多的东西(进行庭院拍卖)。 ________________________________________________________________________ 7．我们决定每个人卖掉五件我们不再使用的物品。 ________________________________________________________________________ 8．他从四岁生日的时候起就拥有了这个火车和铁路装置。 ________________________________________________________________________ 9．我的女儿更能理解一些，虽然割舍掉她的某些玩具也让她感到伤心。 ________________________________________________________________________ Step 1 情景导入 Teacher：Today we are going to learn a article written by a father for a magazine.It's about a yard sale.Do you want to what they are going to sale at the yard sale？Now let's read the article to find out the answer. 环节说明：由问题来导入新课，引起学生的好奇心，同时也能激起学生的阅读兴趣。 Step 2 完成教材 3a3c 的任务 1．快速阅读短文，回答 what are they going to sale at the yard sale？，完成后让学生展示 答案，教师点拨。(3 分钟) 2．认真阅读短文，在文中找出 3b 中五个问题的答案，请几名学生展示答案，教师点拨。 (5 分钟) 3．再次认真阅读短文，从短文中找出单词或短语来替代 3c 方框中的单词或短语，完成 后请学生展示答案，教师点拨。(3 分钟) 4．细心阅读短文，理解每一句话的意思，小组合作解决遇到的疑难问题。教师点拨短 文中出现的重点和难点。(5 分钟) 5．熟读短文，识记并背诵知识要点。(5 分钟) 6．小结训练。(3 分钟) (B)1.________ things in this cupboard，please. A．Clear up B．Clear out C．Clean up D．Put up (D)2.She felt sorry to part________her car. A．to B．for C．at D．with (B)3.The thief was caught by the police almost immediately.________the stolen jewels，they were found in a dustbin. A．Ask for B．As for C．Thanks for D．Good for (C)4.________，I was surprised he knew where I was，because we moved so often. A．Excuse me B．Sorry C．To be honest D．As for (B)5.His father ________ for years. A．has died B．has been dead C．died D．dies 环节说明：通读阅读分析文章，学生的阅读分析能力在这一环节得到提升；小结训练又 及时的巩固强化了重要的知识点。 Step 3 问题探究 1．You can have a bed.________ him，he'll have to sleep on the floor. A．As for B．Thanks for C. Ask for D．Good for 答案选择 A，根据句意“你能有一张床，至于他只能在地板上睡了”。As for 意为“至 于；就……方面说”，用于句首，引出一个与前面一个话题稍微有些不同的话题，但与前文 内容也有一定的关系。 2．______ ，I do not think we have a chance of winning. A．Excuse me B．Sorry C．To be honest D．As for 答案选择 C, 根据句意“说实话，我认为我们没有获胜的可能”。to be honest 意为“说 实在的，老实讲”， 从个人主观的概念上出发。它是独立主格结构，一般都放在句首。 请学生们做前面课时训练部分。 第三课时 Section A (Grammar Focus4c) 1.重点单词：camera，hometown 2．重点句式： —Have you ever played football？—Yes，I did when I was little，but I haven't played for a while now. Jim has been in Japan for three years. We have had a piano since last November. 1．现在完成时态的用法——持续性用法 2．for 和 since 的用法 1．现在完成时态的用法——持续性用法 2．for 和 since 的用法 一、预习课本 P76 新单词并背诵，完成下面的汉译英。 1．照相机____________ 2.家乡____________ 二、认真预习 Grammar Focus4c 内容，找出下列句型。 1．—你曾经踢过足球吗？ —是的，我小的时候踢过，但是现在有一段时间没有踢了。 ________________________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________________________ 2．Jim 在日本三年了。 ________________________________________________________________________ 3．去年 11 月我拥有了这台钢琴。 ________________________________________________________________________ Step 1 情景导入 Teacher：How long have you had your bike? Student 1：I have had it for two years. Teacher：How long have you had the pencil? Student 2：I have had it since two weeks ago. Teacher：Now please make conversations like this with your partner. 环节说明：这一环节复习了现在完成时态，同时锻炼了学生的口语能力。 Step 2 完成教材 Grammar Focus 的任务 1．学生大声朗读 Grammar Focus 的句子。(2 分钟) 2．小结训练。(2 分钟) 1．你拥有那边的那辆自行车多久了？ How_long_have_you_had_that_bike_over_there? 我拥有它三年了。 I've_had_it_for_three_years. 2．他的儿子拥有这辆火车和铁轨装置多长时间了？ How_long_has_his_son_owned_the_train_and_railway_set? 他是从他的四岁生日的时候起就拥有的。 He's_owned_it_since_his_fourth_birthday. 3．你曾经踢过足球吗？ Have_you_ever_played_football? 是的，我小的时候踢过，但是现在有段时间没踢了。 Yes，I_did_when_I_was_little，but_I_haven't_played_for_a_while_now. 环节说明：通过对 Grammar Focus 句型的填空练习能够使学生更好的来理解掌握本单 元的重点的语法和句型。 Step 3 完成教材 4a4c 的任务 1．认真阅读 4a 的例句，然后根据例句完成其它几组句子改写，请几位学生到黑板上板 演答案，完成后小组内互相交流答案，教师点拨易错点。(5 分钟) 2．大声朗读 4a 中的句子，体会 for 和 since 的用法区别。(3 分钟) 3．认真阅读 4b 短文，然后用括号内所给单词的正确形式填空，完成后请学生说出答案， 教师点拨重难点。(3 分钟) 4．向你的两个同学询问 4c 中的问题，并且根据回答，完成 4c 表格。(3 分钟) 参考案例 A：Do you have a football? B：Yes，I have.How long have you had it? A：I have had it for/since... 5 .小结训练。(2 分钟) 1．—Have_you already seen (see) the film? —Yes，I saw (see) it last week. 2．—Has he finished (finish) his work today? —Not yet. 3．—Have you been (be) to Hong Kong? —Yes，I have_been (be) there twice. 4．He has just finished (finish) his homework. 5．Has the young woman ever traveled (travel) to England? 环节说明：通过本环节的对话练习和习题及小结训练让学生熟练的掌握了现在完成时态 及 for 和 since 的用法。 Step 4 问题探究 1．He ________ for ten years. A．has been married B．married C．got married D．has married 答案选择 A，考查非延续性动词的用法。B、C 两项，时态不对，可排除；marry 是非 延续性动词，在现在完成时的肯定句中不能与表示一段时间的状语连用，可排除 D 项； married 可作形容词，意为“结婚的”，所以选择答案 A。 请学生们做前面课时训练部分。 第四课时 Section B (1a1d) 1.重点单词：hill 2．重点短语：down the street 3．重点句型： What is behind the science museum? It's been around for at least 20 years. What are some of the special places there? 1.现在完成时态 2．since 和 for 的用法 3．能够听懂对话录音 1．现在完成时态 2．since 和 for 的用法 一、预习课本 P77 新单词并背诵，完成下面的汉译英。 1．小山____________ 二、认真预习 1a1d 内容，找出下列句型。 1．科学博物馆后面是什么？ ________________________________________________________________________ 2．它已存在了至少 20 年． ________________________________________________________________________ 3．那里的特殊之处是什么？ ________________________________________________________________________ Step 1 情景导入 (Show a picture to the students) Teacher：This is my hometown.This is a library.It has been here since I was born.This is a hospital，and it is the highest building in my hometown.It has been here for five years... Now，please tell your partner something about your hometown like this. 环节说明：以此为导入语既复习了学过的现在完成时态，又引出了新课的学习，同时也 练习了学生的口语。 Step 2 完成教材 1a1d 的任务 1．学生齐读 1a 中的单词或词组，然后标注出你们家乡所拥有的地方或东西，完成后小 组内互相交流答案。(4 分钟) 2．认真听录音，回答 1b 中的三个问题，完成后请学生展示答案，教师点拨。(5 分钟) 3．再听一遍录音，将 1c 的表格填写完整，完成后请学生展示答案，教师点拨核对答案。 (3 分钟) 4．听第三遍录音，学生跟读并整体感知对话内容。(3 分钟) 5．两人一组仿照 1d 的对话形式来讨论各自的家乡或城市，完成后请几组学生表演对话。 (5 分钟) 参考案例 A：My city is lovely. B：What are some of the special places there? A: Well，there is a concert hall there，It's been around for at least 20 years. 6．小结训练。(2 分钟) (C)1.Her father _______in 1990 and her husband ________ for more than five years. A．died；dead B．has died；dead C．died；has been dead D．has died；has died (A)2.I have ________this nice watch for two years. A．had B．bought C．borrowed D．lend (C)3.He ________his home for ten years. A．has left B．left from C．has been away from D．was away from (B) 4.He ________a league member for three years. A．is B．has been C．has become D．have become (D)5.Lihua's brother has ________for two years. A．joined the army C．become a soldier B．been in army D．been in the army (B)6.He hasn't ________Quanzhou ever since he left school. A．left B．been away C．been D．away 环节说明：通过本环节的练习使学生掌握了现在完成时态的用法，有效地巩固了前几个 课时所学的知识点。 Step 3 问题探究 1．My sister has learnt English ________． A．for twelve years ago B．since she was four C．twelve years ago D．at the age of four 答案选择 B，考查现在完成时的时间状语。由谓语动词 has learnt 可知，应用表示一段 时间的时间状语，A 项表达错误；C、D 两项用于一般过去时，所以选择答案 B。 2．She ________ the book ________ two days ago. A．has borrowed；since B．has kept；since C．kept；for D．borrowed；for 答案选择 B，句意：两天前她借了这本书。因为 borrow 是短暂性动词，如果想与 for /since ＋ 一段时间连用，要把 borrow 变成延续性动词 keep，时态为完成时，所以选择答案 B。 请学生们做前面课时训练部分。 第五课时 Section B (2a2d) 1．重点单词：search，among，crayon，shame，regard，count，century，opposite，especially， memory，consider，hold 2．重点词组：search for，stay the same，according to，in one's opinion 3．重点句式： Nowadays，millions of Chinese leave the countryside to search for work in the cities. I haven't been back for almost three years now. Many people like Zhong Wei regard with interest how their hometowns have changed. It is still there and has become quite a symbol of the place. Our hometown has left many soft and sweet memories in our hearts. 1.重点短语和句型 2．运用所学过的知识来预测学习新文章(阅读方法) 1．重点短语和句型 2．掌握阅读方法 一、预习课本 P7879 新单词并背诵，完成下面的汉译英。 1．搜查____________ 2.在(其)中__________ 3．彩色铅笔____________ 4.羞耻____________ 5．把……视为__________ 6.数数____________ 7．世纪____________ 8.对面的____________ 9．尤其____________ 10.记忆____________ 11．考虑____________ 12.拥有____________ 二、认真预习 2a2e 的内容，找出下列短语和句型。 5．现在数以百万的中国人离开农村到城市寻找工作。 ________________________________________________________________________ 6．我几乎三年都没有回去过了。 ________________________________________________________________________ 7．很多向钟伟一样的人对家乡的变化产生了很大的兴趣。 ________________________________________________________________________ 8．它仍然在那里而且还成为了这个地方的标志。 ________________________________________________________________________ 9．我们的家乡在我们的心里留下了很多温馨、甜蜜的回忆。 ________________________________________________________________________ Step 1 情景导入 Teacher：Our hometowns have changed a lot recently.Think of changes that are happening in our hometowns.And discuss the changes with your partner. 环节说明：由家乡的变化入手，贴近学生现实生活，易于引起学生的表达欲望和学习兴 趣。 Step 2 完成教材 2a2c 的任务 1．首先回答 2a 中的三个问题，然后快速阅读 2a 短文，看看自己的答案是否和文中答 案一致。(5 分钟) 2．认真阅读短文，从短文中找出意思一样的单词或短语来替代 2b 中的单词和短语，完 成后请学生说出答案，教师点拨答案。 (5 分钟) 3．再次细心阅读短文，理解每一句话的意思，小组合作解决遇到的疑难问题。(5 分钟) 4．教师点拨短文中出现的重点和难点。(5 分钟) 5．熟读短文，识记并背诵知识要点。(5 分钟) 6．小结训练。(3 分钟) (D)1.I search _______ information through the Internet. A．to B．on C．in D．for (C)2.We came to Nanjing three years ago，so we ________ here for three years. A．have been to B．have been in C．have been D．have gone (B)3.They regarded those homeless children ________ great sympathy. A．for B．to C．about D．with (D)4.According ________the timetable，the train gets in at 8：27. A．for B．to C．about D．with (D)5.He tells me he________ China for over five years. A．has been B．has been in C．has been to D．has gone to China (C)6.________ my opinion，it's enough for a family to have one child. A．To B．On C．In D．For 环节说明：通过本环节的学习不仅锻炼了学生的阅读能力，而且通过小结训练让学生对 重要知识点进行了巩固练习。 Step 3 完成教材 2c2d 的任务 1．认真阅读 2a 中的文章，用文章中的单词来补全 2c 中的短文，注意单词形式的变化， 完成后请学生展示答案，教师点拨，然后大声朗读短文。(5 分钟) 2．两人一组互相谈论家乡的变化，指出哪些变化是好的，哪些变化是不好的，并说说 原因。(5 分钟) 环节说明：通过 2c 环节锻炼了学生对文章的总结概况能力，同时对 2a 短文有了更深 刻的理解；2d 环节锻炼了学生的口语表达能力。 Step 4 问题探究 1．He regarded this new air conditioner ______ interest. A．to B．in C．at D．with 答案选择 D，根据句意“他对他的新空调很感兴趣”，regard …with 意为“以(某种心 态)来看……”。 2．________the weather forecast，we shall have rain tomorrow. A．As for B．To be honest C．Stay the same D．According to 答案选择 D，根据句意“根据天气预报，明天会下雨”，according to 意为“根据”， 主要用来表示“根据”(某学说、某书刊、某文件、某人所说等)或表示“按照”(某法律、某 规定、某惯例、某情况等)。 3．consider 用法 ①我们在考虑赴海南过春节。 We_are_considering_going_to_Hainan_to_spend_Spring_Festival. ②他从未考虑过如何解决那个问题。 He_never_considers_how_to_solve_that_problem. ③你认为他明天会来吗？ Do_you_consider_that_he_will_come_tomorrow? consider 作为“思考，考虑”(＝think_about)解，后面可接动名词、由“how，what 等＋ 动词不定式”或者 that 从句。但要特别注意，consider 后面不能直接跟动词不定式作宾语。 4．His house is hidden ________ the trees. A．between B．in C．among D．along 答案选择 C，among 和 between 为近义词，皆可表示“在……之间”，但用法不同：among 一般用于三者或三者以上的“在……中间”，其宾语通常是一个表示笼统数量或具有复数意 义的名词或代词。between 一般指两者之间，其宾语往往是一个具体数目的人(物)，或者是 由 and 连接的两个具体的人(物)。 请学生们做前面课时训练部分。 第六课时 Section A (3aSelf Check) 1.复习学过的单词、短语及重要句型 2．熟练掌握现在完成时态 1.重点单词和句型 2．熟练掌握现在完成时态 灵活运用现在完成时态 1．复习本单元学过的单词和短语及重要句型 2．复习现在完成时态的用法 Step 1 情景导入 Teacher：There are many soft and sweet memories in our hearts.Now please talk about your favorite things from childhood which you still have remembered with your partner. 环节说明：通过这一环节让学生对童年有了美好的回忆，同时也锻炼了学生的语言表达 能力和语言组织能力。 Step 2 完成教材 3a4 的任务 1．回忆你童年时代最喜欢的且现在仍然陪伴你的一样东西，它可以是一本书也可以是 一个玩具，然后回答出 3a 中的问题并把答案记录下来，完成后小组内互相交流。(5 分钟) 2．综合 3a 中的各个方面的内容，写一篇关于你最喜爱的一样东西的文章，可以参考 3b 中的写作模式和句型，请学生到黑板上板书文章，完成后小组内互相交流所写的短文， 借鉴好词好段。教师点拨黑板上板书的作文。(10 分钟) 参考案例 My favorite thing from childhood is a toy bear.I've had it since my fourth birthday.My grandmother gave it to me as a birthday gift.I like it so much，because it is a lovely toy bear.And I would never go to bed without it.It's also special to me because it is the only one gift from my grandmother.when I see it，I always think of my grandmother，although she has been dead for a few years.The toy bear has given me many memories.I will never part with it. 环节说明：通过这个教学环节让学生完成了本单元的写作练习，同时锻炼了学生的写作 能力。 Step 3 完成教材 Self Check 的任务 1．用 since 或 for 短语将 1 中的句子补充完整，邀请几名学生到黑板上写出句子，完成 后小组内互相交流，师生共同点拨黑板上的句子。(4 分钟) 2．认真阅读 2 中的对话，然后根据所学知识将对话补充完整，完成后请学生展示答案， 教师点拨。(5 分钟) 3．让学生两人一组练习对话，然后仿照该对话形式来编练新对话，并邀请学生表演对 话。(5 分钟) 环节说明：通过本环节的学习让学生熟练掌握现在完成时态的用法。 Step 4 问题探究 1．The train ________ for twenty minutes. A．left B．has left C．is leaving D．has been away 答案选择 D，当句中有“for＋时间状语”时，应用完成时；表示持续动作时，要选择 可持续动词，不要用瞬间动词。 请学生们做前面课时训练部分。 八下英语全册导学案 Unit 1 What’s the matter? Section A 1a-2c 第 1 课时 【学习目标】 1． 能听说读写重点单词和词组：matter, sore, have a cold, stomachache, have a stomachache, foot, neck, stomach, throat, fever, lie, lie down, rest, cough, X-ray, toothache, take one ’ s temperature，see a dentist 2．句型：学会用 What’s the matter? I have a cold. I have a stomachache. I have a sore back. I have a sore throat. 谈论身体情况。 3. 学习用 should 给出建议 【重点】【难点】 能询问并表述身体的种种不适以及对他人身体的种种不适给予适当的建议。 【自学指导】 1、自己认读 1a 单词，与画面中字母匹配，并在自己的身体上指认人体部位。 2、对照单词 表翻译 1a 画面上的句子，并读熟。5min （5 分钟） 【自学检测】 1、把你所知道的身体部位的单词写下来，并写出其相应的中文意思。 __eye_ __眼睛_ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ 2、have a cold 的意思是“感冒，着凉”为固定词组，have 表示生…病，解释下列词组的意 思。 have a sore throat _________ have a sore neck ___________ have a fever ____________ have a headache ____________ have a stomachache ________ have a toothache __________ 【合作探究】 1 、 What ’ s the matter? 怎 么 了 ， 其 后 常 与 介 词 with 连 用 。 类 似 的 问 句 还 有 ： _________________________ _________________________ What’s the matter with Ben? （改为同义句）What’s _______ with Jim? 2、情态动词 should 的用法 1)should 常用来表示劝告、建议、认为某人应该做某事。 2)should 本身不能单独作谓语，必须和动词原形连用。should 没有人称和数的变化，其否 定形式为 shouldn’t. 如：We__________ study hard.我们应该努力学习。 You_________ play computer games.你不应该玩电脑游戏。 He ________ lie down and rest. 他应该躺下来休息。 【达标检测】一、翻译以下短语： 1、感冒 ______________________ 2、背疼 _________________________ 3、发烧 ______________________ 4、量体温 ________________________ 5、腹痛 ______________________ 6、嗓子疼 ________________________ 7、牙疼 ______________________ 8、上点药 ________________________ 9、去看医生 ______________________ ___________________________ 10、躺下来休息______________________ 11、头疼 _____________________ 12、看牙医 _____________________ 13、照 X 光片____________________ 14、喝些加蜂蜜的热茶 ________________________ 二、完成句子： 1、你怎么了？ What’s the matter _____ you? 2、他怎么了？ What’s the matter _____ _____? 3、她昨天感冒了。She _____ a cold yesterday. 4、Mary 咳嗽。Mary ______. 5、我觉得头很热。My head ______ very _____. 6、你应该回家休息。__________________________________. 7、她不应该说太多话。________________________________. 8、你弟弟应该早点睡觉。__________________________________. 9、--他应该量体温吗？_________________________________? --是的。_____,____________. 10、你看起来不太好。_____________________. 三、单项选择。 ( )①What’s ____ with you? A. trouble B. the matter C. the wrong D. matter ( )② — ______? — Nothing serious, but a bit tired. —Better have a rest now, dear. A. Is that all B. Is there anything else C. What’s this D. What’s the matter with you ( )③【湖北孝感】—_________? — I have a headache and I don’t feel like eating anything. A. How are you B. What can I do for you C. What’s the matter with you D. How do you like it ( )④【．云南昆明】27. —What’s the matter with Tina? —_______________. A. She is away. B. She is cool. C. She has a sore throat. D. She should take some medicine 【总结反思】 _________________________________________________________ _________________________________________________________ 【课后作业】1、熟练说出本课重点短语和重点句型，并一次。 2、根据 2a、2b 编 5 组对话，并和同桌练熟。 （教师复备栏及学生笔记） Unit 1 What’s the matter? Section A 2d—3c 第 2 课时 【学习目标】 1、重点单词： headache, break, hurt, herself, 2、短语：have a fever, take breaks/take a break in the same way go to a doctor. 3、句型：Are you OK? Do you have a fever? Yes, I do. /No, I don’t. What should she do? She should take her temperature. Should I put some medicine on it? Yes, you should. /No, you shouldn’t. 【重点】使用 should, shouldn’t 给出合理的建议。 【难点】根据不同的病症给出多个合理建议。 【自学指导一】 自读对话 2d 两次，把握大意，划出不懂之处并自己查字典解决。4 分钟。 【自学检测一】完成下列句子。 1、你还好吗？ Are you _____? 2、我该怎么办？ _____ should I _____? 3、我应该量体温吗？ Should I _____ ____ ________________? 4、我头疼。 I have ___ ________________. 5、你周末做什么了? What_____ you_____ on the _________? 6、你应该离开电脑休息一下。You need to _____ ________ ______ _______ the computer. 7、我认为你应该躺下来休息。I think you should ______ ______ and rest. 【合作探究一】 1、小组成员轮流读对话并翻译，划出疑难准备提问。 2、共同划出你们认为重要的短语、句子，写在小黑板上。 【达标检测】 一、 短语翻译： 1、 休息 ____________ __________2、没有移动 _______________ 3、以相同的方式 _________________ 4、听起来像_____________ 5、割伤自己 ____________________ 6、让自己受伤____________________ 7、在伤口上敷点药________________________ 8、跌倒__________________ 二、单项选择。 1、( )【曲靖中考】I didn’t sleep well last night, because I _____ a toothache . A. was B. went C. had D. took 2、( )【山东莱芜】—Tony, What’s ___ matter with you? — I have _____ toothache. A. a; the B. the; a C. /; the D. the; / 3、( ) Mr. Smith eats ______ food, so he’s _____ fat. A .much too; too much B .too many; much too C. too much; too much D. too much ;much too 4、( )【孝感】—Why are you so tired these days? —Well, I have ________ homework to do. A. too much B. too many C . much too D. many too 5、( ) You ____ be quiet when you are in the reading room. A. should B. shouldn’t C. can D. can’t 6、( )【安徽】You _____ drive your car so fast. It’s very dangerous. A. wouldn’t B. shouldn’t C. couldn’t D. mightn’t 7、( ) David needs ______ a good rest. A. has B. to have C. have 8、( )【连云港】30. — I'd like a cup of black coffee. What about you, Maggie? — I prefer coffee ________ sugar. A. than B. for C. with D. to 9、( ) The boy isn’t ___ to dress himself. A. old enough B. enough old C. old 10、( ) — I’m sorry to break your pen. —_______ A. That’s right B. It doesn’t matter C. Thank you 【总结反思】 _________________________________________________________ _________________________________________________________ 【课后作业】1、完成导学方案 Unit 1 A 部分。 Unit 1 What’s the matter? Section A Grammar—4c 第 3 课时 【学习目标】 1、重点单词：herself 2、短语：hurt oneself have a sore throat put some medicine on… take one’s temperature Fall down lie down 3、句型：What’s the matter with …? She should put some medicine on the cut. She should lie down and rest. 【重点】使用 should, shouldn’t 给出合理的建议。 【难点】根据不同的病症给出多个合理建议。 【自学指导】 自读 Grammar Focus 两次，弄懂含义。 【合作探究】 1、组内熟读 Grammar Focus, 并演练对话。 2、独立完成 4a、4b，小组内互相检查，解决疑难。 hurt oneself What should I do? You should see a doctor and get an X-ray. 3、共同划出你们认为重要的短语、句子，写在小黑板上。 4、总结各种疾病以及相对应的建议，准备 4c 的活动。 【达标检测】 一、短语翻译： 1. 伤着自己 2. 给伤口上药__________________________ 3. 切到自己 __________________________ 4. 量体温 ___________________________ 5. 摔倒 ____________________________ 6. 做个 X 光检查______________________ 二、 根据句意填空 1. A: I hurt _________ when I played basketball yesterday. What ______ I do? B: You _______ see a doctor and get an X-ray. 2. A: ________ the matter? B: My sister and I ______ sore throats. _______ we go to school? A: No, you ________. 3. A: _______ Mike _______ a fever? B: No, he _________. He ______ a stomachache. A: He _______ drink more hot tea with honey. 三、根据首字母提示和句意提示填空。 1.I have a toothache, I have to see a d______. 2.She is tired, she should go to bed early, she s______ go to the party. 3.When you have a headache, please lie down and r______. 4. I have a t____ __, so I want to see a dentist. 四、用所给单词的适当形式填空。 1. I’m feeling terrible, I have a _______ (stomach). 2.You should ______ (drink) enough water every day. Our body needs much water. 3.I think everyone has two________(foot) 4.When you have a stomachache, you shouldn’t eat ____________(something). 五、选择填空。 1. You should ____ more water when you have a fever. A. drinks B. drinking C. drinked D. drink 2. _____ did the headache start? --- About two hours ago. A. When B. What C. where D. How 3. I can’t sleep, so I _____ listen to quiet music, and I ______ listen to exciting music. A. should; should B. shouldn’t; shouldn’t C. should; shouldn’t D. can; don’t 4.David ____ a stomachache. So he ____ eat anything 24 hours. A. has, should B. has , shouldn’t C. have, shouldn’t D. had, shouldn’t 5.-I have a sore throat. What should I do? _You should drink hot tea _______honey. A. of B. in C. with D. about. 【要点归纳】 罗列针对不同健康问题所给的建议的词汇或短语；理解 should 及 shouldn’t 的使用方法。 【拓展练习】 句型转换。 1.What’s wrong with you?(同义句) What’s _____ _____ with you? 2.My back hurts(痛)(同义句) I have _____ ______ back. 3.He should eat something(否定句) He _____ eat _______.或者 He should eat ______. 4 .That sounds good. (同义句) That’s a_____ _____. 5.I have a toothache, I should visit a dentist.(同义句)I have a toothache, I ___ to ____ a dentist. 【总结反思】 Unit 1 What’s the matter? Section B 1a-2a 第 4 课时 【学习目标】 1、重点单词：bandage sick knee nosebleed hurt hit breathing sunburned ourselves 2、重点短语：get sunburned feel sick get hit on the head put a bandage on… put one’s head back put on a clean shirt have a nosebleed 重点，难点】 使用 should 和 shouldn’t 给出合理建议。 【导学指导】 1.根据下列方框中左侧所给病况，在右侧方框中给出合理化建议。 illness advice I have a sore throat. I have a stomachache. I have a toothache. I have a fever. 自主学习: 一、自学。 1.浏览 Page10 上 1a 中的图片，完成 1a 的要求。 2.小组讨论自学结果并一起朗读它们。（老师可通过邀请学生表演这四种情况来检测学 生对 1a 的掌握情况） 3.浏览 1b 中的图片并完成 1b 的要求。 4.小组讨论自学所填结果并在小组中比赛看谁背得最准最快。 5.浏览 2a 和 2b 题目要求及图表信息，完成下列问题。 How many persons are there mentioned（被提及） in this chart and who are they? ________________________________________________________. Discuss whether（是否） we should write down each word when we are doing 2a and 2b listening practice. If not, why? And What should we do when we are doing them? ___________________________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________________. 6.师生共同探讨。 7.Listen to the tape and complete the requirements of 2a and 2b。 8.小组讨论听力各自所听答案结果。 二、根据 2c 所给 model conversation 按照你所填的图表信息和搭档制作自己的对话。然后 争取在所有同学面前展示你们的对话。记住，当你站起来的时候，你就已经是个成功者了。. 【课堂练习】 一、根据首字母和句意补全单词。 1.She is tired, she should go to bed early, she s______ go to the party. 2.Would you please get me some water? I’m a little t______. 3.I'm t________, I would like something to drink. 4.When you are s_______ out, you should listen to some music to relax. You shouldn’t study . 二、用所给词的正确形式填空。 1.He ______(have) a headache last week. But now he is ____(feel)better. 2.I’m too ________(stress) out, let me listen to some music now. 三、选择下列每组句子的正确语序，使其组成符合逻辑的对话。 ①Is it anything serious? ②My head hurts. I feel terrible. ③Please sit down. Let me have a look at you. ④What's wrong with you, young man? ⑤No, nothing serious. Take this medicine and you can be better soon. A. ①②④③⑤ B. ④②③①⑤ C. ③④②①⑤ D. ④②①③⑤ 【要点归纳】 罗列本课所学的四种身体不适状况并给出相应的建议。 【拓展练习】 一、选择填空。 1.How are you? ---I’m feeling ______.A. good B. well C. better D. fun 2. _____ did the headache start? --- About two hours ago. A. When B. What C. where D. How 3. I can’t sleep, so I _____ listen to quiet music, and I ______ listen to exciting music. A. should; should B. shouldn’t; shouldn’t C. should; shouldn’t D. can; don’t 4 —What do you think of their _______? —Terrific! A、advices B. advice C. suggestiones D. suggest. 二、阅读理解：根据文章内容填空，每空一词。(10 分) I'm Peter Penguin, Mary Penguin is my wife. Most of the time we live in the water. It is as cold as an icebox. We have many friends here. Our home is large. All we can see here is snow and ice. But our land is not all white. There is bright color, too. Sometimes the land looks green, or blue just like the color of the sky. In summer, the sun shines all the time. We have no night at all. Then winter comes. It is night all the time. We eat shellfish(贝壳类动物). We ride on big pieces of ice. We can't fly, but we can swim very fast. Every winter, we go back to the land. Mary lays two eggs. Then she must go back to the sea to find some food. I look after the eggs. After some time we have two babies. We are happy to see each other again. 1. Mary is Peter's__________. 2. Most of the time they live in the__________. 3. In summer, they have no__________at all. 4. In winter, they have no__________. 5. They're good at__________, and eat __________. Unit 1 What’s the matter? Section B 2b—2e 第 5 课时 【学习目标】 1、重点单词：risk accident situation kilo rock knife blood importance decision control spirit death 2、重点短语： be used to doing take risks cut off use sth to do sth the importance of make a good decision have the sane spirit be in control of 【重点，难点】提升阅读和写作技巧。 【导学指导】 温故知新： Name Problems Should Shouldn’t Liu Han Can’t fall asleep(不能 入睡) Take more exercise Take sleeping pills Kathy Often weak and tired Eat more hot yang foods Sleep all day Kobe Stressed out and angry Eat more yin foods Argue with your friends or have a big fight with them 根据以上图表信息，按照下列提示，完成 “I want to say to you…”。 My dear friend Lin Han, I want to say to you: When you …… ,you should … …. , you shouldn’t … … 。 自主学习： 一、自学 1.Read the passage and underline the words you don’t know. Then look up the new words in a dictionary and write down their meanings. 2. Read the passage and circle TRUE, FALSE or DON’T KNOW. ( 1 ). Aron almost lost his life three times because of climbing accidents. ( 2 ) Aron had a serious accident in April 2003. ( 3 ) Aron ran out of his water after three days. ( 4 ) Aron wrote his book before his serious accident. ( 5 ) Aron still goes mountain climbing. 3. Read the passage again and answer the questions. (1) Where did the accident happen on April, 2003? (2) Why couldn’t Aron move (3) How did Aron free himself? (4) What did Aron do after the accident? (5) What does “ between a rock and a hard place” mean? 4 Put the sentences in the correct order. Then use them to tell Aron’s story to your partner. Try to add other details from reading. ______ On April 26, 2003, he had a serious mountain climbing accident. ______ Aron loves mountain climbing and doesn’t mind taking risks. ______ Aron did not give up after the accident and keeps on climbing mountains today. ______ He wrote a book about his experience. ______ Aron lost half his right arm from the 2003 accident. 【拓展练习】 一、根据所给词的正确形式填空。 1. My grandpa exercises for 3 hours to stay ______(health) every day. 2.It’s easy _______(say), but difficult _______(do). 3.It’s important for us to eat a b_____ diet to have a healthy lifestyle . 二、选择正确答案。 1.It’s ____ to eat mooncakes in China. A. tradition B. traditional C. awful D. stressed out 2.You are always angry, maybe you have____ “yang”. A. too B. too many C. much too D. too much 三、根据汉语完成句子。 1.学好英语很重要。______ ______ to learn English well. 2..我的压力很大，因为我的口语没有长进。 I’m _____ _____ because my speaking English isn’t _______. 3.作为一名登山者，他习惯于冒险。 _____ a mountain climber, he ______ ______ _____ ______ ______. 4.因此他用小刀切掉了他的一半右臂。 So he used his knife _____ _____ _____ half his right arm. 5. 他在这次事故之后没有放弃，如今他继续爬山。 He didn’t ______ _____ after the accident and ______ _____ _________ mountains today. 6. 在书中他讲述了关于做出明智抉择和掌握自己生民的重要性。 In this book, he tells of the __________ of __________ _____ _________, and of _______ ____ ________ ______ one’s life. 四、写出下列短语 1. …的重要性 ______________________ 2. 做决定 ________________________ 3. 掌握 ____________________________ 4. 放弃 _____________________ 5. 继续做… ________________________ 6. 冒险 ______________________ 7. 习惯于 ________________________ 8. 切除 _____________________ 9. 失血过多 ________________________ 10. 处境危险___________________________ Unit 2 I’ll help clean up the city parks Unit 2 Section A 1a-Grammar Focus 【学习目标】1.重点词汇用法及短语动词用法。 2.学会施用“I will…”,“I would like…”等句型,向别人 提供帮助。 【重点、难点】重点词汇用法及短语动词用法。 【导学指导】 温故知新 给下列单词 1)-6)加上-ful, 7)-10)加上-less，并写出其 汉语意思。 1)use 2)care 3) success 4)beauty 5)color 6)wonder 7)home 8)help 9)care 10)use 自主互助学习 一、自主预习 1. 译一译，读一读，背一背 1）饥饿 2）无家可归的 3）标牌 4）广告 5）创办 6）打扫干净 7）使振奋 起来 8）分发 9）建立，建造 10）推迟 11）想出 12）清洁日 13) sick children 14）at the food bank 15)after-school study program 16)make a plan 2. 自主预习完成 1a 的任务。 二、听力导学 1. 听力前准备 1）认真阅读 1b 各句子，弄懂大概含义，并猜一猜空格会填 什么内容。 2）看懂 2a 中五幅图片的内容，用英文把图片反映的内容描 述出来。 3）认真阅读 2b 中句子，猜一猜空格会填什么内容。 2. 听录音 仔细听录音内容，完成 1b,2a,2b,并核对答 案。3. 重放录音，跟读录音内容。 二、合作探究 1. You could help clean up the city parks. 1)help 作 动 词 , “ 帮 助 ” 。 help sb.(to)do=___________________.帮助某人做某事 如 :He often helps me(to)study English.=____________________________. 2)help 作名词，“帮助”。如:______________________. 谢 谢你的帮助。 3) clean 可用作形容词，意为“清洁的，干净的”，此外 clean 可用作动词，用于以下词组： clean up 打扫清洁或收拾整齐，整理。clean out 打扫某物 内部（如：房间，抽屉，箱子等） clean-up （名词）打扫，清洁。 练一练：It’s time for you to _________________ your bedroom. I will help you _____________ the school. Tomorrow is _____________________day, everyone should try to do some cleaning. 2. sick 和 ill 的用法区别 sick 是形容词,"生病的",同义词是 ill。区别在于 sick 在句 中可做 语和 语,而 ill 只 能做 语。如:His father was /sick yesterday, so he didn't go to work.他的父亲昨天病了, 因此他没有去上班。Tom has looked after the sick girl for a week. 汤姆看顾那个生病的小女孩已经一星期了。别的, 当 ill 意为"坏的,恶劣的"时,在句中可做定语。如:He is an ill child.他是一个坏孩子。 3.set up, establish 和 build 的用法区别: 1) set up 意为“开办,建立",主要用于组织、机构、公司、学 校”等。相当于 open up 或 build up. 2) establish 意为“建立，建造，设立”，一般指建立某个 国家、组织、团体等概念的东西。相当于 found（建立）。 3) build 意为“制作,设置装备摆设”,是一般用语,偏重动 工建筑,常指制作大东西,如房屋、桥梁、道路等。试比较: set up a school____________ build a school_____________ China was founde d in 1949. 。 4. We can't put off making a plan. 1)put off"推迟、取消(会议,约会等),动副词组,后跟动词 时应用其-ing 形式,代词作宾语需放在 put 和 off 中间。例如: ________________until tomorrow what can be done today. 今天可以做的事情不要推到明天。 Please don't put off ___________your homework.请你们 不要拖延做作业。 2) make a plan 意为____________. make a plan to do sth________________. 3) 归 纳 关 于 put 的 词 组 。 【课堂练习】 从方框中选择恰当的词组，并用其适当形式填空。 clean up, put up, cheer up, set up, come up with, give out ,put off, call up 1. He has a lot of work to do, so he has to _______________going to the doctor. 2. Could you help me _________________ these new books? 3. Don’t worry. I’ll help ______________your room. 4. Let ’ s _______________the sick kids in the hospital. 5. In the end, Grandma ________________ a good idea. 6. Would you please not _______________signs here? 7. We’re going to ______________a food bank to help hungry people. 8. I’ll ________you________ as soon as I come back. 【要点归纳】 重点词汇用法及短语动词的用法。 【拓展练习】 根据汉语提示完成句子 1. We can’t ________________ (推迟) holding a meeting . 2. He is a great man. He ’ d like to help _______________(无家可归)people. 3. He came very early, so that he could help _____________(清扫)the floor . 4. The football team won the game, and the football fans _______________(高声欢呼). 5. Suddenly he ______________________(想出了) a good idea . 6. They planned to _______( 建 立 ) a student volunteer project at the school . Unit 2 Section A 3a-4 (1 课时) 【学习目标】1. 掌握重点词汇、句型的运用。2. 运用语言和 语法知识进行阅读并理解文章的意思。 【重点、难点】掌握重点词汇、句型的运用，阅读能力的提高。 【导学指导】 温故知新 翻译短语。 1）建立，建造 2）计划做某事 3）使振奋起来 4）推迟 5）花费……做某事 6）第 77 中学 7）帮组某人做某事 8）不仅……而 且…… 自主互助学习 一、 自主预习 1.词汇检测：译一译，读一读，记一记 1) 训练，指导 2) 志愿者 3)elementary 4) major 5) veterinarian 6) commitment 7) leave school 8) put this love to good use 2. 认真预习 3a，完成 3a,3b 的任务。 二、知识点拨 1. Number 77 High School is home to three very special young people. 1)be home to sb 意为“是……的家园”，to 为介词，后 加名词、代词，如果跟副词如 here, there 等要省略介词 . 如：（ ）He was born in London, but now Pairs is home _____ him. A. for B. to C. with D. about 2)Number 77 缩略形式为 。 2. Not only do I feel good about helping other people, but I get to spend time doing what I love to do.我不仅 对帮助别人感到愉快，而且我也开始花时间做我喜欢做的事情。 1)not only …but (also)… 意为 ，连接 两个单句时，not only 可以放在句首，表示强调，这时句子要 用部分倒装，即将谓语动词的一部分（如情态动词、助动词 do, does, did, have, has ,had 等）放在 语的前面，而 but also 后的句子仍用陈述句语序； 当它连接的成分作主语时，谓 语动词应与 but(also)后的成分保持一致，即 原则。 e.g. Not only you but also he is wrong. 跟踪练习： (1) — Do you think most of the people in Beijing can talk with foreigners in English ? — Yes, I think so. _______ the young ______ the old are learning to speak English. A. Either; or B. Neither; nor C. Between; and D. Not only; but also (2) Not only Jim but also his sister _______ a few cities in the south since they came in China. A. will visit B. has visited C. have visited D. visited 2)get to do sth 意为“逐渐做……”表示一个渐进的过 程。 e.g. I get to love sandwiches now. . 3.This volunteer work takes each of them several hours a week, so it is a major commitment.这份义工每周花了他 们每个人好几个小时的时间，所以这是一个重大的贡献。 each 与 every 的用法 ◎each 指一个整体中的每一个，强调个体；every 着重于 全体的总和，强调整体。试比较： ________has a different book. （强调各有不同。） Here child at the age of six can go to school. （侧重整体，无一例外。） ◎each 可作形容词及代词，而 every 只能作形容词，但可 与-one，-body，-thing 等构成复合代词。 ◎each 用在代词或复数名词前要用介词 of 连接，如 each of them, each of the boys; every 不能直接跟 of 连接，如 不可以说 every of them，而要说 every one of them 或 each of them。◎every 还可以表示“每…”，后接基数词加名词， 如 every four weeks , every three months 等，此种结构中的 every 不能用 each 代替。 She had a rest . 她每 5 分钟就休息一会儿。 三、合作学习 1. 角色扮演。小组合作完成 3c 的对话。 2. 小组讨论 完成 Part4。 【课堂练习】 找出与划线部分意思相同或相近的选项。 （ ）1.The child looked sad. Let’s cheer him up. A. happy B. make him happier C. shouted D. give a help （ ）2. We’re going to set up a project to help hungry people. A. start B. give up C. get up D. turn up （ ）3. They need to come up with some ideas. A. think about B. help… with C. think up D. think over （ ）4. I’d like to help the kids do their homework. A. help… doing B. help… with C. give a help D. give a hand （ ）5. When he grows up, he wants to be a doctor for animals. A. great man B. vet C. good doctor D. kind of animal 【要点归纳】 掌握重点词汇、句型的运用，阅读能力的提高。 【拓展练习】 单项选择。 （ ）1. Not only ______ run his machine, but _______ repair it. A. can he; he can B. he can; he can C. he can; can he D. can he ; can he （ ）2. Not only _______ polluted but _______ crowded. A. was the city ; were the streets B. the city was; were the streets C. was the city; the streets were D. the city was; the streets were （ ）3. Not only ______ me to a meal , but also he bought me a present. A. did he invite B. he invited C. had he invited D. he had invited （ ）4. The two girls were very happy because _____ of them had passed the math exam. A. both B. all C. neither D. none （ ）5. Did you ______ much money on the car ? A. cost B. pay C. spend D. take Unit 2 Section B 1 a-2 c 【学习目标】 1.听力练习。2.掌握短语：run out of, take after, fix up, give away. 【重点、难点】掌握短语：run out of, take after, fix up, give away 的运用及听力技能提高。 【导学指导】 温故知新 用所给词的适当形式填空 1）Let’s cheer _______ (they)up, ok? 2） I’d like _____ (visit)my English teacher tomorrow. 3） I’ll feel good about _______ (help)the old people. 4） He _____(spend) every morning _______ (do)some sports. 5） They plan ___________ (buy) a big house. 自主互助学习 一、自主预习 1. 译一译，读一读，背一背 1)相似的 2）修理 3）修理（短语） 4）与……相像 5）用完，耗尽 6）赠送，捐赠 2. 自主预习完成 1a,1b.（必要时查查字典） 二、合作探究 1．辩一辩 take after & look like 1)take after 由于血缘关系而（外貌、性格等方面）相似， 和 意义接近。如： I take after my mother= ___________________________.我 像我妈妈。 2) look like 看 起 来 像 … … （ 多 指 外 貌 ）， 如 ： He his mother. 他长得像他妈妈。 2. 辩一辩 fix，repair& mend repair 用于建筑、堤坝、机器、车辆等的修理；fix 是美 语用法，等于 repair; mend 一般用于衣服，鞋袜等小东西，偶 尔也用于道路、门窗等。 练一练：Can you my bike? 你给我修修自行车行 吗？He is a road. 他正在修路。 3. run out of 意 为 _________________, 相 当 于 ______________. I have run out of my pocket money. 同 义 句 ： ________________________________________. 三、听力导学 1. 先看懂 2a 中的四幅图的内容，猜一猜他们的顺序；结 合 2a 中的图，预先判断一下 2b 中的句子的正误。 2. 听录音内容，完成 2a,2b 的任务。 四、合作学习 1.小组讨论交流自主预习 1a,1b 的答案，并展示给全班学生。 2. 小组合作完成 2c 的对话练习。 【课堂练习】 从 A、B、C、D 四个选项中，找出一个意义不同的选项。 （ ）1. A. set up B. start C. establish D. set off （ ）2. A. take after B. look after C. look like D. be similar to （ ）3. A. give out B. hand out C. give away D. put away （ ）4. A. not…any longer B. no longer C. not…at all D. no more （ ）5. A. work out B. mend C. fix up D. repair 【要点归纳】 掌握短语：run out of, take after, fix up, give away 的 运用及听力技能提高。 【拓展练习】 一、词语释义。 （ ）1. She doesn’t have any more of it. A. takes after B. looks out C. runs out of D. gives away （ ）2.Have you fixed them up? A. repair B. repairs C. repairing D. repaired （ ）3. They take after me. A. be similar to B. is similar to C. be similar with D. are similar to （ ）4.Could you put up the pictures on the wall? A. hang B. take C. give D. bring （ ）5. Did you think up a good idea? A. set up B. cheer up C. come up with D. ran out of （ ）6.We are no longer students. We should find a job. A. never B. still C. no…any more D. not…any longer 二、阅读训练 Once there was a man who had two children, a boy and a girl. The boy was good-looking but the girl was not. One day they found a mirror and for the first time they saw what they looked like. The boy was very pleased and he said to his sister, “How handsome I am! I look much nicer than you!” The girl did not like what her brother said and gave him a hard push. “Go away!” she said. Their father saw what was happening. He went up to them and said to the boy, “you must always be good as well look good.” Then to the girl he said, “My dear, if you help everyone and do your best to please, everyone will love you. It will not matter that you are not as good-looking as your brother.” 根据短文内容,判断正(T)误(F) （ ） 1. The story is about a woman and his two children. （ ）2. The boy looked very nice and so did the girl. （ ）3. The sister was angry and she pushed her brother away. （ ）4.The father told his son if he could be nice and kind to people and ready to help, everybody would love her （ ）5. The story tells us that the most important thing for a person is to be nice and helpful to people Unit 2 Section B 3a-Self Check 【学习目标】 1.在课文中加深对短语动词的理解及其用法。2. 领会助人为乐是一种社会责任感的体现。 【重点、难点】在课文中加深对短语动词的理解及其用法。 【导学指导】 温故知新 把下列词组翻译成英语。 1.使振奋 2.用完，耗尽 3.打电话 4.分发 5.安装，修理 6.捐赠 7.与……相像 8.提出，想出 9.闲逛，逗留 10.给某人提供…… 自主互助学习 一、自主预习 1.词汇检测。 译一译，读一读，记一记 1）张贴，搭建 2）要求，请求 3） 分发，发放 4）产生结果，发展 5）（互联 网）站点 6）方法，策略 7)hang out 8) a professional singer 9) call-in 10)make money 2.自主预习 3a，把文章中的短语动词找出，并下划线。 3.认真阅读 3a,完成课本 3b 的任务。 4.自主预习完成 Self Check 1 的练习题，并掌握所给词的含 义及其用法。 二、知识点拨 The strategies that he came up with worked out fine. 他想到的那些办法获得了成功。 1）这是一个由 that 引导的定语从句，先行词是前面的 strategies。动词短语 worked out 在这里作主语 the strategies 的谓语，意为“产生结果，发展为，结果是……”，后面不可接 宾语，主语也不用“人”来充当。 I wonder how their ideas worked out in practice. 我 很想知道他们的想法在实践中取得了什么结果。 2）work out 还有“算出”之意。如：I hardly __________ the math problem without his help yesterday. 没有他的帮 忙，昨天我几乎不能算出这道数学题。 【课堂练习】 用所给词的形式填空。 cheer up ,hunger ,volunteer, advertisement, come up with. 1.You could ____________ in the after-school study program. 2.They even hand out _________ at a local supermarket. 3.They must __________ some ideas for solving the problems. 4.I am going to take her to the cinema to ______ her ______. 5.We’re going to set up a food bank to help ______people all over the country. 【要点归纳】 在课文中加深对短语动词的理解及其用法。 【拓展练习】 一、用所给词的适当形式填空 1. I’m going to have my TV set ____________(repair) this Sunday. 2. Kathy wants to be a ________(profession) singer in the future. 3. We put up some ads ___________(ask) for old clothes and books. 4. I came up with ideas for _________(make) money to continue my study. 5. Many students volunteer their time _________(help) poor people. 6. Now Jimmy has sixteen bikes _________(fix) up and give away the poor children . 二、把下列句子中的汉语翻译成英语。 1. Don’t _________(张贴) advertisements here and there. 2. Many kind-hearted people __________(捐赠)some money and foods to the homeless people in Japan after a terrible earthquake hit it. 3. On weekends quite a few students like to _________(闲逛)at sports club . 4. Jim __________(与……相像) his father, They are both clever and a bit quiet. 5. This math problem is too difficult for me to___________（算出）。 三、完型填空： Jimmy is a schoolboy. He likes old bikes very much. Last week 1.______ was trying to cheer up Jimmy the Bike Boy. But 2.______ week, Jimmy is happy again. 3._____ Monday he told a radio interviewer that he had run out of 4.______ to buy old bikes. He also put up some 5.______ asking for old bikes and called up all his friends and told them about the problem. He even 6._____ advertisements at a local supermarket. Then he told the teachers at 7.______ about his problem and they set up a call-in center for parents. The strategies 8._____ he came up with worked out fine. He now 9.______ sixteen bikes to fix up and give away to 10._____ who don’t have bikes. （ ） 1. A. everyone B. every C. all D. both （ ） 2. A. that B. these C. this D. those （ ） 3. A. In B. On C. At D. With （ ） 4. A. money B. time C. food D. water （ ） 5. A. pencils B. books C. pictures D. signs （ ） 6. A. hand out B. gave out C. give away D. sold out （ ） 7. A. shop B. hospital C. school D. bank （ ） 8. A. this B. who C. that D. where （ ） 9. A. have B. has C. had D. have been （ ）10. A. child B. a child C. children D. Jimmy 四、书面表达。 当今社会上有很多杰出的志愿工作者，他们用他们的汗水诠 释着他们的人生。请你联系自己的生活实际，以“Being a Volunteer is Great”为题写一篇短文。 要求：语意通顺、连贯、符合逻辑，语法、时态、格式正确， 字数在 60 字左右。 Unit 8 Section B Reading 【学习目标】1.通过阅读这篇文章, 学会如何向别人表示感 谢。 2.学习文章中出现的重点单词,词组和句型。3.培养学生的阅 读能力。 【重点、难点】学会如何向别人表示感谢及掌握文章中出现的 重点单词,词组和句型。 【导学指导】 导入新课 小组讨论书信与文章的不同点，并记录下来。 自主互助学习 一、自主预习 1. 词汇检测：译一译，记一记 1）装满，填满 2）愉快，高兴 3）盲的 4） 砻的 5）想像 6）关上 7）搬运，携带 8）特意地，专门地 9）（去）拿来 10 ） 立 即 ， 马 上 11)disabled people 12)organization 13)be unable to do sth. 14)support 15)appreciate 16)donation 2. 快速阅读课文，从文章中找出 3a 表格中要求的内容。 3. 快速阅读课文，文章中找出 3 个短语动词，并造句完成 3b. 4. 认真预习课文，完成 3c. 二、合作探究 1.You see, I’m only able to have a “dog-helper” because of your kind donation! 1) 此句中的 be able to 意为 “能够做……的事”,可用 can 替换, can 只能用于一般现在时和一般过去时（could），而 be able to 能用于任何时态。 She could dress herself at the age of five. = _____________________________. 2)because of 是介词短语,表原因,后面接名词或代词宾 语.because 是连词,词后常接从句. He didn’t go to school yesterday ____________his illness. She didn’t come to see me _________she was ill. 2. ...Who has filled my life with pleasure. (P66)…… 使我生活充满快乐的人。 1)本句中的 fill...with...表示一个动作，意为“用…… 装满……”，其主语通常是人。 He filled the bag with books. 他在书包里装满了书。知 识拓展： be filled with 表 示 一 个 状 态 ， 意 为 “ 装 满 了……”， ，其主语通常是人或物。 Her eyes were filled with tears. . 2)pleasure 意为“高兴，快乐”，是不可数名词；表示“乐 趣，高兴的事”时是可数名词。 __________gives me great . 读书给了我很 多快乐。 ◎在口语中 It’s pleasure. 是回答感谢的客套语。with pleasure 是回答乐意帮助别人的客套话。 —Thank you for your help. — Would you like to help me with my English? — . — . ◎pleased 是形容词，意为“自己感到高兴的，欣喜的，满 意的”，指以任何方式表现出来或未表现出来的满足与快乐，在 句中常用作表语，其主语为人。pleasant 也是形容词，表示“使 人感到愉快／满意”，一般用作定语，如主语是物，也可以用作 表语。 The two friends were very to see each other again. 这两个朋友非常高兴再次见面。 It’s weather today. 今天的天气令人愉快。。 ◎please 是动词，表示“（使）高兴，满意，愉快”。Does the cloth please you? 这布料合你的意吗？ 3. 辩一辩 ： carry, take, bring 与 fetch 1) carry “搬运、携带”,不说明带的方向 2)take “带走、拿走”，方向：here there 3)bring“带来，拿来”，方向： here there 4)fetch“(去)拿来，请来”,方向：here there 【课堂练习】 罗列并熟记文中的重点短语句型。 【要点归纳】 学会如何向别人表示感谢及掌握文章中出现的重点单词, 词组和句型。 【拓展练习】 一、用所给词的适当形式填空 1. There are many political and social _________(organize) in the world. 2. Your _____ (donate) is greatly appreciated. 3. This math exercise isn’t difficult. I can finish it ______(easy). 4. Everyone’s life is filled with ________(please). 5. The dress is made________ (special) for the Art Festival. 6. Liz Smith has a specially _______(train) dog. 二、单项选择 （ ）1. —I don’t know where Wenchuan County is. Could you help me? —Certainly，let me _____ a map of China for you. A.take B. bring C. fetch D. carry A. Can you _______the heavy box? B.Don’t forget to _______your book here. C.My Parents often ______me to the zoo. D.Lucky ! _______my book. E.The train ________apples. 跟踪练习： （ ）2. The box is _______ books. A. fill with B. full of C. filled of D. full with （ ）3. I’m ______ at this dog. A. amazing B. amaze C. amazed D. surprising （ ）4. They improved the software to make ______ easier for people to use computers. A. that B. this C. these D. it （ ）5. Please ______ the cup _____ milk or water. A. filled; with B. fill; use C. fill; with D. fill; of （ ）6. I’m going to see my friend ______ is ill in bed after school. A. which B. whose C. who D. whom 【课后反思】 Unit 3 could you please clean your room? Period 1 本课是 Unit3 的第一课时。其主目标是能用 “Could you please do things?” “Could I please do things?”谈论如何委婉地提出请 求或征求别人的许可, 及回答语“Sure / Certainly / I’m glad to .” 能礼貌地拒绝,“Sorry, I / you can’t,. I / you have to do…” 并表达自己的理由, 陈述自己的好恶。以 do housework 和调查做力 能所及的事为话题，学会运用“Could you please do things?”“Could I please do things?”是本课的语言目标。 一、 内容 Section A 1a----1c 二、 目标 1.学习词汇 do the dishes, sweep the floor, take out the trash. fold your clothes, clean the living room, do chores, have to do sth, like to do (doing) sth, make dinner, make your bed 2.句型 ---Could you please clean your room? ---Yes, sure. ---Could you please do the dishes? --- Sorry, I can’t. I have to do my homework. 三．单元重点和难点 1.重点。 1）学习一些常用的动词短语。 2）委婉地提出请求、征求许可做某事。 Could you/I please do things？ Yes, Sure. / 。I/You can. Sorry, I / you can’t,.., I / you have to do…” 2．难点。 在实际的生活中委婉地表达自己的请求和征求许可. 三、 教学过程 Pre-task 1. Warming up 看动画片段《灰姑娘》导如入本课话题和新词汇“chores”美丽善良 的灰姑娘因继母的嫉妒，每天得做所有的家务。片段的主题使学生联 想到本课的话题。 2. learn some new words and phrases Look! What is she / he doing? 看图学习动词词组 do chores, do the dishes, make the bed, take out the trash, fold the clothes, do the laundry, clean the living room. 3. Guessing game. According the phases that they have learned, the teacher asks some students to do some actions one by one. Then ask the others to answer these questions: What is she doing? What is he doing? 通过记忆力游戏，让学生适时对所学词汇进行回忆以及进一步的 巩固。并适当活跃课堂气氛。 4. Pair work. 1a, Do you do these things at home? Write “Y” for “yes” and “N” for “no”. 5. Listening . 1b , Peter’s chores or Mom’s chores? 理解目标语 Could you please clean your room? Yes, sure. Write “M” for Mom’s chores, “P” for Peter’s chores in the chart. 6. Pairwork,1c Look at the picture, Ask your partner to do the chores that you see. 7. Interview Who is the most able at home? 1) What chores do you do at home? How often do you do the chores? Work in four, interview each of the students in the group, fill in the chart. 2) Then one student make a report to the class. “In my group…. Does the dishes every day,…We think … is the most able one in our group.” 3) 颁奖。给每个小组里的最能干者发奖。适时给学生爱劳动，爱父 母的教育 8. 总结本节课的教学重点。 9.Homework Read the words and phrases you learn today. make a dialogue between you and your parent about doing the chores. Period 2 一、 教学内容 Section A 2a-4 二、 教学目标 1.词汇： stay out late, work on the computer, get a ride, use the car, go to a meeting, hate to do /dong sth 2.句型: ---Could I please go to the movies? ---Yes, you can. ---Could I please use the computer? --- No, you can’t. You must do the dishes at first. 三．单元重点和难点 1．重点。 1）学习和复习一些常用的动词短语。 2）委婉地提出请求、征求许可做某事。 ---Could I please use your computer? ---Sorry, you can’t.. ---Could I please watch TV? ---Yes, you can. But you have to clean your room first.. 3）学习如何请求他人的帮助。 2．难点。 1）表达看法： I like doing dishes because it’s relaxing, but I hate to do… because it’s boring. 2）区别 make 与 do 的用法 四. 教学过程。 1.Warming up Game “Chain drill”. 运用上节课的 target language “Could you please do…?”依次 问答，其中的动词短语不能重复 ,复习动词短语。 2．Listening. 2a ,2b Read the instructions. Learn the key vocabulary. stay out late, use the car, get a ride, go to a meeting, clean your room, 1) Peter ask his father if he can do four things. Check “yes” or “no” 2) Listen again, Why does Peter’s father say “no” Draw lines to the reasons in the chart. 3. Present target language 由听的活动 2a 引入 target language： A: Could I please get a ride? B: Yes, you can. A: Could I please get a ride? B: Sorry, you can’t, I have to go to a meeting. 4. Pair work 2c According the sample conversation, ask and answer in pairs. Then ask and answer in pairs in class. 5. 3a Fill in the blanks with “make” and ”do”. Get the students to read the dialogue in pairs, then act out it. 6. 3b Chores that you like or dislike, 1) 呈现 like doing/to do, hate doing 2) Make a list of chores that you like and dislike. 3) Pairwork.谈论喜欢和不喜欢的家务，并表达自己的看法。 A: Do you like doing dishes? B: Yes, I like …because it’s relaxing, No, I hate to do…because it’s boring. 7. Make a survey. Discuss in groups of four. Draw a smiling face on the chore you like and draw a crying face on the chore you dislike. Then give a report. 通过做调查，巩固句型 I like … because…以及 I don’t like … because… 调查表格附下： Chores Like Don’t like do the dishes sweep the floor take out the trash make your bed fold your clothes clean the living room 8. Game. Sorry! I can’t! Play the game in 4. 9．Grammar focus Could you please clean your room? Yes, sure. Could you please do the dishes? Sorry, I can’t. I have to do my homework. Could I please use the car? No, you can’t. I have to go out. Could I please go to the movies? Yes, you can. Pay attention to the questions and answers, ask and answer loud 10. Homework. Could I go to the party? The concert? / the football game?… 假如今晚你想去看球赛或者音乐会或做其他你想做的事，你请求父母 的许可。写一段对话。 Period 3 一、教学内容 Section B 1a-2c 二、教学目标 1. 词汇 invite my friends to …,buy some drinks and ,snacks, borrow some money r, teenager disagree 2. 掌握句型 . ---Could you please buy some drink and snacks? ---Sure. / Yes, I can. --- Could I borrow your money? ---Yes, you can.. Sorry, you can’t. 3.难点; 综合的运用单元的目标语针对实际情景解决问题. 三、教学准备 复习动词短语,并且预习生词, 游戏用的卡片 小奖品 四、教学过程 1.Revision: 1a This activity introduces the key vocabulary. Read the instructions in 1a. Read the items in the chart. And then fill in the chart on their own. Correct the answers. 2. Discussion (在屏幕上展示出刚才的动词短语) ., 1) 1a What can teenagers ask their parents to do? What do parents ask their teenagers to do? 学习用 I agree/ disagree 表示自己的观点. T: Come to the front , talk about your ideas.(.这个任务地目 标运用词汇进行表达, 同时渗透了对学生爱的教育,,爱父母,爱家 庭,爱劳动.) A:I think teenagers … B:I agree./ I don’t agree(disagree). I think … 2). Sally’s weekend. Ask: What chores does Sally do on weekends? What do you think of Sally? Then Show some photos of Sally. Step 2. Pairwork Make your own conversations about the items in activity 1a. T: Teenagers say, Could you clean your room ? S: No, I disagree. Parents say, Could you clean your room? Do a second example if the students wish. Then the students work in pairs. Ask several pairs to say their conversations to the class. 3. A game Practice with “Could you please…?”“Could I …?”将课前准 备的双色卡片(如:红/蓝)分发给学生,卡片以字母编号,同一编号的 有两张,上面有简笔画,规定获得红色卡片的学生先发问，根据卡片上 的简笔画回答。 Example: A 。 A 。 A: Could you please sweep the floor? A2: Sure! But I have to do my homework first. 4. Listening. 1) 2a Listen and check the things you hear.. 2) 2b Listen again., and fill in the chart. What is Sandy’s mother going to do ? What is Sandy going to do? What are Sandy and Dave going to do? 3) Listen to Happy birthday song.. 5. Group work. Make a telephone invitation and ask for help. (小组继续比赛) If you are sandy,, you want to invite you good friends to come to you party, and you need their help, too.. Make a list of things you want to buy and to do first, then discuss in group, act it out.. 让学生进行评价.评出有特色的“最佳表演”“最佳创意”“最…” 小组，给予奖励。 6．总结本课的 target language. 7．Homework. Invite your friends to have a picnic with you, and ask for their help to prepare for the picnic.. make a conversation. Period 4 一、教学内容 Section B 3a –3c & self check 二、教学目标 1.学习词汇 take care of, forget to do, feed the dog, move to a new house, take the dog for a walk 2.学习写留言条获得朋友的帮助。. 3.难点; 综合运用单元目标语,针对实际情景解决问题. 三、教学准备 复习词汇和句型. 四、教学过程 1. Warming up. 1) Memory challenge. 复习词汇 和 Target language Tom’s week. Students look at the chart for only one minute, then the chart is covered, Students say what Tom does on weekdays and weekends. 2) Do 1 in self check 2. . 3a Reading 1). Question: Do you have a dog or a bird ? How do you take care of it? Discus in pairs. 2) Read the e-mail message. Quickly. in 3a. What does Thomas ask Nancy to do? 3) 词汇分类.Which things are about food? Cleaning? Exercise? 4) 学习写求助的留言的方式法. 3. Help Sandy Complete the e -mail message. (3b and 3c),展示 优秀的作品. 4. Group work. “Help Wanted” 1) 给出不同的话题,让每个小组抽取一个话题,合作讨论, 写留言条 寻求帮助. 2) 然后将条子贴在黑板上,让每组学生代表上来,找到自己能做的事, 并和那个小组进行对话表演 . 5.总结. 6. Homework Revise Unit 3, complete the message in 2 of self check. 【课后反思】 Unit4 why don't you talk to your parents 【学习目标】： 1.学习单词：allow wrong midnight guess deal … 2.学习短语：What’s wrong Look through Bid deal Work out too many Too much get into a fight… 3.学习句子: What’s wrong ? I have to study too much… I have too many … Why don’t you go to sleep… 4.学会用 why don't you…提建议 【学习重、难点】： 1. 学习，掌握单词，词汇，短语并灵活运用. 2. 学会谈论问题和给出建议。 【温故检测】： 想一想，下列名称那些是可数名词，那些是不可数名词？ Homework, class , sleep , time, friend, advice, problem . 可数名词的有： 不可数名词的有： 【自习指导】：预习 1a 和 1b， 【自学检测】： 1. How many __________ (tomato) do you need? 2. I have __________(too many, too much) homework to do today . 3. My parents allow me __________( hang out ) with my friends. 4. I got __________(介词填空）a fight with my best friend. 5. Why don’t you __________(go) to sleep earlier this evening? 【合作交流】: 1.听录音，我来完成 1b。 2. Listening，完成 2a,2b. 3.重点句子学习： 1），你能区别 too much ,much too , too many 吗？请给大家讲 讲： 2）， 你会写：“允许某人做某事”吗？ _____________________________________ 3），学习，讨论: be good at …,善于，擅长，在，，，方面做得好。 Be good for，，，对，，，有益处。 Be good to 对，，，好（和善）。 Be good with，，，与，，，相处的好。 4），向别人发出邀请，请求，建议，或征求某人的意见的表达方式： (1), Why don’t you do something? /Why not do something? “ 你为什么 不做某事呢？” (2), How /what about doing sth.?（about 是个介词，可跟名 词或动名词）“…怎么样？” e.g.: How/what about the photo album? 一个像册怎么 样？ How about getting her a scarf? 买条围巾送给她怎么 样？ (3),You’d better (not) do something.“你最好（不）做某 事” (4), Would you like sth …?:“你想要某吗”物 (5), Let’s do sth…? (6). What should I do …?( should 表示请求、征询对方意 见) e.g.: What should I get my dad for his birthday? 我该送给爸爸什么作为他的生日礼物呢？ 【当堂训练】： 一．汉译英： 1. 去睡觉________________ 2. Get into a fight________ 3. 擅长________________ 4. 给某人打电话 _______________ 5. 闲逛_______________ 6.Look through_________ 二．就划线部分提问 1. We need two apples. ______ _______ apples ____ we need? 2. She needs some milk. ______ _______ milk ______ she need? 三. 写一写 你能准确的写出来吗？ 1.______ ______yo______ her a book? 你为什么不给她本 书哪? a scarf. ——围巾怎么样？ 2.Why not come over to join us? over to join us? 3. How about the sweater? do you the sweater? 4.What’s wrong ? What’s ? 第二课时 (Section A 3a-4c) 【学习目标】： 1.通过阅读这封信,我们学会遇到问题要主动地去和家人，朋友，同 学交流。 2.学习文章中出现的重点单词,词组和句型。 3.培养学生的阅读能力。 【学习重 难点】： 1.遇到问题要主动地去和家人，朋友，同学交流。 2.掌握文中出现的重点单词,词组和句型。 【温故检测】： S1: You look really tired .What’s the _______? S2: Why don’t you _______to sleep earlier . S3: You should talk _______them again . S4: Why don’t you forget about it _______ _______ you can be friends again? S5: Thanks for your _______ S6: That’s a good _______. 【自习指导】： 小组讨论学习 3a ，完成 Problems,Advice. 重点句子学习: 1.你能更大家讲讲 My problem is that Ican’t get on with my family . 这个句子吗？get on with sb 汉语是 3. They fight a lot,你知道这里为什么不用 a lot of 吗？ 4. offer vt 主动提出，自愿给予，提供，常见结构：offer to do sth , offer sb to do sth 和 offer sth to sb 5.afraid 的基本意思是"惧怕,害怕,不敢",有四种用法: （1）.be afraid of something 害怕 Don't be afraid of the dog. 别害怕那只狗。 （2）.与动词不定式连用, be afraid to do something.“不敢/ 害怕做某式” A lot of people are afraid to go out at night. 许多人不敢晚上出去。 (3).与 of 连用，be afraid of doing something.“害怕某事发 生” I don't like dogs. I'am always afraid of being bitten. 我不喜欢狗。我经常害怕被狗咬。 （4）.在给某人不愉快的信息时,通常用 I'am afraid,后接从句 I'm afraid I have some rather bad news for you. 恐怕我给你带来了坏消息。 6. 情态动词 should 的用法 should 是情态动词，它的基本用法是必须和其他动词一起构成 谓语。情态动词没有人称和数的变化，意为“应该……”。 should （应当，应该）用于所有人称，表示劝告或建议。 eg. You should wait a little more. 你应该再多等一会儿。 --- I have a very bad cold. 我感冒很厉害。 --- You should lie down and have a rest. 你应该躺下， 多喝水。 【当堂训练】： 一．单选： ( )1.How about ____ calendar? A. buy B. to buy C. buying ( )2. I believe that singing English songs help me ____ my English. A. improve B. improved C. improving ( )3.----In our English study, reading is more important than speaking, I think. ----I don’t agree. Speaking is ____ reading. A. as important as B. the most important C. the same ( )4.This box is ____ heavy ____ I can’t carry it. A. too, to B. so, that C. enough ,to ( )5.The book is ____, I couldn’t finish it. A. bore B. bored C. boring ( )6. Mum’s birthday is coming. What about _______ her some flowers? A. get B. getting C. to get D. got 二．话题写作： 你将代表学校参加中学生英语演讲比赛，演讲的题目是 Learning to get along with our parents. 请用英语写一篇演讲稿，内容如下： （1）现象：经常给父母发火，甚至几天不讲话。 （2）原因：父母过分关注分数，我们… (3)措施：我们应该和父母沟通，我们…我们… Good morning,ladies and gentlemem: Today my speech topic is Learning to get along with our parents. These days ,most of us feel it hard to get along with our parents. _______________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ______________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ __________ That’s all for my speech .thank you . 第三课时（Section B 1a-2a) 【学习目标】： 1). 能掌握本节课的单词,句子：member， pressure… My parents give me a lot of pressure about school . 2) . 进行听力训练，提高综合听说能力。 3) . 遇到问题要主动地去和家人，朋友，同学交流，学会放松，缓 解压力。 【学习重、难点】： 1) 进行听力训练，提高综合听说能力。 1）.听力训练 温故知新： 复习 Unit4 Section A Grammar Focus 中的句子，看看你能背 写下了吗？ 自主互助学习： 和同桌合作完成 Unit4 Section B 1a,1b 听力训练 1. 认真听录音完成了 1c 和 1d。 2. 再听录音核对答案。 3. 综合提高 ：小组分角色朗读听力材料中的对话。 重点语法学习： Until, so that ,although 引导的状语从句： Until：在带有 till 或 until 引导的时间状语从句从句里，如 果主句用肯定式，其含义是“一直到……时”，谓语动词只能用延续 性动词。如果主句用否定式，其含义是“直到……才……”, “在…… 以前不……”, 谓语动词可用瞬间动词。 例如： The young man read till the light went out. Let’s wait until the rain stops. We won’t start until Bob come Don’t get off until the bus stops. so that：引导目的状语从句 so that（为了，以便） 例如：We started early so that we could catch the first train. He studies hard so that he could work better in the future Although：although 的用法意思相当于 though（尽管，虽然），用来 引导让步状语从句。它所引导的从句不能与并列连词 but，and， so 等连用，但可以和 yet， still 等词连用。 例如：① Although the book was old, we decided to buy it. 尽管这本书很旧，我们还是决定买。 ② Although he was tired, he went on working. 【当堂训练】： 一 . 根据提示完成单词。 1. What’s _________ （毛病）？ --- I can’t find my key. 2. Helen doesn’t want to help him, ________ （也） . 3. My sister didn’t pass the exam, so she is very u_______ . 4. The magazine is i________ （不贵） , and you can take it. 二．选择填空 1. Maybe you should __________ . A. call in her B. call up her C. call her up 2. Brian doesn’t like __________ . A. reading B. read C. reads 3. Yesterday I went to the library. Henry went there, ________ . A. either B. too C. also 4. Charles’ cousin is the same age ________ him. They get on well ______ each other. A. as, with B. as, on C. as, in 5. _______ he’s old, he can still carry this heavy bag. A. Though B. Since C. For 6.. I hurried _____ I wouldn’t be late for class. A. since B. so that C. unless 7.The teacher raised his voice _______ all the students could hear him. A. for B. so that C. because 8 .We won’t start ______ Bob comes. A. until B .if C. unless 三．根据学习的知识，完成对话： Boy1: Hey,Peter,what's __1___? Boy2: I had an argument __2___ my best friend.What ___3__ I do? Boy1: Well,you should ___4__him a letter. Boy2 :I don't think so. I don't like writing letters. Boy1: Maybe you should _5____ him up. Boy2: No,I don't want __6___alk about it_7____the phone. Boy1: Well,you should say you're sorry. Boy2 :Yes,I know I should,but it's not easy. Boy1: Maybe you could go to his house. Boy2: I guess I could,but I don't want to _8____ him. Boy1: Hey,I know.You could give him a ticket to a ball gama. Boy2: Well,that's a good ____9_,but I don't have__10___ money. 第四课时 (Section B 2b-3b) 【学习目标】： 1).掌握下列单词及短语： not…until .fit…into. too much pressure. complain…about. Free ,freedom… 2).掌握句型： 1.The tired children don’ t get home until 7pm. 2.Teacher complain about teaching tired kids in the classroom… 3) . 遇到问题要主动地去和家人，朋友，同学交流，学会放松，缓 解压力。 【学习重、难点】： 1). 句 式 ： not … untill , It ’ s time for sth./It ’ s time to do sth, find it +形+to do sth. 2).学会放松，缓解压力。 温故知新： 1. after-school activities 课外活动 2.be worried about 担心 3. from…to… 从…到… 4. not…until 直到…才（谓语动词 一般是非延续动词 5. be afraid of 害怕 6. It’ s time for sth./It’ s time to do sth.该做..的时间到 了 8. compare…with…比较，对比 9. too much pressure 太大压力 10.complain about doing sth 抱怨做某事 11.take part in=join in 参加（某种活动/集会） 12.see sb. doing sth.看到某人正在做… 13.compare…with…把… 与…比较 14.nothing new 没什么新鲜的事 15.all kinds of 各种 各样 16.find it +形 to do...发现做某事…… 17.on the one hand 一方面 18.on the other hand 另 一方面 19.free(自由的)------freedom(自由) 自主互助学习 1. 阅读 Unit4 Section B 2b 合作完成 2c，2d，核对答案。 2. 阅读文章指出中心句。 3. 读熟文章。 【当堂训练】： 一、 单项选择 ( )1.Teachers complain about _____________tired kids in the classroom. A.teach B.taught C.teaching D.teaches ( )2.I ___________home until finish my homework. A.won’ t go B.will go C.go D.went ( )3.It’ s time ______homework. A.at B.for C.to D.with ( )4.It’ s time ______ do homework. A.at B.for C.to D.with ( )5.They’ re ____________. A.enough busy B.busy enough C.enough busies D.busy to enough 6.I feel under_________(press). 7.He may find it difficult____________(learn) English. 8.Parents should give us more________(free). 9.______________(一方面)， He is a good student. 10._____________(另一方面)， He speaks English very well. 第五课时 Self Check 【学习目标】： 1.掌握本单元中的重点词汇，短语，并灵活运用，学会谈论问 题和提出建议。 2.遇到问题要主动地去和家人，朋友，同学交流,要学会放松， 缓解压力。 【学习重、难点】： 1.本单元重点词汇，短语，结构。 2.遇到问题要主动地去和家人，朋友，同学交流,要学会放松， 缓解压力 【自习检测】： 一、 单项选择 ( )1. If you don’t go to the park, I won’t go, ______. A. too B. also C. either ( )2. We saw his sister _____ here at that moment. A. play B. played C. playing ( )3. —When will she go home? —She ______ home until she finishes her work. A. won’t go B. didn’t go C. will go ( )4. Yesterday, they talked about something important ______ the phone. A. in B. of C. on ( )5 My sister spends some time ________ on weekends. A. reading B. to read C. reads ( )6. —Let’s go to the zoo .—_______. A. Hold on, please B. Of course C. Good idea ( )7. —It seems that today is ______ yesterday. —Yes, you should wear a warm coat. A. as hot as B. as cold as C. so cold as ( )8. She looked ________ when she heard the _______ news. A. surprised; surprising B. surprising; surprised C. surprising; surprising ( )9. —I can’t find him. What should I do? —Maybe you should ____. A. call him up B. keep him out C. hear of him 二. 完形填空 Many parents want their children to be famous one day. But do children have the same___1__? A new__2____—Hi, Ke'ai is on at Beijing Children's Art Theatre. It tells the story of a boy called Ke'ai. His parents would like him to become a painter or a __3_____ one day. They teach him to __4__and to play the violin, but Ke'ai doesn't enjoy these activities. Then one day Ke'ai's parents see Liu Xiang win a gold___5___ at the Athens Olympic Games, and they want him to be a sportsman. "___6___do they want me to be someone else?" Ke'ai asks and says, "I only want to be____7______." The play shows us that it is good for parents to learn to _____8_____their children. It helps parents to think about what kids want to do. Young audiences(观众)enjoy the story, and also the___9___in the play. There are two songs in the play. One of them, "Ke'ai's Song" is very ___10_____to learn, so the audiences can sing the song on their way home after the play! 【1】 A．jobs B．dreams C．habits D．hobbies 【2】 A．song B．film C．play D．opera 【3】 A．writer B．teacher C．sportsman D．musician 【4】 A．paint B．write C．run D．drive 【5】 A．match B．ring C．medal D．race 【6】 A．How B．Why C．When D．Where 【7】 A．myself B．different C．alone D．great 【8】 A．encourage B．understand C．criticize D．inspire 【9】 A．light B．clothes C．skill D．music 【10】 A．easy B．difficult C．important D．necessary 三．根据情景选择适当的句子,补全对话 A: _____ 1 You look unhappy. B: I want to buy a computer_____ 2 A: Well, you could borrow some from your brother. B:_____ 3 Because my brother doesn’t have money, either. A: Maybe you should ask your parents for some money. B: No, I don’t think so. A:_____ 4 B: Because they don’t want me to spend more time playing computer games. A: Then I think you should get a part-time job. B:_____5 A. Why? B. That’s a good idea. C. What’s wrong with you? D. But I don’t have enough money. E. I’m afraid I can’t. 书面表达 假如你是 Linda,你的笔友 Sally 性格比较内向,不善 于与人交往,与同学的关系也不太融洽,所以她在学习生活中的压力 很大,请你给她写封信,提一些建议。注意:60 词左右。 __________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________ ________________________________________ 【课后反思】: Unit 5 What were you doing when the rainstorm came? 教学目标： 1 语言目标：能运用过去时态描写过去发生的事情 2 技能目标：能听懂有关过去发生事件，能简单描写过去发后的 事件 3 情感目标：能过学习本课，培养学生在困境中互帮互助的品质 教学重点 单词短语: rainstorm, suddenly, alarm , go off , pick up , strange, report, area, wood, light, window, match, beat, heavily, against, asleep, fall asleep, die down, rise, apart, passage, pupil, bright, play ground, bell, completely, silence, in silence, recently, date, tower, at first, realize, truth 句子: 1. What were you doing at eight last night? I was taking a shower. 2. What was she doing at the time of the rainstorm? She was doing her homework. 3. What was he doing when the rainstorm came? He was reading in the library when the rainstorm came. 4. What was Ben doing when it began to rain heavily? When it began to rain, Ben was helping his mom make dinner. 5. What was Jenny doing while Linda was sleeping? While Linda was sleeping, Jenny was helping Mary with her homework 语法：过去进行时。 教学难点: when, while 引导的时间状语从句中的过去时和过去进 行时 课时划分 Section A 1 (1a -2d) Section A 2 (3a-3c) Section A 3 (Grammar Focus-4c) Section B 1 (1a-2e) Section B 2 (3a-self check) Section A 1 (1a-2d) Step 1 Warming up Yesterday, there was a rainstorm. Where were they when the rainstorm came? Here are some reports. For example: A: Where were you when the rainstorm came? B: I was in the library. A: What were you doing when the rainstorm came? B: I was waiting for the bus at the bus stop. 1a Where were the people at the time of the rainstorm? Match the statements with the people in the picture. 1. _____ I was in the library. 2. _____ I was in my house. 3._____ I was on the street. 4._____ I was at the bus stop. Step 2 Listening：What were they doing when the rainstorm came? Let’s listen. Pay attention to “was/were +doing” 1b Listen to the TV report and circle the correct response. a. doing my homework / studying b. playing basketball / reading c. going to work / waiting for the bus d. walking home / shopping Step 3 Speaking Look at the pictures and answer the questions by using “was/were + doing” For example: A: What was the boy doing at the time of the rainstorm? B: He _____________________. Pair work: 1c Talk about what the people in 1a were doing at the time of the rainstorm. Step 4 Listening 2a Listen and number the pictures 1-5. 2b Listen again. Fill in the blanks in the sentences in 2a. Step 5 Speaking 2c Use the information in 2a to retell the story in a conversation between the boy and a TV reporter. 2d Role play the conversation. Step 6 Language points 1. My alarm didn’t go off so I woke up late. alarm n. 闹钟 e.g. What time shall I set the alarm for? 我该把闹钟拨到几点钟响？ 2. I was waiting for the bus when it began to rain heavily. 1) begin v. (began) 开始 e.g. I’ll begin whenever you’re ready. 你什么时候准备好我就开始。 常用的句型： begin to do 与 begin doing 一般来说，begin to do 和 begin doing 可以互换，但在以下三种 情况下，用 to do。 I. 主语不是指人，而是 it 等。 如：It began to rain. II. begin 后接表示心理活动的词。如：begin to know 还有 believe, wonder, think 等词。 III. begin 本身是 ing 形式，为避免重复后接 to do。即：beginning to do 2) heavily adv. 在很大程度上；大量地 e.g. moving heavily 吃力地移动 It was raining heavily. 雨下得很大。 3. So, when the rainstorm suddenly came, … suddenly adv. 突然；忽然 e.g. I suddenly remembered that I hadn’t locked the door. 我忽然想起没有锁门。 4. That’s strange. strange adj. 奇特的，奇怪的；不可思议的 e.g. a strange noise 奇怪的声音 He’s always here; it’s strange you’ve never met him. 他经常在这，你却没有见过他，真是不可思议。 5. I called at seven and you didn’t pick up. pick up(=pick up the phone) 接电话 pick up 还有以下含义： 1) 拾起；抱起 e.g. The children picked up many sea shells at the seashore. 孩子们在海边捡到许多贝壳。 Pick that book up. 把那本书拣起来。 2) 搭载 e.g. The car stopped to pick me up. 汽车停下来接我。 Step 7 Speaking Make a survey. Ask your partners in your group what they were doing at the following time. Fill in the form then give a report. Time Names doing Yesterday 7:00 Tom reading Peter shopping Yesterday 8:00 Tom walking Peter … Yesterday 9:00 … … Report: Tom was reading. Peter was shopping… A: What were you doing yesterday at 7:00? B: I was reading. Step 8 Summary 1. 在图书馆 in the library 2. 在的时候 at the time of 3. 去上班 go to work 4. 等公共汽车 wait for the bus 5. 走路回家 walk home 6. 在街上 on the street 7. 打篮球 play basketball 8. 弹钢琴 play the piano Step 9 Exercise 根据上下文内容填空。 Mary: What ______ you doing last night, Linda? I called at seven and you didn’t pick ____. Linda: Oh, I was in the kitchen helping my mom. Mary: I see. I called _____ at 8 and you didn’t _______ then either. Linda: What was I doing at 8? Oh, I know. When you called, I was ______ a shower. Mary: But then I called again at 9. Linda: Oh, I _____ sleeping at that time. Mary: So early? That’s strange. Linda: Yeah, I was tired. Why _____ you call so many times? Mary: I needed help with my homework. So while you were ________, I called Jenny and she helped me. Step 10 Homework 1. Remember the words and phrases in this lesson. 2. Finish the exercises in the workbook. Section A 2 (3a-3c) Step 1 Revision 1. Ask students to talk about what they were doing last night in groups of four then give a report. 2. 写出下列短语 在图书馆 in the library 在……的时候 at the time of 去上班 go to work 等公共汽车 wait for the bus 走路回家 walk home 在街上 on the street 打篮球 play basketball Step 2 Presentation Ask the students to look at the picture and think about what has happened. Step 3 Reading 3a Read the passage quickly and answer the following questions 1) What was the weather like before the heavy ran started? 2）What was the neighborhood like after the storm? Keys: 1. Black clouds were making the sky very dark. With no light outside, it felt like midnight. 2. The neighborhood was in a mess. 3b Read the passage again and complete the sentences using information from the passage. 1) When the news on TV was reported, strong winds were _____________ outside. 2）While Ben’s mom was making sure the radio was working, his dad ________________. 3) Ben _____________________ when the heavy rain finally started. 4) When Ben _______________at 3:00 a.m., the wind _________________. Keys: 1) were blowing 2) was putting pieces of wood over the windows 3) was helping his mom make dinner 4) fell asleep: was dying down Step 4 Speaking 3c Discuss the questions with a partner. “Although the storm broke many things apart, it brought families and neighbors closer together.” What other can bring people closer together? How can we help each other in times of difficulty? Step 5 Language points 1. With no light outside, it felt like midnight. 此句中介词 with 表示一种伴随状况，同时还包含着某种因果关系， 表示“因某 种状况的存在而导致……”, 因此可翻译成“由于；因为”等。 e.g. With my parents away, I’m the king of the house. 我爸妈不在家，我可是家中的“王”了！ I can’t work with all that noise going on. 由于那噪音响着，我无法工作。 2. Ben’s dad… while his mom was making sure the flashlights and radio were working. 1) 此句中的连词 while 的意思是 “当……的时候；和……同时”， while 还可以表示“而；然而；但”之意，用来说明和强调两种 事情或情形不同。 e.g. Tom is active and outgoing while his sister Rosa is shy and quiet. 汤姆活跃外向，而他的妹妹罗莎却害羞腼腆。 2) make sure“确认，查明，核实；确保；设法保证”，其后可接句 子，或接介词 of 及宾语，用来引入需要确认的内容。 e.g. Could you make sure what time he’s arriving? 你能确认一下他几点到达吗？ Make sure you turn off the TV before you leave the house. 在你离开屋子前确认关闭了电视。 3) 此句中的 work 表示机器，器官等 “运作，运转”，这是动词 work 的一种基本 用法。 e.g. My watch is waterproof— that means it would work fine even if it’s in water. 我的手表是防水的— 这就是说即便在水里 它也会正常运转。 3. It was hard to have fun with a serious storm happening outside. It is adj.+ to do sth. 做……怎么样。 It is adj. for sb. to do sth. 对某人来说做……怎么样。 e.g. It is important for us to learn English. 对我们来说学英 语很重要。 活学活用： 1. 在街上踢球很危险。 It is _______________ soccer on the street. 2. 每天早上读书对你来说很有必要。 It is ________ for you _______ in the morning. 3. 对他来说完成作业很容易 It is ____ for him __________________. 4. He finally fell asleep when the wind was dying down at around 3:00 a.m. fall asleep 进入梦乡，睡着 asleep adj. 睡着 区别 sleepy, asleep & sleep sleepy 是形容词，可意为 “困倦的；瞌睡的”，可作定语和表语。 如： I’ll go to bed. I’m sleepy. 我要去睡觉了。我困了。 asleep 是形容词，意思是“睡着的”，强调状态，常作表语。短语 fall asleep 意为“入睡；睡着”。如： Grandma fell asleep when watching TV. 奶奶看电视时睡着了。 sleep 可作动词，意为 “睡觉”，也可作名词，意为“睡眠；睡觉”。 如： My father is sleeping. Please keep quiet. 我父亲在睡觉，请 保持安静。 die down 逐渐变弱，逐渐平息 e.g. When you saw him, his anger had died down a bit. 你看见他的时候，他的火气已经下去了。 5. When he woke up, the sun was rising. rise 是不及物动词，意为：（价格、水位等）上涨；（月亮、太阳等） 上升。 e.g. It is too hot. The temperature rises by 6℃ today. 太热了。今天的气温一下子上升了 6 摄氏度。 Step 6 重点短语 feel like at first fall asleep die down make sure wake up in a mess clean up help each other in times of difficulty Homework Read the text and remember the language points. Preview next lesson. Section A 3 (Grammar focus-4c) Step 1 Revision Look at the pictures and make up the sentences. Step 2 Grammar Focus 读下列句子，能否总结出句子中包含的语法？ 1. What were you doing at eight last night? I was taking a shower. 2. What was she doing at the time of the rainstorm? She was doing her homework. 3. What was he doing when the rainstorm came? He was reading in the library when the rainstorm came. 4. What was Ben doing when it began to rain heavily? When it began to rain, Ben was helping his mom make dinner. 5. What was Jenny doing while Linda was sleeping? While Linda was sleeping, Jenny was helping Mary with her homework. Step 3 过去进行时 1. 基本概念：过去进行时表示在过去某一时刻或一段时间内正 在进行的动作。这一特定的过去时间除有上下文暗 示以外, 一般用时间状语来表示。 2. 结构 was / were ( not ) + 动词-ing 3. 句式 肯定式： I/He/She/It was working. We/You/They/ were working. 否定式: I/He/She/It was not working. We/You/They/ were not working. 疑问式和简略回答: Was I working? Yes, you were. No, you were not. Were you working? Yes, I was. No, I was not. Was he/she/it working? Yes, he/she/it was. No, he/she/it was not. Were we/you/they working? Yes, you/we/they were. No, you/we/they were not. 注： 1) was not 常缩略为 wasn’t; were not 常缩略为 weren’t。 2) 一般过去时与过去进行时用法的比较: 一般过去时表示在 过去某个时间发生过的动作或存在的状态, 而过去进行时则 表示在过去某一时刻或某一段时间正在进行的动作。 例如: David wrote a letter to his friend last night. 大卫昨晚给他的朋友写了封信。(信写完了。) David was writing a letter to his friend last night. 大卫昨晚一直在给他的朋友写信。(信不一定写完。) Practice: Look at the picture and make up the dialogues. Step 4 过去进行时中的 when 和 while when 和 while 都可表示“当……的时候”，引导时间状语从 句。你知道两者在过去进行时中的用法有什么不同吗？ 请仔细观察下面的例句，然后补全空格中的内容。 ① I was walking to school when I saw a cat in a tree. ② When Sally arrived home, her mother was cleaning the house. 主句的动作是持续性的，而从句动作是短暂性的，此时用 _______引导时间状语从句，主句用_____________时态， 从句用一般过去时态。 ③ While I was sleeping in the bedroom, someone knocked at the door. ④ David fell while he was riding his bike. 主句的动作是短暂性的，从句的动作是持续性的，此时用 _________引导从句，主句用____________时态，从句用 过去进行时态。 ⑤ While Andy was waiting for the bus, he was reading a newspaper. ⑥ He was cleaning his car while I was cooking. 主句和从句的动作在过去的某时刻或某段时间同时发生， 而且动作都是持续性的，此时用_________引导从句，而且 主句和从句都用_____________时态。 Practice: 汉译英。 Step 5 活学活用 4a. Look at the table and write sentences with both while and when. John Mary take photos buy a drink play the piano leave the house clean his room turn on the radio shop take the car to the car wash 4b. Fill in the blanks with was, were, when or while. At 7:00 a.m., I woke up. _____ I ____ making my breakfast, my brother ______ listening to the radio. ________ I was eating, the radio news talked about a car accident near our home. My brother and I went out right away to have a look. _____ we got to the place of the accident, the car _____ in bad shape from hitting a tree. But luckily the driver ____ fine. The roads ______ icy because of the heavy snow from the night before. Step 6 Speaking 4c. What were you doing at these times last Sunday? Fill in the chart. Then ask your partner. Step 7 Exercises I. 根据汉语意思完成下列英语句子，每空一词。 1. 昨天下午五点钟你哥哥在做什么？ What ________ your brother ________ at five yesterday afternoon? 2. 昨天我回到家时，我妈妈在洗衣服。 My mother _____ ________ clothes ________ I ________ home yesterday. 3. 你做作业时，你妹妹在干什么？ What ________ your sister ________ ________ you ________ ________ your homework? Ⅱ. 根据各题后括号内的要求完成下列各题，每空一词（含缩略 形式）。 1. I was running in the park at 7:00 yesterday morning. (改 为一般疑问句并作肯定回答) You Your partner 9:00 a.m. 11:30 a.m. 4:00 p.m. 9:00 p.m. —________ ________ ________ in the park at 7:00 yesterday morning? —________, ________ ________. 2. I was flying kites with my friends at this time last Sunday. (对划线部分提问) ________ ________ ________ ________ at this time last Sunday? 3. They were playing basketball from three to four yesterday. (改为否定句) They ________ ________ basketball from three to four yesterday. Step 8 Homework After class, please make some dialogues with the phrases and sentences in 4c. Section B 1 (1a-2e) Step 1 Presentation 1a Think of a time when you were late for or couldn’t go to an event. What was the event? What was the reason why you were late or couldn’t go? Tell your partner the story. Step 2 Listening What happened to the girl? Let’s listen. 1b. Listen and write short answers to the questions. 1. What event happened at the school yesterday? 2. Who missed the event? 3. Which team won at the event? 1c Listen again. Number the events 1-6 in the order they happened. ____ Kate saw a dog by the side of the road. ____ Kate got to the bus stop. ____ Kate called the Animal Helpline. ____ Kate left the house. ____ Kate waited for someone to walk by. ____ Kate realized her bag was still at home. Step 3 Speaking 1d. Talk about why Kate missed the school basketball competition. Student A begins a sentence with while or when. Student B completes the sentence. A: When she got to the bus stop, Kate … B: When she got to the bus stop, Kate realized that her bag was still at home. A: While she was running back home, … B: While she was running back home, she saw a dog by the side of the road. Step 4 Presentation 2a. Look at the pictures and the title in the passage. What do you think the passage is about? 阅读指导： Read the title and first Sentences. The title can be helpful for you to understand a text. It is also a good idea to read the first sentence of each paragraph before you read the whole text. Step 5 Reading 2b. Read the passage and answer the questions. 1. What are the two events in the passage? 2. When did they happen? 2c. Read the passage again. Are the following statements true (T) or false (F), or is the information not given (NG)? ___ 1. Everyone in American remembers who killed Dr. King. ___ 2. Robert Allen was eating lunch when Dr. King was killed. ___ 3. Robert’s parents were shocked to hear the news. ___ 4. Kate Smith was watching a movie when a plane hit the World Trade Center. ___ 5. Kate didn’t think her friend was telling the truth about the event. 2d. Underline sentences from the passage with similar meanings to the ones below. 1. Not everyone will remember who killed him, but they can remember what they were doing when they heard that he got killed. 2. No one said anything for the rest of dinner. 3. September 11, 2001---- the date alone means something to most people in the US. 4. I had trouble thinking clearly after that because I was very afraid. Step 6 Language points 1. passage n. 章节，段落 passage 作“(文章的)段落”解时, 不限于文章的一个自然段, 也 可以由若干句话或若干个 paragraphs 组成。 passage 也可作“一段, 一节”解, 一般指讲话、文章或乐曲的 一部分。 e.g. The teacher spent an hour in explaining this passage. 老师用了一小时来讲解这一段。 Choose the correct order of the following sentences to form a passage. 把下列句子排好顺序组成一篇短文。 2. My parents were completely shocked! completely adv. 彻底地，完全地 e.g. I understand completely. 我完全明白。 shocked adj. 惊愕的；受震惊的 e.g. She was so shocked that she could hardly say a word. 她大为震惊，几乎一句话也说不出来。 [即学即练] 翻译下列句子。 1) 看到邻居那样对待孩子我很惊愕。 2) 他对她抽烟感到很震惊。 3. My parents did not talk after that, and we finished the rest of our dinner in silence. in silence 沉默，无声 without speaking or making a sound; silently e.g. Many patients were waiting in silence. 许多病人在静静地等候着。 A hundred and fifty reporters sat in silence. 在场的 150 名记者静静地坐在那里。 4. I didn’t believe him at first. at first “起初，首先”，作为介词短语，只起副词作用（在句 中用作状语）。 at first 主要用于强调前后对照，暗示接下去的 动作与前面的动作不同甚至相反，因此常有 but, afterwards, soon, at last 等相呼应。 e.g. At first we used hand tools. 首先我们使用手工工具。 At first I didn’t want to go, but soon I changed my mind. 我开始不想去，但我很快就改变了主意。 Step 7 Speaking 2e. How much do you remember about the events in the passage? Test your partner. A: When did Dr. Martin Luther King die? B: He died on … Step 8 Summary 1. 在历史上 in history 2. 默默地 in silence 3. 首先 at first 4. 讲实话 tell the truth 5. 做......感到吃惊 be shocked to do sth. 6. 做某事有麻烦 have trouble doing sth. 7. 如此......以致 so … that Step 9 Homework 1. Remember the words and phrases in this lesson. 2. Finish the exercises in the workbook. Section B 2 (3a – Self check) Step 1 Free talk Look at the picture and talk about what they were doing when the plane hit the World Trade Center. Step 2 Presentation 3a Make notes about an event you remember well. What was the event? When did it happen? Where did it happen? What were you doing? What were your friends doing? Why was it important? Why do you remember this event? Step 3 Writing 3b Write a short article about the important event in 3a. Try to write three paragraphs. First, write about the event (when and where it happened). Next, write about what you and some of your friends were doing when this event happened. Then, write about why this event was important. An important event that I remember well was _____________________. It happened in/on _____________ at /in __________________. When I heard the news of this event/ When this event happened, I was ____________. My friends were _________________. This event is very important to me because _____________. /I remember this event well because _________________. One possible version An important event that I remember well was Wenchuan Earthquake. It happened on May 12, 2008 in Wenchuan, Sichuan. When I heard the news of this event, I was working. My friends were watching games on TV. This event is very important to me because many people died in the earthquake. They need some help. Lots of people came to help them. 【课后反思】 Unit 6 An old man tried to move the mountains. 第一课时 Section A (I) 一 自主学习 1.（1）预习 Page41 页词汇（2）能熟练运用描绘身 体部位的词汇。 （3）学生明确学习目标 （4）质疑释疑 1.An old man tried to move the mountains. try 是动词，意为“试图，设法” 如：我正设法算出这道数学题。 动词 try 还表示“试”、“尝试”，“试用” 你试过种药了吗？ 拓展：try 搭配的词组：try to do sth 设法做某事；try on 试穿； try out 尝试，实验；try one’s best 尽全力；have a try 试一下。 随手练：⑴明天我将尽量早来。 ⑵他还没有试穿过这件毛衣。 ⑶我们的老师总是尝试一些新的想法。 ⑷Lucy 将尽力赶上其他同学。 ⑸让我试一下。 2 与 how 有关的短语：how big 多大、how far 多远、 how soon 多 久、how long 多长、how often 多少一次、how wide 多宽、how manymuch 多少 ⑴这条街多宽？ ⑵你妈妈多久回来？ ⑶从车站到超市多远？ 3. In 1972, it was discovered that they are endangered. 1972 年，人们发现它们已经濒于灭绝。 was discovered 是一般过去时的被动语态，discover“发现”，近义 词为 find 和 invent。 【友情链接】discover, invent 与 find ◎discover 指发现过去所不知道的东西，新奇或意外的东西。 Coal was first discovered and used in China. 中国首先发现并 使用了煤。 Columbus discovered America on the 12th of October, 1492. 1492 年 10 月 12 日，哥伦布发现了美洲。 ◎invent 意为“发明”，即创造出以前从未存在过的东西。 Edison invented the electric lamp.爱迪生发明了电灯。 Radio had just been invented then.那时无线电刚刚发明出来。 ◎find 意为“找到”，侧重于找到过去丢失的人或物，但有时也表示 凭经验或偶然发现了一种东西。 Today, corn is found all over the world.今天，全世界都有了玉 米。 She found him a very good pupil.她发现他是个非常好的学生。 ◎有时 find 和 discover 可以互相替代，意思相同。 His notebook was found/discovered in the desk. 他的笔记本 是在课桌里找到的。 4.Some of the swamps have become polluted. 一些沼泽地受到了 污染。 have become polluted 中的 become 是连系动词，polluted 是过去 分词。这种“系动词+过去分词”结构，意思上也接近被动语态。 The slodier got wounded(接近 were wounded)in the battle. 这几名战士在这场战斗中受了伤。 A few minutes later, the ground became/was covered with snow. 几分钟后地上尽是雪。 5.I’m like this animal because I am strong and intelligent.I like water,and I like to eat vegetables. 我像这种动物因为我有强壮又聪明。我喜欢水，我喜欢吃蔬菜。 be like 像 look like 看起来像 like sth.喜欢某物 like to do sth. 喜欢做某事 like sb. To do sth.喜欢某人做某事 (五)当堂检测 I. 单项选择： （）1.There used to be river in front of the city, ?A.did it B.usedn’t it C.didn’t thereD.did there （ ）2.Let’s turn the radio down.Your father .A.is sleeping B.slept C.sleeps D.is sleep （ ）3.—Where is Bob?—He to the library.A.is going B.has been C.went D.has gone （ ）4.Another zoo in the city .A.built B.has builtC.is being built D.will being built （ ）5.How long may I your bike ?A.lend B.borrow C.keep D.get （ ）6.The animals are made in the zoo .A.live B.to live C.living D.to living （ ）7.I don’t know when he ,but if he ,I’ll call you . A.comes,comes B.will come, comes C.comes,will come D.will come,will come 用所给动词的适当形式填空。 1.Knives are (use)to cut things . 2.The children were told that the sun (rise)in the east. 3.Sundenly I realized someone (follow)me. 4.He’s lived here since he (come)to the city . 5.He likes me______(go) swimming with him this afternoon. 第二课时 Section A （II） （一）.自主学习：掌握单词 remind god weak instead of hide magic （二）质疑释疑 1．against 介词必须和 be 或其它动词一起用，表示“与……对抗” Our school played against K High School at baseball. We are for peace and against war. 2、visit 及物动词，名词是 visitor 也可用作名词，表示参观.访问. 常构成词组 make a visit to……(参观，访问)be on a visit to……（正在参 观/访问中）go on a visit to……（去访问，去参观）This is my first visit to Beijing. Mr. Brown is on a visit to China. 3． Keep 的用法，keep doing sth. 意思是继续不断的做某事， 一直做某事. The baby kept crying until his mother came back. keep 其他用 法 (1)．keep+adj. 意思是保持某种状态 You must keep quiet in the library. (2). keep+sb/sth +表地点的介词短语。意思是让某人一直在某地， you’d better keep the chicken in the fridge. (3). Keep sb,/sth.from doing sth.意思是防止某人/某物做某事. The policemen kept the children form crossing the road when it was dangerous. (4). Keep on doing sth.意思是反复做某事.Don’t keep on shouting at me. 3.They provide homes for many endangered animals.他们为许多 濒临灭绝动物提供家园… provide 是及物动词，意为“提供”，“供给”。表示“提供……人…… 物 件 ” 是 provide...with... ；“ 提 供 … … 给 … … 人 ” 是 provide...for...。 The school provides us with all the materials we need. 学校提供我们所需要的一切资料。 We are provided with everything we need for work. 我们被提供了工作所需要的一切。 The school provides all the books we need for us. 学校为我们提供我们需要的书籍。 【友情提示】 ◎ provide for 是“供养”的意思。 He has a large family to provide for. 他要养活一个大家庭。 4. and help to educate the public about caring for them.(P120) 并且帮助教育公众关爱它们。 care for 表示“喜欢”，“关心”之意，后接名词或 v-ing 形式作宾 语，take care of 也有这个意思。 He cared nothing for skating. 他对滑冰没有兴趣。 In our class, we care for each other. 在我们班上，我们相互关 心。 Maria takes good care of everybody. 玛丽亚很关心大家。 【友情链接】care for 还可以表示“照顾”，“照料”，相当于 take care of 或 look after。 At night he fed and cared for the cattle. 夜里他照料牲口，给 牲口喂食。 You must care for yourselves. =You must look after yourselves.你们要照顾好自己。 The children are well cared for in the nurseries. =The children are taken good care of in the nurseries. 孩子们在托儿所受到很好的照顾。 （三）．当堂检测 Ⅰ.从方框中选择适当的单词，并用其正确的形式填入句子中。有些 选项是多余的。 1.Many people are worried about the __________ animals. 2.Have you ever________ a zoo before? 3.I don’t think zoos are _________ places for animals to live. 4.Tigers and some dangerous animals ____________ in cages in the zoo. 5.It’s necessary __________the zoo. 6.A zoo is a ___________ textbook for us. 7.This TV program __________ people to protect the environment. 8.Some large animals can_________ move in the cage. Ⅱ.根据句意和首字母提示，完成句中单词。 1.It’s dangerous for animals to drink if the water becomes p . 2.Some animals are g and friendly to people. 3.The animal weighs about 200 p . 4.This is a habitat that has never been d by people. 5.Do you know the r why they didn’t come? 6.The nose of the elephant is about two meters l . 7.Zoos are places of great p for some endangered animals. Ⅲ.句型转换 1.Some endangered animals are looked after in the zoo.（改为 同义句） Some endangered animals are of in the zoo. 2.People are trying to save the manatees .（对画线部分提问） are people trying ? 3.It seems that Polar Bears are gentle animals.（改为同义句） Polar Bears seems gentle animals. 第三课时 Section B（I） (一).自主学习 1.熟读课文并理解文章内容 2.学生明确学习目标 （二）.质疑释疑 1.turn off the shower while you are washing your hair. (P121) 洗头的时候关掉淋浴。 （1）turn off 表示“关掉”，用在关掉收音机，煤气，自来水等场 合。与其相关的几个短语是 turn on“打开”，turn down“关小”， turn up“开大”。 （2）句中 while 与 when 是同义词，都可以用从属连词，引导状语从 句表示时间，意思都是“当（在）……的时候”，但二者之间是有区 别的。 【友情链接】while 与 when 的用法 ◎ when 的含义是 at or during the time that,既可用于指一点时 间（从句的谓语动词需用终止性动词），也可用于指一段时间（从句 的谓语动词用延续性动词），从句与主句里面的谓语动词所表示的动 作或状态能同时发生，或一先一后发生。 ◎ while 的含义是 during the time that,只能用于指一段时间（从 句的谓语动词必须是延续性的），从句与主句里面的谓语动词所表示 的动作只能同时发生，不能一先一后发生。 While I was reading, my mother was washing clothes. 我读书时，妈妈在洗衣服。 2.. You have probably never heard of Amy Winterbourne. (P122) 你可能从来没有听说过 Amy Winterbourne。 【知识归纳】hear, hear from, hear of 与 hear that clause 的用 法： （1）hear 单独使用表示“听见”，“听到”，常用的结构有： ◎ hear sb/sth“听到某人或某物的声音”。 ◎ hear sb do sth“听到某人做某事”。 ◎ hear sb doing sth“听到某人正在做某事”。 特别提示 hear sb do sth 指听到整个行动或整个事件；而 hear sb doing sth 是指听到了行动的一部分，有正在发生的意思。试比较： I heard the boy go down the stairs.我听到这个男孩走下楼去。 I heard the boy going down the stairs 我听到这个男孩下楼的声 音。 （2）hear from 意为“收到……的信”；“得到……消息”。 特别提示 hear from 的宾语是表示人的名词或代词，而不是表示信件 的名词。 （3）hear of 意为“听说”，后面接名词，代词或动名词。 (4）hear 接从句，是“听说”的意思。 3.. She is a most unusual woman. (P122)她是一个十分不寻常的 女性。 【知识归纳】a most, the most 与 most 的用法 （1）a most 的用法。在“a most+形容词+名词”结构中，most 是副 词，意为“很，非常”，相当于 very,用来修饰它后面的形容词，本 句就是这一用法。 (2）the most 的用法 ◎在“the most+形容词+名词”结构中,most 是副词，表示程度，意 为“最”，与其后的形容词一起构成形容词的最高级。 4.The walls are made from old glass bottles that are glued together. (P122)墙是由旧玻璃瓶粘在一起建成的，be made from/of 意为“由……（原料）制成”，后面一般接物质名词。接 from 则表示 某物品制成后，已看不出原材料是什么，原材料在制作过程中已起了 化学变化；接 of 表示某物品制成后，仍可看得出原材料，其原料在 制作过程中仅起了物理变化。 知识拓展 ◎ be made up of 表示某物或某组织由一种种成分或一个个成员组 成。 ◎ be made into 意为“把……做成……”，主语在意义上为原材料， 介词宾语在意义上为制成品。 ◎be made in 意思是“在……（地点）制造”，介词 in 后接产地。 ◎be made by 意思是“由……制造”，介词 by 后跟动作的执行者。 （五）当堂检测 I.翻译下列短语： 1.在某人的空闲时间 2.关灯 3.停止做某事 4. 不同意某人 5.由…制成 6.拆除_______7.照顾 8.过去经常做 9.喜欢做某事 10.看起来像 II.根据句意和首字母提示完成单词 1.R paper is very important to save trees. 2.We must save the e animals. 3.That zoo is s for animals to live in. 4.It’s our duty to protect the e and make our world more beautiful. 5.We should not p the environment. III.用所给单词的正确形式填空： 1.The old building (set up) yesterday. 2.Young people should speak to old (polite). 3.Most of the trash can (recycle) in the future. 4.Pandas are (endanger) animals. 5.There are many people (pick) up apples. 第四课时 Section B(II) 一 ． 自 主 预 习 :cheat stepmother husband wife whole scene moonlight shine bright. 二．展示交流：1.hear of 听说， 后接名词，代词或动名词用于疑 问句.否定句中，不可用于进行时. 我 以 前 从 未 听 说 过 那 件 事 . 爸爸不同意我说的话 2.out of 用…制成 What did you made it out of? 从…里出来 He came out of the room. 在…外 Fish cannot live out of water. 由于… They helped us out of kindness. 从…之中 You can chose one out of these ten books. 缺乏，没有 He’s out of breath. 在…范围之外 They are out of danger. 3.be made of 这桌子是用木头做的。 be made out of 那座雕像是由石头雕成。 be made into 竹子可以制成钓鱼杆。 be made in 这些小轿车是日本产的。 be made by 这张桌子是他父亲做的。 be made by 计算机是由许多部件组成的。 4.be an inspiration to sb. Lei Feng’s short life was a great inspiration to youth Inspire v. The actors inspired the kids. Inspirsing adj .He is an inspiring teacher. We all like him 三 过关检测： 1.She built a house out of trash. A.her B.herself C.hers D. by her 2.The building was being pulled . A.up B.down. C.out of D.out 3.The bridge is made big stones. A.in B.form C.of D.out 4.The radio is too loud. Will you please ? A.turn it down B.turn it on C.turn off it D.turn down it 5.Some new buildings for the farmers in the village every year. A.were built B.are built C.is built D.will be built 2、根据句意提示写出空缺单词的正确形式： 1.When the teacher came in, the students stopped (talk) 2.As soon as he saw me, he stopped (talk)to me. 3. (recycle)paper is difficult. 4.The bridge (build)30years. 5.The shop (close) at five every day. 6.Tina bought a (use) car, but it’s very (use). 7.It is said that there is no (live) things on the moon. 8.The roof of her house is made of (discard). 9.Look!They (play)football on the playground. 第五课时 self-check 一 。自主预习：The exercises in 2 on page48. 二．合作探究：1.Why are you wearing a coat? Wear 表 状态后接衣物.帽.手套.眼镜.手表等。 She was wearing sun-glasses. Mike is wearing a new coat. Put on 穿着,指状态,不用与进行时连用。 Has often has on a black coat. Be in 表 穿的状态，后接表颜色或衣服的词。 Is he in blue dress? The woman is in red. Dress 穿衣，作及物动词时，其宾语一般是人。 The girl likes to dress in black. Will you dress the children? 2.That apartment block is old and dangerous. It should be pulled down. 此句是含情态动词的被动语态：情态动词+be+过去分词 The book may be kept for two weeks by you. Fish can be found everywhere in the sea. The ring must be stolen. 三 。过关检测 （一） 1. you your breakfast? Yes, I it at school.00000 A. Did; have; had B. Have; had; had C. Have had D. Did; have; have had 2.Mom,I must to go school at once. By the way, I the cat. A..have fed B. fed C. will feed D.am feeding 3.I have watered plants but I haven ’ t fed the cat . A.. yet; yet B. yet; already C. already; already D .already; yet 4.I ’ll clean out the refrigerator A.. just now B .after a moment C .in a minute D. yet 5.Every day my mother has to do . A. .so many housework B. such many chores C .so much chores D. so much housework 6.Animals are our friends. We must try the endangered animals. A.. to save B. saving C. saves D. saved 7.Do you know who America? A. .discovered B. found C. finds D. discovers 8.I’m against the animals. A.. kill B. to kill C. killing D. killed 9.Peter should hardly see the words on the blackboard, ? A.. did he B. couldn’t he C .didn’t he D should he 10.What is cheese made ? A.. in B. of C. form D. into 11.He disagreed me. A. .with B. on C. to D. in 12.Don’t forget the door when you leave the classroom. A. .lock B. locked C. to lock D. locking （二）、用所给单词的适当形式填空 1.I _______ (send)an e—mail for help but nobody has got back to me yet. 2.Look!There is a cat _______ (climb) up the tree. 3.School _______ (start)at eight and ends at twelve. 4.He used to _______ (take)a walk after supper. 5. _______ you _______ (buy)a travel guidebook? No, not yet. 6.I _______ (do)it hours ago. 7.They _______ (not come)back yet. 【课后反思】 Unit 7 What’s the highest mountain in the world? Section A 1a - 2d ( 第 1 课时) 【学习目标】 1. 能够掌握本节课出现的重点短语和句子。 2. 谈论地理和自然现象，学会对事实和数字的比较，提高听说 能力。 【重点、难点】 识记形容词和副词比较级变法的多条规则；使用比较级来描述 人的外貌。 【导学指导】 温故知新 写出下列单词的比较级和最高级 high deep big long old young 自主互助学习 请根据预习写出下列短语 1.最高的山 2.最长的河 3.八百万平方公里 4. 1025 米深 5.……的人口 6……的高度 7.和…一样大 11.少于……的长度 12.最古老的国家之一 知识梳理 1.long 的名词性是 翻译成 ， high 的名词形式 翻译成 ，表达东西的长度可以 有两种方法 例如：这条河 100 米长。 （1）The of the river is 100meters. 2）The river is 2. One of the most endangered animals in the world the giant panda. China one of the oldest civilizations in the world one of +名词复数，谓语动词要用 数。 eg：其中一本书是新的。 3. The population of the world is 6400000000. 对人口这个数字划线提问要用 特殊疑问词 。 the population of the world？ 4.as big as 和…一样大 as…as 之间的形容词用 级。 The Yellow river is not as long as the Yangtze river. 否定形式 not as…as 意为 。 5. Can you tell me a bit more about China? 我们学过的可以修饰比较级的副词和短语还有 注意比较级和最高级 Which is the second longest river in China? Which river is longer ,the Nile or theYellow River? 最高级一般用于 者以上相比，最高级前一般要加定冠 词 ，比较级一般用于 者之间的比较，被比较者 用 引出。 互助学习过程： 1. 比一比赛一赛：各小组长提问其它小组成员课前准备的短语， 看哪个小组完成得最棒！ 2. 1a 展示同学们搜集的信息，讨论 1a 部分的四幅图片。 3. 1b 听录音完成 1b，并在小组内共同订正听力的答案。 4. 2a 听录音把这些句子按照顺序排列起来。 5. 2b 再听一遍录音把句子补充完整。 6. 小组长带领大家讨论一下听力的答案，并负责解答组内其他同 学的疑问。 7. Pairwork 根据 2a 和 2c 部分的信息自己完成对话。 【课堂练习】 （一）根据句意和首字母补全单词。 1. The l ______ river in Asia is the Yangtze River . 2. China is one of the oldest c ________ in the world . 3. One of the o________ countries in the world is China. 4. M __________ of city lies three meters blow sea level . 5. Our playground is about 2000 s _______ meters in size . (二) 单项选择。 1. It’s ______ in the world . A the biggest desert B biggest desert C the biggest deserts D bigger desert 2. There are no man-made structures as _______ the Great Wall A bigger B big C bigger D the biggest 3. The Nile is 6,470 _________ A kilometers B kilometer C kilometers long D kilometer long 4. Mount Tai is _______ lower than Qomolangma . A lot’s of B many C very D much 5. Shanghai is one of _______ in the world . A more big city B the biggest city C the biggest cities D the most big city Section A 3a – 4c ( 第 2 课时) 【学习目标】 1. 能够掌握本课出现的重点短语和句子。 2. 能够正确使用形容词的比较等级。 3. 能够运用形容词的比较等级去描述事物。 【导学指导】 2. 从课本中找出并翻译下列短语。 （1）最危险的运动之一 （2）登山，攀岩 （3）全世界 （4）中国的东南边境 （5）山顶 （6）严寒的天气条件 （7）大风暴 （8）冒着生命危险 （9）放弃 （10）实现梦想 【展示交流】 1. 将课前准备的情况在小组内交流讨论（老师点拨）。 2. 比一比赛一赛：各小组长提问其它小组成员讨论结果，看哪个 小组完成得最棒！ 3. 3a 小组合作，共同找出课文中的重点短语和句型，并讲解给 同学们。 4. 3b 根据课文内容完成下面的表格，并在小组内订正答案。 Paragraph1 Paragraph 2 Paragraph 3 List three comparisons List three dangers for climbers List three achievements 5. Groupwork 讨论“世界之最”，完成 4a—4c. 【合作探究】 小组合作，总结一下表示事物长度、宽度、深度的表达方式。 ___________________________________________________________ _______________ 【达标拓展】 （一）用形容词和副词的适当形式填空。 1. Tom is ______ (tall) than any other student in his class. So he is _______ (tall) in his class. 2. Li Ming is one of _________(clever) boys in our class. 3. The sun is _______ (bright) than all the other stars because it is _______ (near) to the earth. 4. The earth receives _________ (little) heat from the sun in winter than in summer. 5.The train is running _________ and _______ (fast). 6. He said that it was __________ (happy) day in his life. （二）根据首字母提示完成句子。 1. we should learn the s of helping others. 2. Most animals don ’ t like to live in f________ conditions. 3. Many c_________ reached the top of the mountain this morning. 4. Tibet（西藏）is in the s____________ part of China. 5. Of all the m________________, Qomolangma is the highest and most famous. Section B 1a – 1d ( 第 3 课时) 【学习目标】 1. 掌握课本中出现的重点单词和短语。 2. 能够掌握课文中出现的重点句子。 3. 学会表达事物之间的倍数关系。 【重点、难点】 识记并运用表达事物之间的倍数关系的词句；将听力中使用的 对比方法移为己用。 【导学指导】 温故知新 （1）最危险的运动之一 （2）登山，攀岩 （3）全世界 （4）中国的西南边境 （5）到达山顶 （6）严寒的天气 条件 （7）大风暴 （8）冒着生命危险 （9）挑战自己 （10）放弃做某事 自主互助学习 知识剖析： 我们为同学们总结初中英语中的长度、宽度、高度、深度的表示 方法作一简单的介绍，同学们看后，可以自己试试，看看自己对于这 部分内容学的怎么样。 初中英语语法大全中长度、宽度、高度、深度的表示法： 1、长度、宽度、高度、深度的表示法，有一个专门的结构，那 就是“基数词 + 单位词 + 形容词”。 例句：Tiger Path is 200 meters long and has a high humidity. 老虎路有 200 米长，而且湿度很重。 We walk up three floors, which is about ten meters high. 我们走上三层楼，大概 10 米左右高。 2、除了上面的表示方法，有时也可以用“基数词 + 单位词 +in + 长度或者重量的名词”来表示长度、宽度、高度、深度。 The classroom was 25 feet in length and 20 feet in width. 教室有 25 英尺长，20 英尺宽。 注意事项：若表示重量，可以用 in weight 结构。 例句：The box is 9 kilos。=The box is 9 kilos in weight。 这个箱子重 9 公斤。 学习过程 1. 认真观察图片，看图画中都有哪些动物，了解这些动物的信息， 并把这些动物跟人类做比较，看看区别在什么地方。 2. 小组讨论，用课本上提供的句型讨论这些动物之间的区别。 3. 听录音完成 1b 和 1c，并在小组内交流，确定正确答案。 4. pairwork 列举几种不同的动物，并运用句型对他们进行比较。 【课堂练习】 一 单项选择 1. I don’t like to read books in the sunshine because it’s not good _______my eyes. A. at B. for C. with D. to 2. Are they than an adult panda? A. very smaller B a lot of smaller C much smaller D smaller a lot 3. Her science and English are a little better ______ Lucy’s. A. at B. in C. than D. of 4. In order to protect our earth, we should use the bus _____and drive our cars _____. A. more, less B. less, more C. much, little D. more, fewer. 5. Her physics ______ better than any other students’ A. is B. are C. do D. does. 二 从方框中选择恰当的短语并用其适当形式填空。 1. What about a baby panda? 2. Is a baby panda also ? 3 My sister is _______________me, we are both outgong. 4 I went to bed late last night,_____________ I didn’ t get up early this morning. Section B 2a – 2e ( 第 4 课时) 【学习目标】 ●正确使用形容词、副词的原级，最高级和比较级 ●学会对事实和数字的比较。 ●意识到保护环境和自然资源的重要性 ●提高学生的阅读能力。 【重点、难点】 1.理解 2b 的课文,能理解并运用其中的重点短语或句子。 2. 将比较级和数字的表达灵活地运用到文章中去。 【导学指导】 温故知新 一．短语翻译： 1. 出生时__________ 2.20 到 30 千克___________ 3.大约 350 厘米长__________ 4.活到 _________ 5.重的多__________ 6.10 公斤食物_____________ 二 写出下面句子 1 这头大象比那头大象重中很多倍。 ___________________________________________________________ _______ 2 初生时,一只熊猫大约 0,1 到 0.2 千克 ___________________________________________________________ _______ 3 一只熊猫能活 20 道 30 年. ________________________________________________ 【知识梳理】 学习过程 the size of in fact, the same as, black and white that’s why ,bring out, 一、自主学习，把下列短语翻译为英语。 1 阅读 2b 找出下面短语 1） 为 … … 做 准 备 ________________________2 ） 绊 倒 ___________ 3）照顾、照料_______________________4）死于_____________ 5)挽救……的重要性____________ 6）绊倒 _____________________ 2 阅读第二遍完成下面内容： Pandas do not have many , maybe only one . The hobies often illnesses and do not live very long. Adults pandas more than 12 hours a day about 10 kilos bamboo. Many years ago, there are bamboo forests and pandas than there are now. But then humans started to the forests , and there was bamboo for the pandas. Scientists say there are now fewer than 2,000 pandas in the remaining forests. 二、请划出 2b 中使用最高级的句子。 三、教师导学 1. 第一遍快速阅读 2b，回答 10、 12、200、2,000 在文章中的 含义。 2.细读文章第二遍，回答 2c 问题。 3.再读一遍课文，写出文章中使用最高级的句子，完成 2d。 四、能力提高，小组合作。 讨论保护熊猫的其他方法，调查你组里有多少同学赞同你的观 点，完成 2e。 【课堂练习】： 一.完成课本 2c-2d 的所有练习。 二．用所给词的正确形式填空： 1.Of the two girls, I find Lucy the _______ (clever). 2.Iron(铁)is ________ (much) useful than gold(黄金). 3. The boy is ________ (interesting) than his brother. 4. Dick sings _______ (well), he sings ________(well) than John, 5.Wangtao is a little________ than Lilei.(strong) 6. Which is_______, the sun,the earth or the moon?(small) 7. Lucy speaks English very______. (good) 8. Who is ___________ (thin), you or Helen? Helen is. 9. Fangfang is not as _________ (tall) as the other girls. 10. Who gets up _________ (early),Tim or Tom? 三．完成句子。 1.熊猫兴奋的跑过来甚至它们中有一些撞到他们的朋友摔 倒了. They _____ _____ with excitement and some of them even _____ walk into their friends and . 2.他们是如此的机灵可爱。 They are so_____ _____ _____ your brother. 3.我照顾他们就像他们是我自己的孩子。 I _____ ______ them like they’re my own babies. 4.成年熊猫一天要花费 12 多个小时吃大约 10 千克竹子。 Adult pandas _____ ______ than 12 hours a day about 10 kilos of bamboo. 5.生活在剩余的森林里的熊阿毛不到 2000 只。 There are now 2000 pandas living in the remaining forests. Section B 3a-selfcheck ( 第 5 课时) 【学习目标】 学会用形容词和副词的最高级来描述个人喜好。 【重点、难点】 1. 单音节词和多音节词的最高级变化形式。 2. 不规则形容词和副词的最高级形式。 【导学指导】 温故知新 一、 比一比，写出下列单词的比较级和最高级形式，看谁写的 最快，最准确? big _______ _______ cute_______ _______ black _______ _______ hungyr _______ _______ lovely _______ _______ little _______ ______ important _______ _______ few_______ _______ beautiful _______ _______ popular ______________ ______________ famous _____________ ___________ endangered ____________ ______________ 二 、小组成员用上面的比较级来描述熊猫性格和长相，找一名 同学陈述比较结果。 自主互助学习 课前预习 1、小组合作: 小组讨论在我们城镇最好的电影院是哪家，哪里的 快餐最美味？哪里的服装店最时尚最便宜？ 2、小组选出两人仿照 2d 作对话表演 课堂流程 1.读 3a 中的单词和短语，小组讨论并填表来完成 3a。 2. pairwork 练习。做完之后，同桌利用 3a 的问句于答句做对话， 进一步了解鲸鱼有关的信息。 3 .写作练习，提高写的能力。 小组完成讨论后根据 3a 的调查表，从鲸鱼的长相生活场所，饮 食，活动目前生存状况或者其它方面来描述一下，随堂写出一篇作文。 4.小组合作完成 self-check 。 【课堂练习】 一、 用括号内所给词的适当形式填空。 1.Miss Chen is __________ _________than Mr. Wang. (popular) 2. Question A _______ ________ _________ ________ Question B. (important) 3. Toronto is _____ ______ city in Canada. (large) 4. Playing computer games is______ _____ _____ of all the activities.(interesting). 5. The Nile(尼羅河) is ______ ________river in the world. (long) 6. She is_______ than all the other students. (young) 7. The boy is ________ ________ of the two. (tall) 8. Where is the ________bus-stop? (near) 9. He is one of ________ ________ _______Politicians. (famous) 10. Tom drives much ________ __han John. (careful)。 【拓展练习】 单句改错： 1. He is as taller as I am. _________ 2. She is a little thiner than she looks. _________ 3. Bob is heavier than any other boys in the class. _________ 4. Your garden is much larger than their. _________ 5. It is one of the most interesting book than I have ever read._________ 6. He says Mary is most friendliest person in the class. _________ 7. Which city is most beautiful, Beijing or Guangzhou? _________ 8. Jack works hard. Mike works very harder than Jack. _________ 9. London is the bigger city in Britain. _________ 10.Bob plays football badly but Fred plays football much badlier than Bob. 【课后反思】 Unit 8 Have you read treasure island yet? Period One (section A 1a-2d) 【学习目标】 1、 学会用现在完成时表达过去发生的但与现在情况有关的事情。 2、 掌握现在完成时结构和了解其含义 3、 学会区分现在完成时与一般过去时的区别。 【字词达标】 词汇达标：already,yet.island,treasure 短语达标：hear of,at least,finish doing,on Page 25,hurry up,put it down,grow up.full of 【重点语法、句型讲解】 1．现在完成时： 1)含义：表示动作过去发生，但与现在有联系或影响，此时态常与 以下时间词连用，如 already 已经,yet 已经，还，just 刚刚,ever 曾经,so far到目前为止,before从前,times次数,for+时间段，since 自从…以来,how long 多久，never 从不，in the past….在过去…. 2)．结构：主语+have/has+动词的过去分词（have/has 是助动词， 没有“有”的意义） 肯定句：She has finished her work.她完成了她的工作。 一 般 疑 问 句 ： Has she finished her work?_Yes,she has./No,she,hasn’t. 否定句: She hasn’t finished her work. 3)．动词的过去分词的构成：规则动词的过去式就是过去分词，不 规则动词的过去分词见不规则动词表。 4) ． 现 在 完 成 时 态 与 一 般 过 去 时 的 区 别 ： 句 子 中 如 有 yesterday,last,just now,in1999 等过去时间词出现就只用一般过 去时。 5)．特别提醒：句子中如有 when 出现，一定不能用完成时 例题：A:Jack has read the book, B:When did he read it? A:Last weekend 2.Have you read Little Woman yet?你已读过《小妇人》吗？ Yet（已经，还）的用法：在现在完成时中，already(已经)用于肯定 句，yet 用于一般疑问句或否定句， 例句：肯定句：I have already eaten lunch.我已经吃过午饭了。 一般疑问句：____ you eaten lunch ____? 否定句： I _____eaten lunch ____. 3.What’s it like?它（这本书）怎么样？What+be+sth like?表示 “某物怎样？” 【巩固练习】 一用单词的正确形式填空 1．I_______ ever________(drink)coffee. 2.The boy__________(water)the flowers already 3.She___________(watch)the movie twice 4.-________you _______(visit)the Great Wall before?-Yes,I ______ 5.How long_____your father_____(work)in this city? 6.He_________(get)here yesterday,so he___________(stay)here for only one day. 7.-________you ever_______(drive)a car? - Yes,I______. - When_______you first_______(drive)a car? 二、英汉互译。 1. 至 少 __________________________ 8.What do you think of it?.____________________ 2. 快点 __________________________ 9.Have you decided which book to write about? 3. 在岛上___________________ ____________________ 4. 听 说 ____________________ 10. 读 完 这 本 书 ______________________ 5. 在 第 5 页 上 ___________________ 11. 长 大 ， 成 长 __________________ 6. 把 它 放 下 __________________ 12. What ’ s it about?_________________ 7. 读得快__________ 13.the island full of measuer______________ 【句型巩固】 1．He has already gone to New York.(变一般疑问句并回答) ____he_____to New York____? _No,he______ 2．We have learned English for two years(变否定句) We _____ ______ English for two years 3. We have lived here for two years.(提问) ______ _____have you______here? 4.Tom has ever read the book. (变否定句) Tom has _______ read the book. 5.Miss Green start to teach us 2 years ago.(同义句) Miss Green________ _______us for 2 years. 【语法过关】 一．单选题 1、Both his parents look sad . Maybe they ______what's happened to him . Ａ. knew Ｂ. have known Ｃ. must know Ｄ.will know 2、He has _______ been to Shanghai , has he ? Ａ. already Ｂ.never Ｃ.ever Ｄ. still 3、Have you met Mr Li ______？ Ａ. just Ｂ. ago Ｃ.before Ｄ. a moment ago 4、The famous writer _____ one new book in the past two years . Ａ. is writing Ｂ.was writing Ｃ.wrote Ｄ.has written 5、Zhao Lan ______already ______in this school for two years . Ａ. was ; studying Ｂ. will ; study Ｃ. has ; studied Ｄ. are ; studying 6、We ______ Xiao Li since she was a little girl . Ａ. know Ｂ. had known Ｃ. have known Ｄ. knew 7、Harry Potter is a very nice film .I_______ it twice . Ａ. will see Ｂ. have seen Ｃ. saw Ｄ.see 8、—These farmers have been to the United States . —Really ? When _____ there ? Ａ. will they go Ｂ. did they go Ｃ. do they go Ｄ. have they gone 9.—______ you ___ your homework yet ? —Yes . I _____ it a moment ago . Ａ. Did ; do ; finished Ｂ. Have ; done ; finished Ｃ. Have ; done ; have finished Ｄ. will ; do ; finish Period Tow (section A 3a-3c) 【学习目标】 4、 了解著名小说《鲁滨逊漂流记》，学习主人翁永不放弃的精神 5、 进一步熟悉现在完成时。 【字词达标】 单词达标：tool,else,toward,sand,gun,ship,technology,French 短语达标：wait for,give up,who else,see sb doing/do sth,run toward…,name sb…cut down 【难点讲解】 1.I have brought back many things Ican use,我带回了许多我能 使用的东西。 2．Who else is on my island?还有谁在我的岛上？ 1)else（其他的，别的），修饰复合不定代词或者特殊疑问词， 并放其后 例：别的什么________ _________ 其他的人________ _________ 别的东西 ________ _________ 没有别的东西 ________ _________ 2)other（其他的，别的）修饰名词，放在名词的前面。 例：other things, other people 3)What _____do you have?=What ______ things do you have? 3.I named him Friday 我给他取名“星期五” name sb…给某人取名…,同样的表达还有 call sb… 例：他叫我小王 He calls me Xiao Wang= He names me Xiao Wang 我的父母给我取名 Jack（两种表达） 4.I saw some cannibals trying to kill two men from a broken ship. 我看见两个肉食人正企图杀害两个从一艘破船出来的人。 see sb doing… 看见某人在做… see sb do…看见某人做… 例：I often see him_______(help) the old man. When I came back home,I saw my mother______(cook)。 5．One of them died but the other ran toward my house.其中 的一个死了，另一个向我的屋子跑来。 1）one…the other…一个… 另一个… 例：I have two friends,one is Tom,the other is Jack. 2) run toward…向…跑去.go toward…向…走去 【巩固练习】 翻译 5. 给我的狗取名 Jerry（两种表达） _______________________ ____________________ 6. 看见某人正做某事 __________________________ 7. 企图做某事______________________ 8. 放弃抽烟（smoke）___________________ 9. 别的谁____________________ 10. 别 的 什 么 东 西 （ 两 种 表 达 ） _________________ _______________ 11. 砍掉它____________________ 12. 等候…__________________ 13. 说法语____________ __ 【例题讲解】 1．Have/has gone to...,去了...（还没有回） Have/has been to...,去过...（已经回） 例：1)-Where is your sister?-She has gone to the library.她 去图书馆了（没有回，还在图书馆） 2)I have been to Beijing many times 我去过北京很多次了。 （我已经回了，没在北京了） 2.how long,for+时间段，since...不能与瞬间动词连用。 例：1）I have__B__the book for two days. A.bought B.had C.finished 解析：由于此题出现 for two days,又因为 bought，finished 是瞬间动词，所以选择延续性动词 had。 2）常见的的瞬间动词/短语和延续性动词/短语 瞬间动词 延续性动词 go to..,come to.., have/has been in/at… leave… Have/has been away from… buy.. have/has had… borrow（借进）/lend（借出） have/has kept die have/has been dead arrive in/at … ,got to…,reach… have/has been in/at… The film started/began… The film has been on.. join… have/has been a member（成员） of.. join the army have/has been in the army 【句型巩固】 1. Nancy has to do some exercise to keep healthy. (改为否定 句) Nancy ____________ ___________ to do _________ exercise to keep healthy. 2. Nancy has had breakfast. (改为否定句) Nancy ______ _______breakfast. 3. I have a backache.(一般疑问句并回答) _______ you ________ a backache ? – Yes,I _____.No,I ______. 4. I have been to Shanghai twice. .(一般疑问句并回答) ______ you _______ to Shanghai twice.?- Yes,I _____.No,I _______ 5.Tom joined the army four days ago（改同义句） Tom ______ ________ _______ the army for four days. 6 他们来这里多久了(完成译句) _______ ________ have they ________ here?. 【语法过关】 一、单项选择。 （ ）1.My shoe is here,but where is ____________? A. the others B. the other C. another one D. other ( )2.Do you have _______to say?. A. anything other B. something else C. else anything D. anything else ( )3.How long have you _______here? A. come B. arrived. C. got D. been ( )4.Hurry up,your mother is waiting____the bus stop_____you. A.for,at B.at, with C.at,for D.for,at ( )5.He is not at home,he has______Jiefangbei. A.been to B.go to C.gone to D.been in ( )6,She _____in Chongqing 5 days ago,she has_____ in Chongqing for 5 days A.arrived,arrived B.been,arrived C. arrived,been D.got, been ( )7.His grandpa_______since 2000 A.died B.has been deaded C.has been dead D.has died 二、单句辨错。 ( )1.He has left his hometown for three years.________ A B C ( )2. Tim has started two hours ago,he has already got to London now___________ A B C ( )3. Keep trying,don’t give up study English______________ A B C ( )4. They arrived at the island in the end.___________ A B C ( )5.Where have you gone these days?.______________ A B C 三．对话填空：用 go to,be to, be in,be 的正确形式填空 Kobe：Have you ___1____ China? It's a beautiful place, and people there are welcome. Iverson：I have ___2___there many times. And I have answered this quesion from you, don't you remember? Kobe：Sorry, I foget. Hey，where is James? Iverson: Oh ,he ___3____his home, he has already ___4____his home for three hours. 【课后反思】 Unit 9 Have you ever been to a museum? Section A 教学设计 一、教材分析 本课是新目标英语八年级下册 Unit 9 Have you ever been to an amusement park? 第九单元第一课时，本单元主要围绕“有趣的地方” 这个话题展开教学，通过本单元教学，帮助学生掌握描述过去经历的 功能句式，学习现在完成时的用法，并能区别现在完成时和一般过去 时在表述过去经历时的不同。同时，要求学生能运用现在完成时来描 述某人曾经去过哪些有趣的地方，而本课可呈现了本单元的主要教学 内容。 二、教学目标 根据教学大纲的要求和教学内容的特点，本节课特制定以下教学 目标： （1）知识目标 a. 掌握以下单词：amusement park, space museum, aquarium, zoo, water park, neither, have a great time. b. 掌握如何表达现在完成时，并能运用 Have you ever been to an amusement park? Has he ever been to an amusement park? 的句式进行提问和应答。 c. 能用英语谈论过去的经历，谈论你曾经去过某地。 （2）能力目标：培养学生用英语思维的能力和初步运用英语交际 的能力，使学生能够在相似生活情景中运用所学语言，达到交流的目 的。 （3）德育目标： a. 通过学习如何表达现在完成时，对比中西方文化的不同。 b. 通过询问别人曾经去过哪些有趣的地方，来表达了解、 关心别人，并增进友谊。 三、教学重点 （1）掌握本课的生词、短语和本课所出现的日常交际用语。 （2）掌握有关于“某人曾经去过某地”的交际用语： Have you ever been to an amusement park? Yes, I have. / No, I haven’t. Has he ever been to an amusement park? Yes, he has. / No, he hasn’t. 四、教学难点 （1）熟练掌握和灵活运用现在完成时来描述某人曾经去过某地。 （2）能区别现在完成时和一般过去时在表达过去经历的不同。 五、学情分析 在教学过程中，对学情的了解是教师因材施教的关键。我所教的 初二（63）班、初二（64）班学生基础较好，学习目的明确，反应较 灵敏，学习英语兴趣较浓，学习较主动、自觉，具有一定的自觉能力。 学生在初一阶段已学过用一般过去时来描述过去的经历，但用现在完 成时来描述过去的经历还是第一次接触，需要教师的正确引导。 六、教学方法 在进行具体教学时，教学方法不是固定不变的，教学方法具有灵 活性、多样性、发展性和补偿性，选择和采用教学方法，不仅要依据 学科的知识特点，而且要根据教学任务和学生的年龄特点及学生的实 际水平选用。为了更好地突出本课的重点，突破难点，更好地完成教 学任务，根据教情和学情，在本节课中我主要采用以下的几种教学方 法。 （1）情景教学法 情景是英语教学中非常重要的因素，它直接影响英语教学的效 果，而英语教学本身是一个很自然的、真实的言语交际情景。在本课 中我采用以下方式创设情景： ①利用多媒体，创设语言、教学等情景，教学本课生词： space museum, water park, amusement park, aquarium, zoo, Disneyland. ②声像手段：通过录音机、录像机、投录仪的使用，使学生对本 课的内容有更生动、直接的理解，能加深印象，培养学生的注意力， 以达到事半功倍的效果。 （2）启发式教学法 现代教育理念认为，教学活动的主体是学生，教师是组织者和指 导者。开启学生思维的大门，打通学生思维障碍，已成为教学工作的 重要内容。在学生的思维结点上给予及时正确的启发引导，更能体现 教师的角色功能和服务意识。 （3）交际法 学生学习英语最终目的是为了交际运用。根据学生普遍具有强烈 的交往要求和表现的心理，我注意创造条件让学以致用，使学生获得 交际中初步运用英语进行会话的能力。 （4）任务型教学法 根据学生的实际需要，以学生为中心，合理组织教学，把各个教 学目标融入到教学任务中，不断获取完成任务所需的信息、知识、能 力与技能，在活学活用知识的过程中，学生的自信感逐步增强，从而 体验到成功的喜悦。 七、课时安排 从本单元的教材编写体例来看，可考虑用 5 个课时完成本单元的 教学任务。 Period 1 (Section A: 1a, 1b, 1c, 2b, 2b, 2c) New function presenting Period 2 (Section A: 3a, 3b, 4b) Practice Period 3 (Section B: 1a, 1b, 2a, 2b, 2c, 3a. 3b. 3c) Period 4 (Self check) Shelf check Period 5 (Reading: Section 1 — Section 4) Reading comprehension 八、教学程序 Step 1 Revision Play the song “If you are happy, please clap your hands. （播放一首“幸福拍手歌”，让学生跟着一起唱，老师赶紧 因势引导，问全班同学：） T: Do you know the name of this song? Ss: Yes, “If I am happy, I’ll clap my hands”. T:（教师重复并问学生）If you are happy, you’ll clap your hands. Are you happy today? Ss: Yes. T: If you are happy, please clap your hands. Ss: ××, ××, ×× （学生们一起拍手） T:（问一名学生）If you are happy. What will you do? S1：If I am happy, I’ll go to the movies. T:（问另外一名学生）What about you? S2: I’ll go out for a visit but I don’t have enough money. T:（问另外一名学生）If you have a lot of money. What will you do? S3: If I am happy, I’ll buy a big house for my parents. T: Good boy. (Ask another student.) What about you? S4: I’ll give most of the money to the poor. T: How about you? Ss: I’ll travel around the world. T: Have you ever been to America? Ss: No. T: Now, we’ll learn Unit 9 Have you ever been to an amusement park? （播放歌曲，营造轻松愉快的学习氛围，并因势引导，采用师生 之间的交流方式，自然导入“Have you ever been to an amusement park?”（“你曾经去过某地”这一话题）。通过这种亲切自然的问 答方式，揭开了本课的序幕，这使陌生的师生之间多了一些了解，增 加了些亲和力，拉近了师生之间的情感距离，营造出宽松的学习环 境。） Step 2. ① Show some pictures and teach the following words: (an) amusement park, space museum, aquarium, zoo, water park, Disneyland. Have you ever been to a/an… ? （a）space museum （a） water park （an） amusement park （an） aquarium （a） zoo （a） Disneyland （采用多媒体这一教学手段直观易懂，让学生在轻松、愉快的气 氛中获得信息，从而达到了教是为了不教的目标。） ② Practise the drills in pairs. (Divide the class into 2 groups and have a competition.) Have you ever been to Disneyland/Sydney? Yes,I have. No, I haven’t （采用竞赛的教学方法，既调动了学生的学习积极性，又创造“信 息沟”刺激学生积极思考、分析判断、快速反应，做到在短时间内自 觉掌握并运用新知识去解决目前面临的真实问题。） Step 3 (1a) Which of these places would you like to visit? Rank them from 1 to 5. space museum 太空博物馆 ( ) zoo 动物园 ( ) amusement park 娱乐公园 ( ) aquarium 水族馆 ( ) water park 水上公园 ( ) ① Ask a student to mark the words from 1 to 5. ② Check the answer together. ③ Ss repeat after the teacher. （让学生对所学的单词与句型做到音、形、义全面掌握，为下一 步的听力训练做好准备。） Step 4 Listening practice Listen. Have these students ever been to these places? Check (√) the boxes. amusement park water park space museum aquari um zoo Claud ia Sarah A) (1b)1. Ss listen to the tape twice and do the exercises. 2. Check the answer. （听力训练是对前面的词汇教学，句型教学和情景对话的延伸， 并且也是对前面各项学习的一个大检阅，让学生体验语言和感受语 言。） B) (2a)1. Ss look at the map of the town, Listen and circle the places you hear. 2. Check the answers. (2b)1. Ss listen again and Circle T/F 2. Let the Ss give his/her answer and evaluate other students’ answers. （师生共同评价能使学生学得主动而富有创造性，养成独立分析问 题与解决问题的习惯。） Step5. (Practise in pairs) 1. Ss look at the pictures below and role play the conversation . WanLu Garden the end of the earth water park １、A: Have you ever been to a/an ...? B: Yes, I have. I went to ...last week. ２、A: Have you ever been to a/an ...? B: No, I haven't./ I have never been to a/an ... A: Me neither. /Neither have I. 2.Ask some pairs to act out the dialogue in front of the class. （学生们通过小组中相互交流，用英语表达自己曾经去过某地， 并询问他人的情况，通过合作与交流，培养积极的情感态度，创导把 自己融合在集体的智慧中，一起成长，一起进步。） Step6 .Summarization 1.Explain some difficult points .(见板书设计) 2. Ss repeat after the teacher twice. (通过展示本课的词汇和重点句型，让学生回顾前面所学的内 容并巩固本课的语言知识。) Step7. Homework : Ask your classmates wheather（是否）they have been to these places.You can write a report like this： Name：Sanya，Dadong Sea, Monkey’s Island, Space Museum, Zoo… Report like this: Lily has been to Sanya.But Lucy hasn’t been to Sanya.Neither of them has been to Beijing.So they will go to Beijing this summer vacation. (目的是让学生巩固本课所学内容，也可练习写的技能。) Step8. 板书设计 Unit 9 Have you ever been to an amusement park? （Section A） 重点词组： space museum 太空博物馆 aquarium 水族馆 amusement park 娱乐公园 zoo 动物园 water park 水上公园 重点句型：. 1、Have you ever been to an aquarium? —Yes, I have.—No, I haven’t. 2、I have been to America, so has he. 3、I can speak English, so can he. 4、I am a teacher, so is he 语法: The Present Perfect Tense (现在完成时) I haven’t been to America, neither has he. 构成：has/have+done （V.P.P） I can’t speak English, neither can he. I/You/We/They have done… I don’t like playing football, neither He/She/It has done … oes he…. 4. has/have been to… 去过某地 has/have gone to 去了某地 eg: My father has been to America twice. My father has gone to America 【课后反思】 Unit 10 I have had this bike for three years. Section A 1a-2d 一、学习目标:继续学习现在完成时的用法。 能力目标: 掌握如何表达现在完成时 重点词语: 新单词和短语。 重点句子： How long have you had that bike over there? I have had it for three years ! 难 点：学习现在完成时表示过去某一段时间已经开始一直持续到现在的动 作或者状态。 二、预习导学 1.根据音标学习新单词，并记住中文意思。 2.跟小组长读重点单词短语，并结对抽说中文意思。 3．小组讨论 1a 和 2d. 三、自学检测 用所给 词的适当形式填空： 1．I_______ already ________（see） the film. I ______（see） it last week. 2. “_______ he ________ （finish） his work today?” “Not yet.” 3. My father_______ just______（come） back from wor k. He is tired now. 4. “Where’s Li Ming?” “He ________（go） to the teacher’s office.” 5. Shanghai _______（be） a small towm hundreds of years ago. Now it _______（become） a large city. 6 .I _______（work） here here since I _____（move） here in 1993. 7. So far I ______ （make） quiet a few friends here. 8. How long ______ the Wang’s __________（ stay） here 四、合作探究，课堂练习 1. —— I can sing the song in English. ——_________. A. So I can B. So can I C. I can so D. Too can I 2. -- Why don’t you buy one of the scarves for your mum? --They are not _______. A. beautiful enough B. enough beautiful C. too beautiful D. beautifully enough 3. The food in the restaurant is good______ the price is too______. A. and high B. but high C. but expensive D. because low 4. I think a dog is a good pet for ________ child. A. a 6-year-old B. an 6-year-old C. a 6-year old D. a 6 years-old 5. Everyone should do _____best to win the match. A. one’s B. the C. his D. their 6. —Where is Bruce? Is he at home?—I think he _____ school. A .has gone B. has been C. has gone to D. has been to 7.—I have never been to European countries. What about you? —_____. A. So do I B. So have I C. Neither do I D. Neither have I 8. Yesterday he _____ to work, so he wasn’t late. A. by taxi B. by a taxi C. take a taxi D. took a taxi 9.—How long have you studied English? —_____. A. For 5 years B.5 years ago C. Since 5 years D.5 years before 10. Has the train _____ yet? A. got to B. reached C. arrived D. arrived at 11. The teacher asked _____. A. what’s your name B. what was your name C. what your name is D. what your name was 12.—Do you mind if I stay here a little longer? —_____. A. No, you can’t B. Yes, you may C. Certainly not D. Yes, not at all 13. How long has his brother _____ the book? A. kept B. bought C. lent D. borrowed 14. I’ve never seen such a fine picture _____. A. ago B. before C. yet D. later 15. —Has the foreigner been to many interesting places in Beijing? —Yes, but he has not _____ been to many other parts of China. A. already B. still C. yet D. never Unit 10 I have had this bike for three years.（第 2 课时） Section A 3a-3c 导学案 一、学习目标: 学习在文章中运用现在完成时。 能力目标：运用 for 和一段时间的现在完成时。 重点句子：We have decided to each sell five things we no longer use. For example... 难 点： 运用 have+pp. 二、预习导学 1．熟读课文。 3．跟小组长读 3a 的句子并讨论完成 3b.3c，并结对抽说中文意思。 三、自学检测 1. They have ever been to an English-speaking country. (改为一 般疑问句) ———— they ever _____to an English-speaking country? 2. We need to have a good rest. (改为否定句) We _______ ________ to have a good rest. 3. She has been a flight attendant for two years. （划线提问） _____ _____ ______ she _____ a flight attendant? 4. His father has been to America twice. (划线提问) _____ ______ _______ has his father _______ to America? 5. Linda is taller than any other girl in her class. (改 为同义句) Linda is _______ _______ girl in her class. 四，合作探究， 单项选择 1. —Have you ever been to an aquarium? —No, _____. A. I have B. I am not C. I haven’t D. I hasn’t 2. —I’ve never been to a water park. — _______ A. Me, too B. Me, neither. C. Me also. D. Me both. 3. Has the train _____ yet? A.got to B.reached C.arrived D.arrived at 4.The teacher asked _____. A.what’s your name B.what was your name C.what your name is D.what your name was 5.—Do you mind if I stay here a little longer? —_____. A.No, you can’t B.Yes, you may C.Certainly not D.Yes, not at all 6.How long has his brother _____ the book? A.kept B.bought C.lent D.borro wed 7.I’ve never seen such a fine picture _____. A.ago B.before C.yet D.later 8.—Has the foreigner been to many interesting places in Beijing?—Yes, but he has not _____been to many other parts of China. A.already B.still C.yet D.never 五、展示 1.个人或小组读。 2．总结文中重点短语和句子。 六、学以致用 .完成对话 A: I’m not feeling well. I _____ _____( get) a cold. B: _____ you _____ (be) to the hospital yet? A: Yes, I _____ (go) to see Doctor Li this morning and he _____ (give) me some medicine. B: _____ you _____ ( take) the medicine? A: Yes, I _____ (take) it just a moment ago. B: Mr. Li is a good doctor. I think you’ll _____ (be) all right soon. A: I hope so. By the way, where is our teacher? I have to ask for a sick leave. B: She _____ _____(go) to the office. Unit 10 I have had this bike for three years.（第 3 课时） Section A grammar focus-1d 导学案 一、学习目标: 运用现在完成时完成 P76. 能力目标：现在完成时的运用尤其是 for 和 since。 重点词语: P76 和 P77 的新单词。 重点句子：How long have you had that bike? I have had it for three years. 难 点：现在完成时的运用。 二、预习导学 1.根据音标学习新单词，并记住中文意思。 2.组内讨论 4a.4b 和 4c 的题。 3.跟小组长读重点单词短语及 grammar focus ，并结对抽说中文意思。 三、自学检测.Complete the dialogue. Jack:Hi, Tom.I _____ _____you for a long time.Where _____ you _____? Tom:I _____ _____ to Xi’an. Jack:Really?How _____ you _____ there? Tom:By _____. Jack:_____ _____did it take you to fly there? Tom:Less _____ two hours. Jack:_____ _____did you go there? Tom:I _____ there _____ a holiday. Jack:Did you _____ a good time there? Tom:Yes, I _____ myself very much. Jack:I’m very _____ _____ hear that. Tom:_____ a lot. 四、合作探究 1.朗读 grammar focus. 2.看地图完成 1a. ____________________________________________________________ _____ ________ 五、展示 1.个人或小组读词语。 2.学生读课本的对话，然后两人练习新对话。最后小组展示。完成 3b. 3.小组合作完成 Part 4 六、学以致用，用正确的动词形式填空,每空一词 。(不规则动词过去时,过去 分词在题后给出) 1.A: Hello! Have you______(see) my pen? I can’t ________(find) it. B: I’m afraid I haven’t. (see-saw-seen, find-found-found) 2.A: Excuse me. Have you ______(see) my pen? I ______(put) it on the shelf a moment ago. (put-put-put) B: Oh, yes, I have. I’m sorry I forgot to _______(give) it back to you. (give-gave-given) 3.A:Mary, I’ve______(lose) my cap. Have you _____(see) it anywhere? B:Look! It’s over there. I_____(see) you put it there.( lose-lost-lost) 4.A: Have you ________(find) your knife yet? B: Not yet. (find-found-found) 5.A: John, ____ you _______(return) my pen yet? B: Not yet. Don’t worry! I ______ _________ (return) it soon. 6.A: Jim, _____ you _______(write) a letter to your aunt? B: Yes, I ______. A: When _____ you _______ it? (write) Unit 10 I have had this bike for three years.（第 4 课时） Section B 1a-2c 导学案 一、学习目标: 能力目标：提高阅读能力。 重点词语:新单词和短语。 重点句子：But he also thinks some things never change, and his hometown is still the place that holds all his childhood back. 难 点：现在完成时。 二、预习导学 1.以小组为单位记文中的新单词。 2.归纳总结文中短语和句子。 3 讨论完成文中的提问。 三、自学检测 现在完成时态使用的注意事项： 1. 表示过去发生的动作或存在状态，一直持续到现在，也许还将继续下去，可 以和 for+时间段，since+时间点/从句及 how long 连用，谓语动词只可用延续 性动词。常见的终止性动词与延续性动词之间的对应关系如下： come/go/ arrive/reach/get /move to ----be in /at die ----- be dead open ------be open close ---be closed become -----be fall asleep ------be asleep borrow ----keep buy----have begin ,start ----- be on put on -----wear leave -----be away from join the army -----be in the army /be a soldier join the Party ---be in the Party / be in the Party 四、合作探究 1.There are two books on the desk, but____of them is interesting。 A．none B．neither C．both D．all ( )2.—Have you ever _______ to the Summer Palace, Lily? —No, I __________. A.gone,hasn’t B.gone,haven’t C.been,haven’t D.been,hasn’t ( ) 3.I have ________ the book for three days. A．borrowed B．lent C．bought D．k ept ( ) 4.Neither her brother nor she _________ a dictionary. A．has B．have C．get D．need ( )5 Alice is an American a German. She is an Australia. A. both; and B. either; or C. neither; nor D. not; but ( ) 6. Mike doesn’t know French. And . A. so do I B. so am I C. neither do I D. neither am I ( )7.--Which sweater do you prefer, the yellow one or the pink one? -- . I like a light blue one. A. Either B. Both C. Any D. Neither ( )8. We have been to Water City. . A.Neither have I B.Nor have we C.So have they D.So do they ( )9. John Beijing. He is still there. A. has been to B. has gone to C. go to D. goes to ( )10. --May I speak to John? --Sorry, he Japan. But he in two days. A.has been to ;will come back B.has gone to ;will be back C.has been in ;would come back D.has gone to ; won`t come back ( )11. Neither you nor I a teacher. A. is B. are C. am D. be ( )12. The Smiths China for three years. A.have come B.have been to C.have been in D.have come to ( )13.“When his grandpa “ “ Three years ago.” A. has; died B. is; dead C. did; die D. is; died ( )14. He took an interest English. A. at B. in C. of D. on ( )15. There is not in today’s newspaper. A.nothing interesting B.interesting something C. interesting D.anything interesting 五、展示 1.个人或小组读词语。 2．完成文中的提问。 六、学以致用 1.Nice to meet you. I _____ you for a long time. A. hadn’t seen B. haven’t seen C. didn’t see D.will not see 2.Last night he had a bed to sleep__,but I had only a chair to sit ___. A.in,on B./,/ C.on,in D.in,to 3.About ________ of the workers in the factory were born in the ________. A.two-thirds,1970 B.two-thirds,1970s C.two-third,1970 D.two-third,1970s 4.（2009 年孝感）Is William’s lifestyle _________ David’s? A.the same B.same as C.same to D.the same as Unit 10 I have had this bike for three years.（第 5 课时） Section B 2b-self-check 导学案 一、学习目标: 能力目标：1.学习一些新词汇。 2.继续学习现在完成时。 3.学写英语读书笔记。 二、预习导学 1．根据音标学习新单词，并记意思。 2．继续读 2a 完成 2b,2c. 3.完成 P79-80 页，小组合作讨论。 4．和组长一起复习。 三、自学检测 1.look for, go back, across from, in my opinion... 2.comeplete the sentences using for or since. Eg:I have not been to a museum_____________......p80 3.complete the conversation. Hey eric, ____________you enjoyed your time in Beijing so far?p80 四、合作探究 1.小组讨论并核对导学案中练习的答案。 2.组长带领组员找出课本 P79 的重要短语、句子。 3.组长带领组员熟读 2a 课文，并挑选课堂展示人选。 五、展示 1.多组合作展示 P79-80 的答案。 2.小组合作展示 3a 的对话。 六、学以致用 用所给动词的正确时态填空 1. I __________(finish)today’s homework already. What about you? 2. He ____________ just ____________(decide) to join the swimming club. 3. _______you ____________(see) Jack recently? ——No , I haven’ t. 4. How long ____________ you ____________(be) in class today? 5. How many English words ____________ they ____________(learn)? 6. He ___________ ever ___________ (be) to the History Museum several times. 7. — _____________ you ever ___________ (be) to the zoo? —Yes. I ____ (go) there last summer. I __ (see) many kinds of animals there. 8. —Where is Mr . Wang? —He _________ (go) to the library. He wants to borrow some library books. 选择题 ( ) 1. ----_____ you ever _____ to an aquarium? ----Yes, we had a good time there. A. Have, gone B. Had, been C. Have, been ( ) 2. I _____ my grandpa last Sunday. A. have visited B. visited C. was visiting ( ) 3. She _____ Shanghai for a month. A. has come to B. came to C. has been in ( ) 4. Lu Xun _____ more than fifty years ago. A. died B. has died C. has been dead ( ) 5. Fanny _____ TV at this time last Saturday. A. has watched B. was watching C. watched ( ) 6. ---- Have you ____ been to our town before? ---- No, it's the first time I ___ here. A. even, have come B. ever, come C. ever, have come 【课后反思】 八年级英语下学期期中测试题 附参考答案和听力材料 班级 姓名 成绩 听 力 部 分 (共 20 分, 每小题 1 分) 一、 看图，听对话，选择与对话一致的图片。(共 5 分) A B C D E 1. ( ) 2. ( ) 3. ( ) 4. ( ) 5. ( ) 二、听句子，选择恰当的答语。(共 5 分) 6 A Yes, I will. B Yes, there will. C Yes, they will. 7 A Not at all. B No, I couldn’t. C sorry, I can’t. 8 A My mother will be mad at me. B I will get good grades. C I will watch TV. 9 A Nothing much. Why? B I am a doctor. C I like English. 10 A It’s sunny. B It will be well. C It will be good. 三、听短文，判断正误，正确的选 A；错误的选 B。(共 5 分) ( ) 11. Jack did well in his lessons. ( ) 12. Jack’s parents work in a hospital. ( ) 13. Jack’s parents want him to be a cleaner. ( ) 14. Cleaners work only one day a week. ( ) 15. Jack is lazy and not clever. 四、 短文， 根据所听内容，选择与文章意思一致的选项。(共 5 分) ( ) 16. When did the speaker walk into the town? A. In the morning. B. In the afternoon. C. At night. D. At noon. ( ) 17. How did the donkey(驴) look? A. Lovely. B. Clever. C. Funny. D. Angry. ( ) 18. Whose was the donkey? A. The writer’s. B. The farmer’s. C. The policeman’s. D. Grandmother’s. ( ) 19. What helped the donkey move? A. A carrot. B. A rope. C. A donkey. D. A parrot. ( ) 20. What will happen next? A. The farmer will beat the donkey. B. The donkey will be angry. C. the traffic jam（交通堵塞） will happen again. D. The writer and her grandma will go on having lunch in the restaurant. 笔试部分（80 分） 一、单项选择(共 20 分，每小题 1 分) ( ) 1. A place to live in space is _________. A. a space station B. an apartment C. a rocket ( ) 2. 10 years ago， _________ only one classroom building in our school. And in 10 years， _________ five classroom buildings in our school. A. there will be, there are B. there was, there will be C. there will be; there was ( ) 3. He goes to work early on workdays _________ Saturday and Sunday. A. except B. besides C. and ( ) 4. My friends always get better grades than I do. What should I do? A. Maybe you should be more friendly to the teachers. B. Maybe you should ask your parents for help. C Maybe you should work harder. ( ) 5. “What time does the plane _________?” “I think at about 10 o’clock.” A. drop off B. get off C. take off ( ) 6. Lily called me _________ Friday morning and told me she was having a birthday party _________ me tomorrow. A. at; for B. on; with C on; for ( ) 7. Nina is clever but kind of lazy. If she _________harder, she _________ better grades. A. will work; gets B. works; will get C. will work; will get （ ） 8. If you meet troubles in your life, you must try to _________the troubles. A. turn over B. get over C. look over ( ) 9. I was never _________ to receive a _________ result from my science teacher. A. surprised; disappointed B. surprised; disappointing C. surprising; disappointed ( ) 10. Would you mind ________ the window, please? It’s so cold. A to close B close C closing ( ) 11 –Would you mind mending the bike for me? A Not at all. B No, thanks. C That’s all right. ( ) 12 In China, many families are ______ to buy cars these days. A enough rich B rich enough C very rich ( ) 13 If you come to the party, you _____ a great time. A would have B have C will have ( )14 I don’t know ______ happened outside. A how B what C when ( ) 15 Paul told us he wasn’t mad ______ Marcia anymore. A in B at C on ( ) 16 _______ the boy was walking down the street, the UFO landed. A While B After C Before ( ) 17 Will there be more trees? Yes, ______. A there will. B they will. C there have. ( ) 18 Tom often makes his friends _______. A laugh B laughed C laughing ( ) 19 My friend was planning a party. _________ was invited except me. A Other everyone B Else everyone C Everyone else ( ) 20 We’ll stay at home if it _______ tomorrow. A will rain B rains C rained 二、选词填空。（10 分） less, kinds of, took, until, was mad at, in good health, organize, get on, pass on, landed 1 Lana said she _____________ Marcia. 2 –Will there be ________ pollution than before? -- I think so. 3 I have a good friend. I ________ well with him. 4 Can you _______ the games for the class party? 5 She ________ the bus to school last week. 6 He takes exercises every day. So he is ___________. 7 There are many different ____________ animals in the zoo. 8 The students didn’t stop talking ________ the teacher came in. 9 My flight to New York _________ at 9:00 last night. 10 I’m seeing Sue this afternoon. Do you want me to _______ any message? 三、完型填空（共 10 分，每小题 1 分） （A） The school party will be held on Sep. 30th. Many students like to go to the (1)________. But before the party, the school principal has made many rules for it: the students cannot (2)_________jeans to the party; the students cannot (3)__________ friends from other schools; the students cannot run or (4)__________ at the party. What will happen if they do? They will be asked to leave or they will not be let in. ( ) 1. A. school B. party C. gym D. meeting ( ) 2. A. put on B. in C. wear D. take off ( ) 3. A. bring B. take C. make D. let ( ) 4. A. sit B. sing C. dance D. shout （B） Small cars may take the place of big cars in the future. There is space for only two people in such a car. If everyone (5)________ such a car, there will be less pollution (6)________ the air. There will also be more space for (7)________ cars in cities, and the streets will be less crowded. The little cars will cost (8)________ less. Driving will be (9)________, too, as these little cars can go only 65 kilometers per(每) hour. If big cars are still used along with the small ones, two sets of road will be needed in the future. Some roads will be used (10)________ the big, fast cars and the other roads will be needed for the slower, small ones. ( ) 5. A. rides B. drives C. pushes ( ) 6.A. for B. on C. in ( ) 7.A. stopping B. stop C. parking ( ) 8.A. lots of B. many C. much ( ) 9.A. safer B. dangerous C danger ( ) 10..A. as B for C in 四、按要求变换句型（10 分） 1 I was watching TV when Mother came in.(用 while 替换) ________ I was _______ TV, Mother came in. 2 Mr Wang told us, “ We will have a long holiday.”(改写为间接引语) Mr Wang told us ______ _______ have a long holiday. 3 They will go to Beijing on vacation next week. They will have enough time.(合并为含 if 的 复合句) They will go to Beijing on vacation next week ______ they ______ enough time. 4 You should come here by bike.(改为否定句) You _______ _______ here by bike. 5 Ted saw an alien yesterday.(改写为一般疑问句) _______ Ted ______ an alien yesterday? 6 The boy was riding a bike when the UFO landed?(对划线部分提问) _______ was the boy _______ when the UFO landed? 7 John did his homework last night.(用 at nine o’clock last night 替换 last night) John _______ ________ his homework at nine o’clock last night. 8 Brazil will win the World Cup next time. (改写为一般疑问句) ______ Brazil _______ the World Cup next time? 9 I got to school late because the traffic was very busy. (对划线部分提问) _________ ______ you get to school late? 10 Could you please open the window?(改写为同义句) _______ you mind _______ the window? 五、将左右两栏对应句连接，使他们相匹配。（10 分） 1 I have a math test tomorrow. A Yes, there will. 2 While Mary was talking on the phone, B her sister walked in. 3 I think I’m going to eat a big ice cream. C Could you please help me with my homework? 4 Don’t bring food to school. D He said I couldn’t go to the party. 5 What did your father say? E Sorry, I’ll eat them right away. 6 I can’t sleep. What should I do? F Why don’t you listen to some relaxing music. 7 Would you mind eating your vegetables? G Would you mind cleaning the classroom? 8 Will there be less pollution in 100 years? H You should study tonight. 9 The classroom is too dirty. I If you do, the teacher will take it away. 10 My homework is too difficult. J If you do, you’ll have a stomachache. 六、用动词的适当时态填空.(5 分) 1 Betty ________(fly) to Shanghai tomorrow. 2 Look! Many girls ________ (play) games over there. 3 My father usually ________(go) swimming in summer. 4 She said she ________(can) speak three languages. 5 He _________(read) an English book now. 6 They ________(not have) any classes next week. 7 He told us that he __________(visit) his grandpa next week. 8 Last year, they ________(buy) a new computer. 9 We won’t go to movies if it __________(rain) tomorrow. 10 Jim _______ (talk) on the phone when the man came in. 七、阅读理解（10 分） （A） My friend, Dick, has a large police dog. It’s name is Jack. Every Saturday afternoon Dick takes Jack for a long walk in the park. Jack likes these long walks very much. One Saturday afternoon, a young man came to visit my friend. He stayed a long time. He talked and talked. Soon it was time for my friend to take Jack for a walk. But the man was still there. Jack became very worried. He walked around the room several times and then sat down in front of the man and looked at him. But the man kept talking. Finally Jack could stand it no longer. He went out of the room and came back a few minutes later. He sat down again in front of the man, but this time he held the man’s hat in his mouth. 1 From the story, we know that Jack is ________. A Dick’s good friend B a large police dog C a young man 2 Where does Dick walk with his dog every Saturday afternoon? A In his room B In the street C In the park 3 Jack became very worried one afternoon because ______. A he couldn’t be taken out for a walk at the usual time. B a young man came to visit Dick that afternoon. C Dick walked around his room several times. 4 What does the word “stand” mean in the passage? A 站立 B 理解 C 忍受 5 Why did Jack sit down again in front of the man with the hat in his mouth? A Try to take the man laugh. B Like the young man very much. C Ask the young man to leave. （B） Mr. Jenkins is a farmer. One day he drives his truck to town and on the way his truck knocked down a boy and hurt（弄伤） him. He takes the boy to a hospital and he pays a lot of money for that, but the boy’s parents want to get more money from him, so they say their son can’t lift（举起） his right arm above his head. Mr. Jenkins’ lawyer comes and asks the boy some questions. “Now, my boy,” he says, “Mr.Jenkins’ truck knocks you down in the street.” “Yes, sir,” he says. “And you can’t lift your right arm now?” “Yes, sir,” he says. “Could you show how high you can lift your right arm?” Slowly the boy lifts his right arm before his nose. “Poor boy,” says the lawyer, “And how high can you lift before the accident?” “Oh, I can lift it very high.” Says the boy, and the right hand goes up high above his head. 1. Mr. Jenkins’ truck knocks down ________. A. a lawyer B. a boy’s father C. a boy 2. The boy’s parents want to get ________ from him. A. more trucks B. more money C. more monkeys 3. Mr. Jenkins’ lawyer asks the boy to ______. A. ask some questions B. answer some questions C. lift his left arm 4. The boy says he can’t lift his _________ now. A. right arm B. left arm C. right foot 5. There is _______ wrong with the boy. A. something B. anything C. nothing 八、按要求完成下题。（5 分） (A). 按要求将所给的单词、词组分类。（请填字母序号）（3 分） a) When I was young, I never _____________________. b) I’m going to be a/ an _____________________ in 10 years. c) If I have leisure time, I will ____________________. (B).根据实际回答问题。（2 分） 1. What did you do when you were young? I _____________________ when I was young. 2. What will you do in your leisure（空闲）time? In my leisure time I will ________________________. 3 If you argue with your parents, what should you do? If I argue with my parents, ________________________. 4 What did your math teacher say about your last test? He said ______________________________. B 卷(20 分) 一、选词填空：选用十个词，用适当形式填空，每空限用一次。（5 分） Ａ. have a part-time job Ｂ. forgot to do the homework C. travel around the world D. computer programmers E. had a fight with friends F. inventors G. arrived late for school H. plant more trees I. airline pilots health, usual, good, sleep, late, real, hard, hour, much, loud, have, work Everyone needs to sleep. During the day you work and play; at night you sleep. Your body rests while you are 1 . In the morning you are ready to 2 , study or play again. If you sleep 3 at night, you can work or learn better in the day. Your body grows more while you are asleep. No one can live without sleeping. If a child is tired, he needs 4 sleep than usual. You will be tired or will not be able to listen to your teachers in class or can’t work well if you do not have enough sleep at night. A baby will cry 5 if you wake him or her up when he or she is sleeping. You will be able to work 6 at your lessons if you 7 enough rest. Many students hope to learn more before rests, so they study until 8 at night. But they feel very tired in the day and they may forget more. Boys and girls of eight or nine need ten 9 of sleep every night. Get enough sleep if you want to be strong and 10 . 二、汉译英（5 分） 1 你们总是和老师相处得好吗？ _______ you always get _______ _______ _______ your teachers? 2 如果他走了，将会发生什么？ What _______ _______ _______ he ________. 3 数学是最重要的科目之一。 Math is ______ ________ the most _________ ________. 4 我昨天买的笔不能写。 The pen ______ ________ yesterday _______ _________. 5 五年前你住在哪里？十年后你会在哪工作？ Where ______ you ________ five years ago? Where ______ you ________ in ten years? 三、阅 读 理 解（5 分） （A） Many young people can use the computer, but few of them know how to look after them. Remember the following when you use the computer.  Keep your computer in a cool, dry room. Too much or too little heat is bad for computers. Damp is also bad for them. Most computers work best at a temperature of 5-30 degrees centigrade.  Do not let people smoke cigarettes near your computer. Smoke of all kinds is very bad for many parts of a computer and can cause many problems.  Do not eat or drink when you are near your computer. Pieces of food and a little water in the keyboard can also cause many problems.  Make sure that the keyboard and the screen are the correct height for you. If they are not correct, you‘ll get backache.  Make sure the screen is the correct distance from your eyes. If you wear glasses, make sure these glasses are correct for using with the computer. Some people use a different pair of glasses when they use a computer.  Keep your screen clean and do not have it too bright. A dirty screen can hurt your eyes. A very bright screen can also be bad for your eyes. If you can afford one, buy a computer screen. It will be better for you than using the screen of a TV set. ( ) 1. According to this passage, ________. A. more and more people can control computers as well as take care of them. B. fewer and fewer people pay any attention to the protection of the computers nowadays. C. most young people can control computers well while paying little attention to keeping them well. C. Most computer lovers are fond of eating their food while playing computer games. ( ) 2 . Computer, just like some people, may prefer(更喜欢) ________. A. autumn to（比起）summer and winter B. neither winter nor summer or autumn C. summer to winter and autumn D. both summer and winter ( ) 3. Putting the keyboard and screen too high means you ________. A. have to straighten your back long every time B. have to lower your head while using the computer C. don’t have to look at your manuscript while typing D. don’t have to look sideways from time to time ( ) 4. Some people use a different pair of glasses when they use a computer because they want to ________. A. protect the computer B. prevent their eyes being hurt C. make them look cool D. show off his glasses ( ) 5. Which is NOT true according to the passage? A. If the height of the screen isn’t correct, you’ll get backache. B. Smoking is bad for a computer and is one of the cause of many problems. C. You should wear a different pair of glasses when you use a computer. D. You should use a computer screen instead of a TV screen. 四、 小作文（5 分） （Ａ）根据下面图中所给的信息，描述你在校的学习情况。（2 分） My name is Dabao. I’m a student in Junior Two. I was good at (1)_________ 5 years ago. I could also (2)________________ very well. Now I am as hard - working as before. I can (3)__________________in all the subjects than my classmates. I can speak English very well. My head teacher always says I am excellent. She hopes I can become (4)________________ when I grow up. (B) 谈谈你的学习情况。结合自己的发展, 描述 2008 年的北京。（至少５句话）（3 分） _________________________________________________________________________ _________________________________________________________________________ _________________________________________________________________________ _________________________________________________________________________ _____________________________ _________________________________________________________________________ _________________________________________________________________________ ________________ 新目标八年级英语下学期期中测试题 班级 姓名 成绩 听力部分（20 分） 1、____ 2、____ 3、____ 4、____ 5、____ 6、____ 7、____ 8、____ 9、____ 10、____ 11、____ 12、____ 13、____ 14、____ 15、____ 16、____ 17、____ 18、____ 19、____ 20、____ 笔试部分 一、 单项选择。（20 分） 1、____ 2、____ 3、____ 4、____ 5、____ 6、____ 7、____ 8、____ 9、____ 10、____ 11、____ 12、____ 13、____ 14、____ 15、____ 16、____ 17、____ 18、____ 19、____ 20、____ 二、 选择适当的词填空。（10 分） 1 、 ___________________ 2 、 _________________ 3 、 _____________ 4 、 _________________ 5 、 _________________ 6、_____________ 7、____________ 8、 ___________ 9、___________ 10、_______ 三、 完型填空。（10 分） 1、___ 2、___ 3、___ 4、___ 5、___ 6、___ 7、___ 8、___ 9、___10、 ___ 四、 句型转换。（10 分） 1、____ ____ 2、____ ____ 3、____ ____ 4、____ ____ 5、____ ____ 6、____ ____ 7、____ _____ 8、____ ____ 9、____ ____ 10、____ ____ 五、 将左右两栏对应句连接，使他们相匹配。（10 分） 1、____ 2、____ 3、____ 4、____ 5、____ 6、____ 7、____ 8、____ 9、____ 10、____ 六、用动词的适当时态填空.(5 分) 1、________ 2、___________ 3、__________ 4、 ___________ 5 、 ________ 6 、 ____________ 7 、 ___________ 8、_________ 9、_________ 10、___________ 七、阅读理解。（10 分） 1、____ 2、____ 3、____ 4、____ 5、____ 6、____ 7、____ 8、____ 9、____ 10、____ 八、按要求完成下题。（5 分） a)___________ b)______________ c)_____________ 1____________________________ 2_____________________________ 3____________________________ 4_____________________________ B 卷(20 分) 一、 选词填空：选用十个词，用适当形式填空，每空限用一次。（5 分） 1、____ 2、____ 3、____ 4、____ 5、____ 6、____ 7、____ 8、____ 9、____ 10、____ 二、汉翻英，一空一词。（5 分） 1、____ ____ ____ ____ 2、____ ____ ____ ____ 3、____ ____ ____ ____ 4、____ ____ ____ ____ 5、____ ____ ____ ___ 三、阅读理解。（5 分） 1、____ 2、____ 3、____ 4、____ 5、____ 四、小作文（5 分） (A) 1、___________ 2、___________ 3、_____________ 4、__________ (B) ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ______ 新目标八年级英语下学期期中测试题 试 题 答 案 听 力 部 分 (共 20 分, 每小题 1 分) 听力稿 一、看图，听对话，选择与对话一致的图片。(共 5 分) 1. A：Do you think people will have robots in their homes in 100 years? B：Yes, I do. I saw a robot on TV, and it cleaned the kitchen. 2. A：Hi, Joe, what do you think your life will be like in 10 years? B：Oh, I think I’ll be an astronaut and I’ll fly to the moon and Mars. 3. A：What were you doing when the UFO landed? B：I was cutting hair in my barber shop. 4. A：While I was walking down the street, I saw a cat in a tree. It was really scared. B：What did you do? A: I climbed the tree and got it. 5 A：What are you going to wear to the party? B：I’ll wear my new T-shirt. A：If you do, the teachers won’t let you in. 二、 听句子，选择恰当的答语。(共 5 分) 1 Will there be robots in the future? 2 Could you turn off the music? 3 If you work hard, what will happen? 4 What are you going to do tomorrow? 5 What will the weather be like next week 五、 听短文，判断正误，正确的选 A；错误的选 B。(共 5 分) Jack was ten years old and he was a very lazy boy. He didn’t like doing any work. He had to go to school, of course, but he didn’t study hard there and tried to do little work. His father and mother were both doctors and they hoped that when he grew up their son would become a doctor too. But one day Jack said to his mother, “When I finished school, I want to be a cleaner.” “A cleaner?” his mother asked. She was very surprised, “That’s not a good job.” Why you do want to become a cleaner?” “Because I would only have to work one day a week.” Jack answered at once. “Only one day a week?” his mother said. “What do you mean? And how do you know it?” “Well,” Jack answered, “I know that the cleaner comes to work on Thursday every week, because I only see them on that day.” And then his mother laughed and said, “The cleaners go to work on Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday and Friday in other streets.” 六、 听短文， 根据所听内容，选择与文章意思一致的选项。(共 5 分) I had a very unusual experience last Saturday. Grandma and I walked in to a restaurant and had our lunch. While we were sitting at table, we saw many people in the street. “What’s going on?’” grandma asked. “Let’s have a look,” I said. When we went over to the crowd, we noticed a very funny donkey walking across the road. We both watched the donkey. It stopped in the middle of the road, and stopped all the traffic. While we were worried, a policeman arrived. “Whose donkey is it?” “It’s mine.” A farmer said. “You must move your donkey.” The policeman said. Then the farmer pulled and the farmer pushed, but the donkey didn’t move. We all laughed. “Give him a carrot!” Grandma cried. “That’s a good idea.” The farmer said. When the donkey saw the carrot, he followed the farmer across the road. 听 力 部 分(共 20 分, 每小题 1 分) 一、1-5 DABEC 二、6-10 BCBAC 三、11-15BABBA 四、16-20DCBAC 基础知识运用（共 20 分, 每小题 1 分） 一、单项选择 1-20 ABACC； CBBBC; ABCBB; AAACB 二、选词填空。（10 分） 1 was mad at 2 less 3 get on 4 organize 5 took 6 in good health 7 kinds of 8 until 9 landed 10 pass on 三、完型填空 (10 分) (A). 1-4 BCAD (B). 5- 10 BCCCAB 四、按要求变换句型（10 分） 1 While, watching 2 they, would 3 if, have 4 shouldn’t come 5 Did, see 6 What, doing 7 was, doing 8 Will, win 9 Why, did 10 Would, opening 七、 将左右两栏对应句连接，使他们相匹配。（10 分） 1-10 HBJID FEAGC 六、用动词的适当时态填空.(5 分) 1 will fly 2 are playing 3 goes 4 could 5 is reading 6 won’t have 7would visit 8 bought 9 rains 10 was talking 七、阅 读 理 解（共 10 分, 每小题 1 分） (A). BCACC; (B). CBBBC; 八、综合语言运用（共 5 分） 一、(A)．1. BEG 2. DFI 3. ACH (B). (vary answers) B 卷(20 分) 一、选词填空：选用十个词，用适当形式填空，每空限用一次。（5 分） 1 sleeping, 2 work, 3 well, 4 more, 5 loudly 6 hard 7 have 8 late 9 hours 10 healthy 二、汉译英（5 分） 1 Do on well with 2 will happen if leaves 3 one of important subjects 4 I bought doesn’t work. 5 did live will work 三、阅 读 理 解（5 分） 1-5 CAABC 四、小作文（5 分） (A)．1. dancing 2. play the violin 3. do better 4. an English teacher (B). (vary )